HomeMy WebLinkAboutWEST DAY MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOMVob*ldtr\BRr'"( | tfz i4^*n^^^r7
o DEPARTMENT oF coMMuril" orurtoPMENTTOWN OF VAIL
75 S. FRONTAGEROAD
VAIL. CO 81657
970-479-2138
r.r1 r, t< \K \
\)--^\ 1g 3::'
NOTE: THIS PERMIT MUST BE POSTED ON JOBSITE AT ALL TIMES
ADD/ALT COMM BUILD PERMT Permit # 806-0242
Project # PRI06-0364
Job Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL Status . . . : ISSUED
Location.......: VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM Applied .. . : 0811712006
ParcelNo....: 2l0lffi2050l5 Issued...: lOl3OlzOM
Exoires.....: Ml28l2W7
owNER VAMr{C rNC 08/L7/2006
PO BOX 7
VAILco 815s8
APPIJICANI ,f .L. VIEI-,E CONSTRUCTION 08/L7 /2006 Phone z 970-4'76-3O82
1000 S Fronlage Road W, #202
Vai-lco 4L657
I-,icense: 188-A
CoNTRACTOR \T.IJ. VIELE CONSTRUCTION 08/L7 /2006 Phone: 970-476-3082
1000 S Frontage Road W, #202Vailco 815s7
I-,icense:188-A
Desciption:
MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM-ARCHITECTURAL FINISH AND ELECTRICAL
UPGRADES TO THE GRAND BALLROOM AND PREFUNCTION LOBBY.
Occupancy: A-2
Type Construction: I-B
Valuation: 1,574,364.00 Revision Valuation: $0.00 Add Sq Ft:
*************:t**********t{.:i*{.****+**+*++************************+**
Building--- > $1 ,'to1 -50 Restuarant Plan Review-> $0.00 Total Calculated Fees- > lL2,72o.3a
Plan Check--> $5,009.88 Recreation Fee------*-> S0.00 Additional Fees----------) $12s.00
lnvesrigation- > $0.00 TOTAL FEES------- > lr2,'t2o.3B Total Permir Fee-----> $12,845-38
Will Cdl-----> 93.00 Payments----------- > $12,84s.38
BALANCE DUE---------> S0.00
Approvals:
IICM: O51OO BUIIJDING DEPARTMENT
09/08/2006 cgunion Action: CR see \/h/n
Lo/18/2o06 cgunj-on Action: CR second check
review letter sent
L0/26/2o06 cgrrnion Action: AP approved corrected
drawings
Item: 05400 PLANNING DEPARTMENI
08/1"7 /2006 Warren Action: AP There are no
exterior changes proposed with this permit, There are no
parkign implications associated with this applicatj.on.
Any exterior structure modications/changes will reguire a
Design Review application.
L0/LL/20O6 Warren Action: AP The revisions
submitted on october I ,ooa, are approved.
ItEM: 05600 FIRE DEPARTMENT
Item: 05500 PIIBL,IC WORKS
LO/L2/2OO6 gc Action: COND Construction
staging to meet TOV standers. Contractor must contact PW
for staging approval .
See the Conditions section of this Document for any conditions that may apply to this permit.
DECLARATIONS
I hereby acknowledge that I have read this application, filled out in full the information required, completed an accurate plot
plan, and state tllat all the information as required is correct, I agree to comply with the information and plot plan, to comply
with all Town ordinances and state laws, and to build this structure according to the towns zoning and subdivision codes, design
review approved, International Building and Residential Codes and other ordinances of the Town applicable thereto.
RFQUESTS FOR INSPECTION SIIALL BE MADE TWENTY.FOUR HOI.JN.S IN {,rR OFFICE FROM 8:fi)
AM - 4 PNI,
SIGNATURE OF OWNER OR CONTRACTOR FOR HIMSELF AND OWNEI
vv
,f *****t * ** * ** * * * ***,** * * * 1. * * ** * * ** * * * * * * *,F ** *,1. *:* * * * l.* * * * * **
'lc
* * *
'1.
* * ** * *' * ** ** **,k*4(**
CONDITIONS OF APPROVAL
*'i*i(*i. *:1. *t ***t *r.*:x***,F'r
Permit #: 806-0242 as of 10-30-2006 Status: ISSUED
**+**t *tr:F*:F:F******************t!***,F*********r<***********t<*****************:8***{<**********{<*{<*****{c4.*****
Permit Type: ADD/ALT COMM BUILD PERMT Applied: 08ll7l2ffi6
Applicant: J.L. VIELE CONSTRUCTION Issued: 1013012006
970476-3082 To Exoire: 0412812007
Job Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL
Location: VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM
Parcel No: 210107205015
Description:
MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM-ARCHITECTURAL FINISH AND ELECTRICAL
UPGRADES TO THE GRAND BALLROOM AND PREFUNCTION LOBBY.
*'|.**t**'r*****x****************:t'({.'.*,(*'.*x{<*,<1.**:r'!Conditions.*{<:|.i(*,t.'.,}*.*,|.*,t!'.'t********,.**:t{<,tc**********
Cond: I
(FIRE): FIRE DEPARTMENT APPROVAL IS REQUIRED BEFORE ANY
WORK CAN BE STARTED.
Cond: 12
(BLDG.): FIELD INSPECTIONS ARE REQUIRED TO CHECK FOR CODE
COMPLIANCE.
Cond: CON0008524
NO STORAGE ALLOWED IN THE BACK EXIT CORRIDOR AND STAIRWAYS.
SEE LETTER ON FILE FROM MARRIOTT OPERATIONS. VERIFY THIS
AREA IS CLEAR PRIOR TO TCO.
Cond: CON0008525
OCCUPANT LOAD SIGNAGE REQURIED FOR EACH SALON AND FOR THE
MAIN BALLROOM AND PREFUNCTION AREAS. SEE PLANS FOR OCCUPANT
LOAD NUMBERS
Cond: CON0008526
I HOUR GRID AND CEILING TILES REQUIRED WHERE NEW T-GRID IS
INSTALLED.
Cond:40
(BLDG): (MFR/COMM) FIRE ALARM REQUIRED PER NFPA 72.
* * ***** *++**** * * * * * * * * * * + + * * * * * * * f t*f,**********+***************++************+**+**t **+*****
TOWNOFVAIL. COI.ORADO Statement
Statement Number:
Payment Method:
50552
R060001827 Amount:
Check
gz,s3s.so ro/30/2oo51o:08 AM
Init: DDG
Notation: iIL Viele
Permit No:
Parcel No:
Site Address :
Location:
This Palrment:
BP 00r_00003111100
cL 00100003123000
wc 00100003112800
BUIIJDING PERMIT FEES
CONTRACTOR LICENSES
WIIL CA].,L INSPECTION FEE
Total Fees: $l-2,845.38
Tot,al ALL Pmts: $12,845.38
7,707.50
-LZ5 . UU
3 .00
806-0242 r14)e: ADD/AL,T COMM BUILD PERI-,IT
2101-072-0501-5
714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAII,
VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BA],I.,ROOM
$7, 83s . s0
Balance :$0.00
*************'|,|.'|.*:l.:|.*{.***'N.*{.{.***********'t**:t.*,|.:|..t.'tt'N.'t'|t*'t.*{.'|.{.,(***{.{.*{.*{.:|.i.:|.t|!|.l|.**********
ACCOUNT ITEMLIST:
Account, Code DescriDtion Current Pmts
,,.ffi
*'Elue:"'6'a'wPLETE OR
Project #:
(- o ?cv
YZ
75 S. Frontage Rd.
Vail, Colorado 81657
F: kdev\FORi4S\Permits\8uilding\building$e(miL4-21-06. Doc
CONTRACTOR INFORMATION
General Contracior:
JLtl*t (astprprt.lrc.Town of Vail Reg. No.:
tb8. A
Conlact Person and Phone #s:
Sanr f,oa6 - +ra'1otz
O.
n t'*, /t /rn /,/
COMPLETE VALUATIONS FOR BUILDING PERMIT (Labor & Materials
BUILDING: $ l,lLg .cl lS ELECTRTCAL:$365 531 OTHER: $ --
PLUMBING: $ .-MECHANICAL: $ 31.701 rorAL:$ I,S1 + 56+
ForParcel# Contact Assessors OflTce at 97&328-8040 or vlsll
**r**r***r.t*r{***r**'**|*t*i*{*itr*r*ttir*****FoR oFFICE USE ONLY***t*trr*t**r'r*r**irt*ri#r**********t**?rJt+*****l*
'1-,IOt01Lo5ots
Job Address: 1 , + a), crar.{S {eaA c12r.!iJob Nam€: AARArort el**A Ekt4rzxv-
:.q0t.t .;t1aro+t- ru.L,S& ND €kaLILrC*, urc{fe,O4f
Work Chss: l'le\,y ( ) Addition ( ) Remodel ${ Repair( ) Demo( ) other ( )
Does an EHU exist at this location: Yes ( ) No,8 )Work Type: Inierior |Q, Exterior ( ) Bolh ( )
Type otBldg.: Single-family ( ) Tu/o-family ( ) Muki-family ( ) Commercial 9{ Restaurant ( }Other( )
Norcf A""ot.odation Units in this building: ff p*.iUcNo. of Exisling Drrrelling Units in this building:
Gas Loqs ( ) Wood/Peltet ( ) Wood Burning ( 'l *okeUu
No/Tvpe of Fireolaces Proposed: Gas Gas Loos (4, Wood/Pellet (c2 Wood Burning (NoT A4aWED
,*,",$uG I 6 2oo0o/r,/'*
oo
F6r$mfiii'- ld.sFififfiEE-
sm"lii&- orarmFilifrfr$nulFimim-
D*@ffi- E dla r
l-dlir HiNRETT R{ASI lll
blnsffitr-l F.rdthli.Ufti:
or*ods lE- |Gffifiiffiiiomm.
p't li- nh l'i- Aron l- 6nhnl--fr
rpcmtslifi* l=T=T;liffi. h*l,cqFm'
olonerq,F-f..i-r---i..T:5il--r1
0c.C{q+ Fi- ffi .ldlffiim- tuBkFnm-
UrvrJr | $05$$m rmd l$lt/lm |nfttrl/-/-
bldlfrffi Pcdt.glii6m-
eiedliffi- cddoqllr-
ftrdil- osird&tdr,{,rdd,tbdrdT:/-/*-
I
I
-l
Nl-!
Nle;la
I
I
Gl
a)
E
n
lr'1
(|)
0)
r1
o)
o
boql
0.,
(q
o
t6
q)
G
OJ
q,)
OJ
AJ
3
!)
i!
EJ
E
F
F.:
t!)
| 2.1 a*,f ' .9
=l iir
it.;26H:.-.E
=vi-ag
f ) t, YY-hlJ)i uJ
- Lr 0.)6'.9!
TE. E
rl'ett>\tt?t<t Ftzt tttz
t\l('JI 'UENll ! o,<l ji
^il +, .F&l!'!tx:r
l-(9| !.r rsl;<nl\-/'v o.. IG. IE
^lil
frlE(JtP
>,tutH-l e&Fl I
u 9!t 'EoEl 3,^l .EI ailIOIt"t EINIlst ?tt.9ttE.al lo
=l i F*l I !
EEe
EZFE .! ,:iE-
t _,/ |< /'\EE Z
rDl\ol
El
ol
6lLrl
€l.Yl
-{(6l
il;l
^-l:l
EI
el
=l
'l
3
E
UIrrl
ul
(!l
0,rl
(ttl
ol
;jl
lttl
orl
3l
al
.-l
i;I
OJ
b.
E
'i: I>.9 |E! Iis I.oE I'eE
I13 |>\ ", I
r<ElsE IQo- |€F I(gH I(,)l(qtr I
Ii>. I
.-i Ft IY^.S I
€f;ui I
co(')t I? R€ I
t:e Elf;E; El:6.r *l;* E glP35 _iil
=3b Ele;€ €l9HF EIEf;; *I:;t 'Fl
siP :l
e g=
I
^(!5 I
=3ooH:-.F UTEE 'Sigl^ X*'.! I '..a"= o
Hg ! E
.=i t' O..969 'E
.s €g HlqE o €-.E-t,E ppU Z,H.! q 6U.>-g o,.EE€ Ftr8b z
FUz4
trt
DUUo
fr{o
H
HdUH
fr{
H
Hfr
HU
'6
'= *-rxsrJs
St N
F"+EE.PHEoo
E FSE
gS.P€
i,D- !t s{ Ss,FsS.\ L-.1 S .qXe8 Ytt 'S Ln E\I 5NJS.xsvl Sgos.: ,a'\s l,E
,,,,,
Crrl/ (r'y
/lfa/l)rr'11
"Corlrh' Nasf r' lirl' i i';;
5(i Rr'solf;" A;i'itrd INitrttr r
tJb /).bm/
66t t*"'z( svgv
VAIL MOUNTAIN
RESORT & 5PA
[arnott
October 27,2006
Town of Vail
To !flhom It May Concern:
In response to the plan review comments for the Grand Ballroom Renovation Projecg
please use this letter as formal commitrnent ftom the Vail Mariott Mountain Resort & Spa
to come to resolution with the Toum of Vail Fire and Building Depatrnents tegarding
accessibility and life safety concerns of the Banquet service conidor adjacent to the Gnnd
Balltoom. In a good faith effort, all permanent storage shelving has been temoved ftom the
atea and will not be re-installed. We undetsand the occupancy of the space will be limited
until a formal resolution can be reached and documented. We look forwatd to wotking
with the Building and Fire Departrnents to tesolve all concerns associated with the corridor
in a matter ,1t"1 6aintains the functionality of the bdlroom space. Please let me know what
dates and times work in your schedule in order to set up a meeting time.
General Manager
/15 Wi'st Lionsht'arl Circle . Vail. Colorirclo 81657 . 070) 476-'1'144 . Far (970) 176-1(A7 ' \'\'\ 'rv vailnlarriott cttm
1000 South ljront:rqL Roitrl Vt'st. Srrtr l(l.l
Vril, (.olorrLlo til 657
lllc 970.ri;b..l0til
l::r\ 9:0--i7(,..112.1
rlrrlr,.vielcconsrrrLction.conr
October 20, 2006
Chris Gunion
Town of Vail - Community Deveiopment
75 South Frontage Rd.
V;il" CO 81657
Dear Chris:
Tirank you for your time this moming to discuss the Marriott Grand Ballroom prolect. The
tlesigrr staff is quickly v/orking to alter the plans per our meeting. They plan to rest:bmit all
proper documentation on Monday.
The hotel property has cleared the convention space and will occupancy rates to 10% in
anticipation of starting selective cosmetic demolition on Saturday, 10121106. No guests will be
located in the west wing closest to the ballroom"
Unless you reject, we intend to proceed with following limited scope through the weekend and
until the permit can be issued on Monday:
I . Installation of dust barricades not to impede required exiting.
2. lnstallation of safety signage.
3. Conversion of the fire alarm system from smoke to heat sensing (McGee has approved)
4. Removal of all fumishings and mobile equipment.
:i. Removal of wall paper in the ballroom and prefunction lobby.
6 R emoval of the hallr.'om r rcod tnm.
7. Removal of the carpet.
8. Removal of the tile grid ceilings in the prefunction lobby.
If you have any objection to the entire scope or any portion of the selective demolition please do
not hesitate to contact me and we will adiust the plan.
Brent Amold
J.L. Viele Construction, Inc.
IVIGB OO1
7.'
.:.::
.: .,Y , "it
fuNftrnent of Community Development
Euilding Safety and Inspstion Seruices
75 South Frontage Road
Vail, Colorado 81657
970479-2138
FAX 970479-2452
www.vailgov.com
Second Check
Second check plan review comments are shown below original comment in bold italics. Other
comments have been resolved.
BUILDING SAFETY AND INSPECTION SERVICES PI.AN REVIEW COMMENTS:
TO:
NUMBER OF PAGES:
FROM:
DATE:
BUILDING PERMTT #:
OWNERS NAME:
SITE ADDRESS:
OCCUPANCY GROUP:
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION:
NUMBER OF STORIES:
BUILDING AREA:
Contractor/Applicant
Viele Construction
Brent Arnold
Architect copyl
GwathmeyPrattSchultz adam@arcinc.to
proj# Marriott Ballroom
FAX/Email #: brent@vieleconstruction.com gpsxvail@aol.com
3
Chris Gunion, Building Plans Examiner
LolL912006
8,06-0242
Diamond Rock Hospitality
714 West Lionshead Circle
A-2
?
?
?
The documents submitted for this project have been reviewed for compliance with the 2003
Intemational Building Code,2003 International Residential Code, 2003International Mechanical
Code, 2003 International Fuel Gas Code, 2003 International Plumbing Code, 2003 International
Energy Conseruation Code and 2002 National Electrical Code as modified and adopted by the Town of
Vail.
The following @mmenb will need tu he addressd pnbr b issuance of a building permit:
For processing:o Please submit four comolete sets of revised construction documents containino the reouested
information with all plan revision items clouded or othenruise identified.
o Please respond in writino to each comment by markino the attached list or creating a response
letter. Indicate which plan sheet, detail. specification, or calculation shows the requested
information. Please send revisions to the attention of the plans examiner with the building
oermit aoolication number noted.
o Please be sure to include on the resubmittal the enqineer's or architect's "wet" stamp, siqnature,
registration number and date on the cover page of anv structural calculations, all structural
details and structural sheets of the olans. For commercial or multi-familv oroiects all sheets of
the plans must be stamoed.
Architect's General Comments
As described in the Commentary for section 3403.1 of the 2003 IBC, we feel that the scope of work
proposed in the current set of drawings submitted on October 11, 2006 does not qualif, as an
"alteration" and should be allowed to happen without triggering any requirement to bring the existing
building fire assemblies up to the current code. All new work (the A/V closets in the seruice corridor)
have 2003 compliant assemblies. We feel that the work in the restrooms also qualiff as "repairs"
under the commentary. That said we have done everything we can to satisff your requirements
given the parameters of this project.
With regard to egress, I should point out several things. The requirement for exit width has been
reduced by 25o/o from the old codes so the existing egress widths are more than the minimum
requirements.
With regard to the current practice of storage in the storage corridor exitway, the hotel management
has seen the light and as of 20 October, is removing all permanent storage from the space. They are
aware that nothing is allowed to be stored there at any time. They were operating under the
premise that they were allowed to block the exist when the Ballroom was empty- I have let them
know that this is not allowed.
Arch itectu ra I Com ments:
1 Amend plans to include a complete means of egress plan. Include occupant loads, travel distances,
common path of egress travel, exit widths, location of exits and exit discharge to the public ways.
Where exits pass through adjacent spaces include complete information and plans for the adjacent
areas. IBC 106.1.2, IBC ch, 10.
The nofth *ruice orridor area is ued as a storage ara and does not ptovide arcss to
exiE, Both north exit tuirways are blrcked with tables, arB, chairc. EdB may not ps
throagh storage arcas, This arca wilI ned to be revid to provide a clar exit path from
the ballroom exit doorc b the exit dischatge. fBC tO73.2,
Amend the means of egrcss plan to include existing and proposed occupant loads, exit
widths, aommon path of qrcss travel and tavel dishnes on the means of egres plan
as neguestd. The rcom dividerc arc being replaced, n ampliane b the ade must be
verifid,
Architect response: We have put this information on the egress plan.
3 Means of egress plan shall include analysis of exits for various configurations of room dividers. IBC
ch. 10.
Salon E and F do not have 2 complying exiE The north exiE dircharge into the sbrage
ata in the eruice atridon IBC 7013.2.
The north service corridor is the second means of egress for these Ballrooms and is therefore not
allowed to serue as a storage area at any time. As it exists, it provides egress width for 720 persons
at it narrowest points (approx 9'wide). This number represents 110o/o of the total occupant load for
salons E and F combined. Therefore, we feel that the corridor provides the required compliant
second exits for these spaces. As the Architects, we cannot control how this space is or has been
used.
4 Amend plans to show the main exit and other exits for the assembly area. Show compliance with IBC
1024.2. and 1024.3.
Cootdina@ with mans of egress plan, Response indicates the main exitwidth is 7651
The maximum oeupnt load allowed for the ballr@m will be limited by the 765" width
of the main exit
When I gave you the number of 165" I was going off the original plans which showed the doors at
this exit to be 3'-6" nominal and I was going on the premise that we would not be held accountable
for the existing exit width per Section 3403.1. I was wrong on both counts; the total clear width
existing is 182". Per table 1005.1 of the 2003 IBC, 182 inches of width works back to 1213
occupants (182 / .15= 1213). Since this is the so called main exit it is required to serve half of the
total occupant load for the Ballroom and pre-function lobbies. Thus the total occupant load would be
be restricted to no more than 2426 persons- 140 persons more than the 2286 person total occupant
load derived from floor area calcs given in the previous response and based on 7 SF per person.
Furthermore, we have already reduced the occupant loads of salons B,C,H and I by 18 persons each
according to our response to item #3 in the previous set of comments (72 persons total). Thus the
existing exit width is well in excess of what is required by the 2003 IBC. I apologize for the error.
5 Amend plans to speciff the construction type of the building per IBC ch. 6.
Respnse indiafus ff-B onstruction is assumed, Tht's is not conect The building is over
the allowable storie for If-B anstrudion.
Town of Vail building petmit rwrds and prcvious drawings for the Marriot Hotel
preptd by ewathmey Pratt *hulE indiates the building is type II-FR construdion as
previously dassifid under the UBC, or type f-B under the currently adopted 2Oo3 IBC.
Revie plans,
Architect response: OK. Will revise the plans to show Type 2 FR.
7 Include fire resistive assembly details and listings for all fire resistive walls, floor/ceiling and roof
ceilings. The existing roof/ceiling, floor/ceiling, structural frame, beam and columns are required to
be protected as required for a t hour, 2 hour or 3 hour fire resistive rating per IBC table 601.
Response indicates existing eiling onrtruction will rcmain. Plans show new nired
ceilings to be installd per detail 2/A5,2, ff portions of the existing ceiling arc rcmoved'
fire rcsistive assemblis must be rcplad.
Architect response: If yor interpretation of IBC 3403.3 does not allow non-structural modifications to
take place without triggering "replacement" of the fire resistive assemblies, then we will delete all
ceiling modifications from the project. I assume that we are allowed to replace the old worn-out
ceiling tiles and any pieces of ceiling grid that have been damaged over the years.
8 Include plans for posting of occupant load per IBC 1004.3
Response indicahs owner will provide (rccupant lcnd signage. Amend plans tu indicate
maximum orcupant lad foreach spae on tlre means of egrcss phn, This information
will be neded to rcview the oeupant load signage prcpsal.
Architect response: We are attaching a list of the salons, their areas, their exit widths and the occupant
loads. All of this information has been placed on the egress plan as well.
10 Include flamespread index and smoke developed index for proposed acoustic spray insulation
proposed in the ceiling areas. IBC 719.
The new sound partitbn walls above ceiling arc no longershown on the plans. Plase
clarify where the sound insulation submitted for rcview is proposed to be insElled,
Architect response: All proposed new sound wall partitions were deleted from the previous scope of
work in our resubmittal. As currently proposed, the acoustical insulation is to be installed only in the
12" or so gap between the Partition wall track and the finish ceiling below. If this insulation is not
allowed per comment 17 below, it will be deleted from the proposed scope of work.
13 AmendregistrationcountertoshowaccessibleportionperANSIllT.l 1998. ch.9
The rcgistration oun@r is not exempt ftom ompliane with ANSI 777,1 7998' Include
an arcssible arca of the counfur per ANSI 777,7 7998 sation 902.3
Architect response: All modifications to the registration counter area have been deleted from the scope
of work and the counter will remain as exists. We assume that we will be allowed to refinish the
materials at the desk without triggering any changes to the existing counter.
15 Amend plans to provide complete construction details for the accessible restroom facilities, Include
details for accessible fixtures, fixture mounting heights, grab bars, toilet compartment sizes, doorg
dimensions, signage etc. ANSI 117.1 1998 ch. 6, IBC 3409.6
Response indicafus existing bathrcoms omply with ANSI777.7 1998, This is in@rrffitl
the existing toilet compartmenb do not omply. The existing bilet compartmenE are
between 3'-2"and 3'-8" wide, IBC 3409,6 rcguires arcessible toilet facilities A be
povided when an existing space is al@rd, Revise plans.
Architect response: All modifications to the bathrooms have been deleted from the scope of this project.
The restrooms will remain as exists and will not be accessible.
Mechanical Comments:
16 Please clarifo if ceiling space is proposed to be used as a plenum, or if all supply and return grilles
will be ducted. A duct plan was not provided for the ceiling space. If plenum ceiling is proposed,
include specification for all materials exposed in the plenum. IMC 602
Coordinate with architectural plans for any new insulation ma@rials propod above
ceiling, The* prcpod materials arc not permittd b be expsd in a teturn air
plenum,
Architect response: The proposed insulation for the ceiling areas just above the partition wall tracks is
not rated for use in plenums. We will delete all new insulation above the ceiling for now and if we
find something else that is plenum rated, we will resubmit that particular item.
17 Amend plans to show compliance with IMC 606 for smoke detection.
Respnse indiaas the smoke detection is existing, Cootdinate with fire alarm upgrade
plans,
Architect response: With the deletion of the proposed coffers in the grid ceiling, all mechanical
improvements are now out of the project. We therefore are not proposing any changes to the
existing smoke detection system,
Please refer to the cover sheet for information on resubmitting plans. In order to avoid delays in issuance of
a permit, please check 4!! rcquested information is included with the rcsubmitted plans. Please submit
revised plans as a complete s€L Partial plan resubmittals will not be rcviewed.
Chris Gunion
LC.C. Plans Examiner
Town of Vail Building Safety and Inspection Services
970.479.2369
cgunion@vailgov.com
F: \cdev\CH RIS\PERMIT.COMMENTS\805-0242\805-0242.DOC
Dffirtnent of Communv Development
Building hfety and Inspedion *Nices
75 tuuth Frcnhge Rod
VaiL &londo 81657
97Mn-2138
FAX 97(Hn-2452
www,wilgov,@m
Seond Check
Second check plan review comments are shown below original comment in bold italics. Other
comments have been resolved.
BUILDING SAFETY AND INSPECTION SERVICES PLAN REVIEW COMMENTS:
TO:Contractor/Aoolicant
Viele Construction
Brent Arnold
Architect copy:
GwathmeyPrattSchultz adam@arcinc.to
proj# Marriott Ballroom
FAX/Email #: brent@vieleconstruction.com gpsxvail@aol.com
NUMBEROF PAGES:
FROM:
DATE:
BUILDING PER}iIIT #:
OWNERS NAME:
SITE ADDRESS:
OCCUPANCYGROUP:
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION:
NUMBER OF STORIES:
BUILDING AREA:
3
Chris Gunion, Building Plans Examiner
r01L912006
806-0242
Diamond Rock Hospitality
714 West Lionshead Circle
A-2
?
?
2
The documents submitted for this project have been reviewed for compliance with the 2003
International Building Code, 2003 International ResidentialCode, 2003International Mechanical
Code, 2003 International Fuel Gas Code, 2003 International Plumbing Code, 2003 International
Energy Conservation Code and 2002 National Electrical Code as modified and adopted by the Town of
Vail.
The following @mmenE will nd to E adilM prior b isuane of a huilditrg permit:
For processing:o Please submit four complete sets of revised construction documents containing the requested
information with all olan revision items clouded or otherwise identified.
o Please respond in writing to each comment by marking the attached list or creating a response
letter. Indicate which plan sheet, detail, specification, or calculation shows the requested
information, Please send revisions to the aftention of the olans examiner with the buildino
oermit aoolication number noted.
o Please be sure to include on the resubmittal the enginee/s or architect's "wet" stamp, signature,
registration number and date on the cover page of anv structural calculations, all structural
details and structural sheets of the olans. For commercial or multi-family proiects all sheets of
the plans must be stamped.
Architectu ra I Comments:I Amend plans to include a complete means of egress plan. Include occupant loads, travel distances,
common path of egress Favel, exit widths, location of exits and exit discharge to the public wap.
Where exits pass through adjacent spaces include complete information and plans for the adjacent
areas. IBC 106.1,2, IBC ch, 10.
The nofth *ruie orridor ata is ud as a storage at@ and does not ptouide arcess to
exiB. Botfi notdt exit sbitways are blekd witfi bbles, carE, dtairc. EdE may not pss
thtough storage an&s. This atea will ned b be rcuid b ptouide a clarexit path from
the hlltwm exit dors b trte uit didtarye. IBC 7013,2.
Amend Irte mans of egres plan tu indude existing and propod oeupant lnds, exit
widtlts, ommon pth of egtw trayel and Eavel distanes on t:he means of egress plan
as rcgusM. The rwm dividerc arc being rcplaed, o ompliane b the ade must be
verified.
3 Means of egress plan shall include analysis of exits for various configurations of room dividers. IBC
ch. 10.
hlon E and Fdo nothave 2 omplying qiE The north exiB di*lnrye intu the turage
arca in the seruiearidor, IBC 1073,2.'
4 Amend plans to show the main exit and other exits for the assembly area. Show compliance with IBC
1024.2. and 1024.3.
Catdinab wiilt means of egress plan. Repone indiahs ilre main exit width tit l65i
Themaximumoeupntludallourd forthe bllrwm will b limiH bythe 765"width
of the main exiL
5 Amend plans to specifi the construction type of the building per IBC ch. 6.
Respone indiaW fI-B @nstuction is assumd. This is not anect The building is over
the ailowabte dorts for If-B anstuaion.
Town of Vail building permit twrds and prcvious drawings for the Maniot HoElpeptd by Gtnthney Pntt *hulE indicate the building is type II-FR onstztction as
prcviously dassifrd under the UBC, or typ f-B ander the currcndy adopEd 2(ng IBC,
Revi* plans,
7 Include fire resistive assembly details and listings for all fire resistive walls, floor/ceiling and roof
ceilings. The existing roof/ceiling, floor/ceiling, structural frame, beam and columns are required to
be protected as required for a I hour, 2 hour or 3 hour fire resistive rating per IBC table 601.
Respn* indicaEs existing eiling anstrudion will rcmain. Plans show new rai*d
eilings b h infrIH per deEil 2/A5,2, ff portions of the existing eiling arc removd,
fire twistive asemblies must b rcplad,
8 Include plans for posting of occupant load per IBC 1004.3
Repone indiaW owner will provide omtpnt load signage, Amend plans b indicaE
maximum oeupnt lad for ach spe on t{rc means of qrw plan. This information
will be neeM to rcview the rcupnt lad signage popl.
10 Include flamspread index and smoke developed index for proposed acoustic spray insulation
proposed in the ceiling areas. IBC 719.
Tlrc new nutd prtitbn walls abve eiling arc no longer shown on the plans. Pleas
clarify wherc tfie nund insulation submitW for rcview is ptopwd b E instaild,
13 Amend registration counter to show accessible portion per ANSI 117.1 1998. ch. 9
The tqistation oounfur is not exempt fiom ampliane with AII9I 777,1 7998, fnclade
an arcssible atu of the @anhr per ANSI 117.7 1998 wtion 902,3
15 Amend plans to provide complete construction details for the accessible restroom facilities. Include
details for accessible fixtures, fixture mounting heights, grab bars, toilet compaftment sizes, doors,
dimensions, signage etc. ANSI 117.1 1998 ch. 6, IBC 3409.6
Repnse indicaEs en'sting bthtwms omply with ANS| 717,1 7998. This is inonatr
the existing bilet amptfrnenE do not annplf, 71rc exiding bilet compmnmE are
futwen 322" and 3'-8" wide, fBC 3409,6 rquircs a sible bilet facilities a be
povided when an uisting spce is alEtd. Revire pland
Mechanical Comments:
16 Please clariff if ceiling space is proposed to be used as a plenum, or if all supply and return grilles
will be ducted. A duct plan was not provided for the ceiling space. If plenum ceiling is proposed,
include specification for all materials exposed in the plenum. IMC 602
CoodinaE with atdtiffiural plans for any new insulation mafudals prop*d above
eiling. llte p@ mabrials arc not prmiH b b expd in a refrrn air
plenum.
17 Amend plans to show compliance with IMC 606 for smoke detection.
Repn* indicabs the smoke Mion is existing. CootdinaE widt fite alarm upgnde
plans.
Please rcfer to the @ver sheet for anfomatlon on rcsubmltting plans. In ordel b avoid delays in issuane of
a permat, please dreck all requested information is included with the resubmitted plans. Please submit
revised plans as a complete set Partial plan rcsdbmlttals will not be reviewed.
Chris Gunion
I.C.C. Plans Examiner
Town of Vail Building Safety and Inspection Seruices
970.479.2369
caunion@vailgov.com
F:\cdev\CHRIS\PERMIT.COM MENTS\806-0242\806-0242.DOC
o
t
I
Il
9l
$E:
$IE
hIq
3iF
0
*
6q
H
lt:
,tuii[$$
l\I
Jt
fl
loil
Hiitii$*
$t!
H*rli$
iffi;
*
Irl
,r 8"0[
$r$iit
o
$ti
i.og
d{il
iiliiq!
il
H
F
tr
Irr
F,tilti$
I rel
'
i-ffl
iiifliiin
rruh,t.F\ j.Pl
F
$tl
r"$B
tiiii
tt{
I
LI
0
iI!t
J 1'=
fi,*
ibn
drll
iilii
Jz
fl
l,rl
diltl$$,
Architectural Resource Consultants, lnc.
p-O- Bq ll ll - Yril, Crl.]|a. ll55l -{ttl, tat{laa-F.xOtO t.t'55t1
August 14,2006
Town of Vail Fire Department
42 W. Meadow Drive
Vail, CO 81657
Attn: MichaelMcGee
Re: Vail Maniott Grand Ballroom Renovations
Dear Mr. McGee:
Attached please find a selection of pages from the Asbestos Survey and
Abatement Report completed for the Lionshead Marriott (previously the Radisson
Resort) in Vail from 1994.
The attached documentation has been highlighted to summarize the conclusions
of the Asbestos Survey. The only areas identified in the report to previously have
contained asbestos containing materials will not be affected by the current
renovation. Furthermore, the hotel staff and additional documentation has
confirmed that the areas identified as containing asbestos were abated in the
1995-1996 timeframe.
We hope this documentation provides sufficient information. However, if
additional material is needed, please do not hesitate to contact me and I will
obtain additional copies of the full reports from the property.
Sincerely,
.-/A.I n fl'\Arlr,Y,^ U. 'll LllyYr*A U /twt0;y-,
U'' t \ Y \rt v\tr'
Adam Williams
Architectural Resource Consultants. lnc.
cc: Dave Pease / Marriott
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
7.0 ASBESTOS ST]RVEY
An asbestos survey of the Radisson Resort was performed on July 18-21, 1994. This survey
consistcd of a walk-through of the hotel, and the collection and analyses of 136 samples of
suspect asbestos-containing materials. The hotel was constnrcted in three phases: Phase I 1973-
1974; Phase lI 1978-1979; Phase m 1983-1984. Mr. Robert Valasquez, Chief Engineer,
provided access to the hotel as well as background information.
The objective of this asbestos survey wirs to identify obvious, suqpcct asbcstos-containing
materials (ACM) not previously sampled and to collect additiond samples of suqpect matcrials
to support findings of a previous su.rey within the subject buildings. Tlre activitie.r of this
survey included obscrvation of materiats in setectcd accessible areas. The suspcct materials
noted and sampled appeared to be reprercntative of the major types of materials used in the
construction of the facility. Sampling was based on ourjudgement derived from previous survey
cxperience. The sampling of all variations of building producs and the investigation of
materials in enclosed building iucas or cavities would encompass a much motc cxtensive scoPe
of work than wa intended or is customary. Additionally, our survey did not include sample
collection of suspect exterior building finishes or roofing materials.
The information included in this survey repon addresscs limiM objcctivcs rclatcd to the
characterization of asbestos materials in the facility. The data may not be appropriate or
adequate for planning specific response actions or for health hazard assessments. Further, lhis
information should not be used by other parties as a basis for estimating ACM removal oosts or
for other purposes without our consuhation. The reqponsibility for any interpretation thereof
must be borne exclusively by the user.
7.1 Review of Plans and Specifications
Building plans were provided for review to aid in the survey process. No references to asbestos-
containing materids were noted. Construction specifications were not provided.
7.2 VisualObservations
A visual suwey of the hotel was performed to determine whether major classes of accessible
suspect ACM were present. Suspect ACM are defined as those materials which havc, in the
past, been known.to contain asbestos. Materids observed are classified as stniclural, mechanical
and finish materials. The assessment (sampling) of roofing and exterior finishes was not
included in the survey. The existing flat bitumen roof areas are covered with a rubber
membrane and stone ballast that were reportedly installed in 1992. The flat roofing materials
would be considered susDect ACM.
Radisson Reson
Vail, Colorado
August 22' 1994
l:w Engineering Project 27441524Fo
I
l6
Structural
Phase I of hotel is a concrete framed structure located over a public parking garage. An
attached atrium area roof is supported with steel framing. Phases II and III are steel-
framed structures with corrugated metal decking supporting ooncrete floor slabs'
A suspect spnyedon insulation was observed through a cciling access hatch in Luigi's
Restaurant in Phase I and a sample taken. No similar insulation was observed elsewhcre
in the facility.
No other suspect building insuiating or finproofing materials wcre observed during our
survey.
lnsulation observed through the ceilings and various access hatches in quest rooms and
oommon hallways throughout the facility was qpically fiberglass batt t)?e-
Mechanical
The guest rooms are heated/cooled with individual wall andlor baseboard mountei
electric uniS. The HVAC systems for the support and common areas are natural gas-
fired boilers and chillers oonnected to fans that distribute the conditioned air. Ductwork
was uninsulated. Each phase has a separate boiler room and HVAC system for the
common areas.
The Phase I boiler roorn is located on the lower level with access via the underground
parking faciliry. This boiter room contains two boilers instalted in 1992. Pipes leading
to and from the boilers are insutated with pre-formed fiberglass insulation with a suspect
hard end sealant. A water heater without exposed insulation is located in this room as
well. One sample of the hard end seajant was coltected from tlre hot water retum pipe
to Boiler #1.
The Phase II boiler room is located on the lower conference level next to the athletic
oenter. This room contains one boiler with a suspect cementitious wrap on the flue and
a suspect hard cementitious end mud on pipes teading from the boiler. The boiler pipes
are insulated with preform fiberglass insulation. Two hot water circulation pumps and
one cotd water circulation pump are insulated with fiberglass and a susPcct end sealant.
The domestic water lines for the water holding tank were insulated with fiberglass as
were the pipes leading from it. The domestic water line had a suspect white rubbery end
sealant. The pipes frorn two waler heaters, installed in 1992, were insulated with
preform fiberglass. The shed metal air handler ductwork appeared to be uninsulated.
One sample was collected from each of the following: hard end mud from lhe boiler
pipe, rubbery end sealant from the domestic water line, and hard end sealant from hot
Radisson Resort
Vail. C-olorado
August 22, 1994
L:w Engineering Project 27 44152440
t7
water circulation pump !f:. m" suspect cementitious wrap on ore bo'er flue was notsampled due to inacccssibility.
The Phase rII boiler room/IrvAC room contains two boilers, four uninsulated expansiontanks, two water circulation plmps, on" uiiniut"t"o hot waier tank, two water beaters,and .*o air handlers. fie- boifer pipes are insurated ;'h pvc'elbow jackets anoprcform fiberglass with a suspect traro ino tor-,. The pipcs reading to the air handrersare.insulatedrvith prefgrrl fibergrass with pva ebow jackets and contain a suspect hardcnd sealant' The remainder of rie pipes in rhiiarea are insulated with preform fiberglasswith PVC elbow jackets.
-one sJmpre oititr r,.ro end sealant on the boiler and onesanple of the hard end sealanr on aii tranCter MZ_2 were collecred.
RnLtes
Finishes within the facilifr vary from phase to phase. Reporredry, some remodering ofg:t:t tpr: and public common arcas has becn Lonductcd ii"o tr," o.iginar constructionof the facitiry- Most of the finishes in employee common areas iue originat !o rhe timeof construction of each phase.
Phase I
The first floor of phase I is occupied by a video arcade, engineering offices, and salesoffices. These areas are tlpicary nnistrco with grued ;il -;C;ng,
painrcd orwallpapered sheet rock watis, and a various array of suspended ceiling tires. Them.ajority of the cciling tires in rhis area are comprifu "r. i r*iui4 ioot 12,x+,) tirewith crosswise fissures and pinholes- other varieties include 2,x4, tires with 2,x2,grooves, 2'x4' tires wirh rong-itudinar grooves, and a few atypical ,apir"arant tiles. onesample of the 2'x4' tile with crorr*ir" fissures and pinhorcs was cortecred from theengineering office.
The second floor of phase ljrouses Luigi's restaurant, The Gailery resr,aurant, thecolorado Ballroom, a sares office,
".onf.-r.n"" room, Hair & Nails beauty saron, andan employee break room/cafeterja, as welr as a kirchen'antpr"p;;f* rhe restauran6and ballroom.
The common. area guest hails are finished with grued down carpeting, painted orwallpapered sheet rock walts, and white popcorn-tertured ceiling finish on sheet rock.
The common employee prep areas are finished with painted sheet rock wails, suspendcdceiling tile (2'x2' , white_with heavy texture and z'x4, ,white with crosswise fissures andpinholes), and either r2"xr2 ran floor rire with brown and *r,lririgiiights or barcconcrete floors.
Radissoo Resorr
Vail, Colorado August 22, 1994
I-au' Engineering Projecl 27 4 4 | 1Z-C{rO
t8
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The Colorado Ballroom is finished with movable cloth-covercd walls, wood baseboard,
sheet rock exterior walls, glued down carpeting, and susPended ceiling tile (2'x2" cream
with vine pattern) which was reportedly installed in 1992. The common guest hdl
outside the ballroom was similarly finistred but had 2'x2' white ceiling tiJe with a light
texture.
Luigi's is finished with a white popcorn-trertured ceiling finish, wood Paneled walls and
ceiling, and tacked down carpeting. The Gallery is finished similarly to Luigi's'
although some ceramic floor tile was noted as well.
Hair & Nails salon was finished with cream vinyl sheet flooring, Popcom-textured walls
and ceiling and wood paneling.
The sales office was finished with ceramic floor tile, tacked down carpeting, painted
sheet rock walls, and white 2'x2' heavy textured ceiling tiles. The conference roc'm was
reportedly recently remodeted and wasfinished with tacked down carpeting, wallpapered
sheet rock walls, and white 2'x2' heary textured ceiling tile.
The employee breakroom/cafeteria was finished with l2"xl2" cream floor tile with
brown and white highlights, 2'x4' wbite ceiling tile with 2'x2' grooves, and painted,sheet
rock walls. fne hAtwiy outside this room is finished with a mmbination of white 2'x4'
ceiling tiles with "rorr-hrtur.t
and pinholes and popcom ceiling tcxture on drywall.
Samples of suspect ACM collected on the second floor of Phase I include: white popcorn
ceiling t.*tur. in hallway outside Luigi's; tan spray-on insulation above ceiling in
Luigi;s; 2'x2' heavy texture ceiling tile in sales office; cream sheet vinyl and yellow
m"rtic in Hair & Nails salon; white 2'x2' light textured ceiling tile in hallway next lo the
Colorado Ballroom; tan 12"x12" floor tile with white and brown highlights and black
mastic, and whjte 2'x4' ceiling tilc with crosswise fissures and pinholes in the employce
pr.p "i*; cream 12"x72" floor tile with brown and white highlights and black mastic
irom the employee break room; and white PoPcom ceiling texture from The Gallery.
The third through sixth floors of Phase I contain guest rooms and common guest
hallways, "t *"il as a guest laundry room. Guest room sizes and style of decoration
naty; out observations and sampling are based upon the guest rooms which were vacant
and accessible. Nine tuesl rooms in Phase I were accessed'
The Phase I guest rooms were rePortedly asbestos abaled recently; however, no
documentation regarding the abatement procedures could be located' Due to conc€rn
expressed regarding possible encapsulation, we inspected the drywall ceilings in guest
rooms to determine if a second drywall/ceiling texture layer was covered over. OnIy one
tayer of drywall/ceiling texture was typically noted. There was no obvious evidence to
Radisson Resort
Vail, Colorado
August 22' 1994
L-aw Engineering Project 2'1 44152{o0
l9
I
I
I
I
I
I
suggest the presence ofa second layer.
Typical finishes within the guest rooms in Phase I included white popcorn ceiling texture
over sheet rock, tacked Oo-*n catp"ting, painted or wallpapered- sheet rock walls' and
vinyl baseboard. The tattrooms'typiilfy had ceramic floor tile and wdls, although
some sheet vinyl flooring was observed. Kitchen floors were finished with various types
of ceramic floor tile.
The common gucst haltways were $pically finished with glucd d-own carpeting'
wallpapered sheet rock *Ji.. vinyf UlLUoarO, and a combination of white popcorn
ceiling texture over sheet rock and white 2'x4' ceiling tile with light tcxturc' fie guest
laundry room on rf,t tiittt-noor was finished with L'n l2'xl2'floor tile with brown
highlights, painted sheet rock walls, and tlgical ceiling tile'
Samples of suspect ACM collected from Phase I suest rooms include: white popcorn
ceiling rexture units I ais, ic/.,0g8,675,48g,353,368, and 366;rvhitc sheet vinyl
floor with underlying brown sheet vinyl in unit #695; white baseboard rnastic in unis #
695, 6gg, 3g3; tznvinyl baseboard mistic in unir # 489; yellowbaseboard.mastic in unit
* 366; arywAi "or., ;n un;ts fl 695, 688, 48g,3g3, and 366; white smooth wall texture
from the closet'in unit f 393.
Samples of suspect ACM collected from Phase I common guest areas include: white
popcorn ceiting texture outside units # 693, 368,576; white 2'x4' light rcxrured cciling
tile outside units # 693,5'76,368; yellow ",tptt taitit outside units # 368' 693' 576;
tan l2"xl2 floor tile with brown'highlighti and yellow mastic in the guest laundry
room.
Phase Il
The lower conference level of Phase II is occupied by the athletic cenler facilities and
maintenance rooms. The athletic center is finished with glued down carpeting'
wallpapered sheer rock wJls, vinyl baseboard, and2'x1'heavy textured ceiling tile' fie
locker rooms have painJ *n"r.t. floors, while the indoor pool area has a ceramic tile
floor. The ping-pong room has white 2'x4' ceiling tiles with crosswise fissures and
pinholes.
fie maintenance room across from massage room #l is finished with tan l2"xl2' floor
tte wittr brown and white highlights and black mastic, and white 2'x4' ceiling tiles with
crosswise fissures and Pinholes.
samples of suspect ACM collected from the Phase II conference level include: 2'x2'
ttuy ,.",ur.d whire ceiling tile near the racquetball courts; yellow carPet mastic near
I
I
I
I
I
t
l
t
;
I
::
Radisson Resort
Vail, Colorado
August 22, 1994
f-aw Engioeering Project 27 44152'00o
20
the racquetball courts; tan l2',l2 floor tile with white and brown highlighs and black
mastic from the maintenance room.
The first floor of Phase II is occupied by the gift shop, Banner Sports shop, the front
desk and offices, the main entrance lobby, and guest rooms.
The gifi shop is finished with glued down carpeting, Painted sheet rock walls, and ceiling
tile.-Banner Sporrs is finishfo with glued Oo*n carpcting, wood paneled walls, utd
white popcom ceiling tcxture.
The front offices are finished with glued down carpeting, white 2'x4' ceiling tile with
crosswise fissures and pinholes, vinyiUaseUoarO, and painrca sheet rock walls. The main
entrance lobby is fuistred wiftr ceramic floor tite, whiie smooth tcxtured wdls, and white
popcom ceiling texturc over sheet rock. A small arnount of glued down carpeting was
noied trere as well. Guest rooms wcrc tlpically finished as discusscd later.
Samples of suspect ACM collected from the first floor ofPhase II (excluding guest room
areai) include ihe following: white PoPcorn cciling texture in the lobby; white, smooth
wall texture from the lobby.
The second through sixth floors of Phase II, as well as portions of the first and seventh
floors, are occupied by guest rooms. The ccilings of the Phase Il guest rooms were
typicaity finishi wlttr inJet rock covered with white Popcorn ceiling !ogt". Sheet rock
*"tts *"r" covered with wallpaper and vinyl baseboard. Carpeting in the main portion
of the rooms was tacked down.
-Bathroom hoors were oovered with a brOwn and crCam
diamond pattemed sheet vinyl with an underlying layer of red sheet vinyl. Kirchen areas
iyp""ff y had ccramic floor
-tile. A stainlesi stecl iinf in thc kitchen area of unit t342
was observed to have a suspect ACM non-friable black spray{n coating on the
underside; howevef, this coating was not noted on other such sinks obscrved and was not
sampled.
The guest room hallway arca was finished with glued down carpeting, while 2'x4'ceiling
tiles-wirtr crosswise fiisures and pinholes (although various replacement tiles q'pical of
other areas of the facility were obien*ed), and wallpapered sheet rock walls. An elevator
service closet on the siith floor was observed to have lm l2'xl2' floor tile with brown
and cream hightights. The third floor guest hatlway was observcd to have a shect tock
ceiling aUouJtnJAropped tite ceiling. Corrugated meta! decking was noted abovc the
tile ceiling ofguest halls on other floors.
Windows restaurant is located on the seventh floor of Phase II. Windows has reportedly
been remodeled recently. Finishes consisted of glued down carpeting' wallpapered shect
rock walls with baseboard, and a mirrored ceiling with some smooth white 2'x4'ceiling
Radisson Resort
Vail, Colorado
Augu$22' 199'l
l:rv Engineering Project 27 44152-ffi
2l
I
I
I
tiles- Samples were not collected within Windows restaurant due to the recent
remodeling efforts.
Samples of suspect ACM collected from the guest rooms of Phase tr include the
following: whitepopcorn cciling texture from units i751,653,ffl3,457,439,Y2,238,
233, 136, and 130; composites of brown & crcarn diamond pancrned vinyl sheet, white
mastic, red vinyl sheet, urd yellow mastic from the bathrmms in unis # 751.- 653, 457 ,
238; drywall cores from units # 751, 653, 457,238; cream baseboard mastic ftom units
# 751; white base mastic from units # 653,457,23E.
Samples of suqpect ACM collecM from Phase [I common areas include the following:
white 2'x4' ceiling tile with closswise fissures and pinholes from the first and fourth
floor hallways; tan carpet mastic from lhe second, fourth, urd sixth floor guest hallways;
a tan and brown baseboard mastic composite from the sccond floor guest hall; un
l2'x12" floor tile with brown and cream str€alcs and black mastic from the sixth floor
clevator service closet.
Phase III
The lower conference level of Phase III contains the Grand Ballroom, pre-function hall,
banquet preparation areas, and a few guest rooms. The guest rooms on the confercnce
level will be included in the discussion of the remainder of the Phase III guest rooms.
The Gnnd Ballroom and adjacent Salons were finished with glued down carpeting utd
sheet rock walls and ceilings. The pre-function room is similarly finished, but has white
2'x4' ceiling tiles with 2'x2' grooves.
The banquet preparation area consists ofa kitchen area, table and supply storagc rooms,
and a service hall. The banquet prcparation hallway area was finished with cream
l2'xl2 floor tile with brown streaks and a very small guantity of rcd l2'xl2 floor tile,
2'x4' white ceiling tile with 2'x2' grooves, and painted sheet rock walls. A pinkish-
brown l2"xl2" floor tile was observed in the banquet dry storage room.
Samples ofsuspect ACM collected from the conference tevel ofPhase III, excluding thc
guest rooms, includc thc following: 2'x4' whitc cciling tilcs with 2'x2' groovcs from thc
pre-function hall and thc banguet preparation hdl; l2'xl2' cream floor tile with brown
streaks and black mastic from the banquet preparation hall; pinHsh-brown l2'xl2' floor
tile with clear mastic from the banquet dry storage room; d4rurall core from the uble
storage room.
The first floor of Phase III is occupied by open head space for the Grand Ballroom, sates
offices, and guest rooms. The hallway next to the sales offices was finished with
Radirsoo Resort
Vail, Colorado
August 22' 1994
l:w Enginecring Project n44152'0[o
n
I
I
t
l
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
;
wallpapered drywall walls, ceramic floor tile, ud 2'x4' white cciUng tile with
longitudinal slas. The remainder of the first floor hallways had glued down carpeting
md 2'x4'white ceiting tile with 2'x2' grooves. The sales offices were finished with
glued down carpeting, wallpapered shest rock walls, vinyl baseboard, and white 2'x4'
ceiling tiles wilh 2'x4' grooves.
Samples of suryect ACM talcn from tlre first floor of Phasc III ( crcluding gucst rooms)
consistcd of 2't4'whitc cciling rilc with longitudinal slats.
The second through sixth floon of Phasc III, atong with portions of the confercnce lcvel
and first floor, contained guesi rooms and common halls.
Guest rooms in Phase III werc simitarly finishcd with ackcd down carpeting, vinyl
baseboard, wallpapered sheet rock walls, and sheet rcck ceilings with white PoPcorn
ceiling texture. Bathroom and kitchen floors wcrc covered with ceramic tile.
Common guest hatlways in Phase III were finished with glued down carpeting, white
2'x4'ceiling tiles with 2'x2'grooves, and wallpapered sheet rock walls. A vending area
was observed on the sixth floor near the elevators with pinkish-brown l2"xl2' lloor tile.
Ttre guest laundry room on the sixth floor was noted to have eream l2'tl2 floor tile
with brown highlights-
Samples of suspect ACM collecled from Phase III guesl rooms included the following:
white popcorn ceiling texture from units # 613, 605, 513,422, 419.307, 3ol,2l7,2Ol'
ll0, (X; drywall core from units # 613.,422,301, ll0; white vinyl baseboard mastic
from units # 613, ll0; yellow vinyl baseboard mastic from unis f, 422,301.
Samples of suspect ACM collected from Phase III common guest hallways included the
following: 2'x4' white cciling tile with 2'r2' grooves from Oe sixth floor, fourth floor,
and first floon; yellow carpet mastic from the sixth, fourth, and first floors; pinkish-
brown l2"x l2- floor tile with black urd yellow mastic from the sixth floor vending area;
cream l2"xl2' floor tile with brown highlights and black and yellow mastic from the
sixth floor guest laundry room.
7.3 Anallsis Rmrlts
One hundred and thirty-six samples were collected from readily accessibte, representative
materials in each major group of suspected asbestos-containing materials. No attemPt was made
to disassemble equipment or demolish structural or finish materials. Wall voids, building
cavities, roofing materials and mechanical parts may contain unrePorted ACM.
Radissoo Resort
Vail, Colorado
August 22' 199'l
l-aw Engineering Projcct 27 44152400
23
Sampled materials were anallzed using Polarized Light Microscopy el.Ivt) coupled with
dispersion suining. PLM is rhi EPA recommended method for bulk sample oalysis and utilizes
the unique opticat and crystallographic properties of the various constituents of the samples.
These properties (refractive indices, birefringence, sign of elongation and extinction angle) are
characteristically unique to cach asbestos form and, thercfore, can be uscd !o identify asbcstos
qpes present in the samples.
The cunent NESHAP regulations (40 CFR Part 61, datcd Novembr.lr 20, 1990) clariS the
analyical procedurcs for determining the percent of asbestos in bulk samptes to Permit thc use
of visual area estimation. fire rcguiations flrther indicate that regulated asbestos'containing
matedals (RACM) - materials which are friable or may become friable - bc further andyzcd by
point counting when the resutts indicate less than l0 percent asbestos by visual area estimation.
This is non-mandatory if the owner/operator elocts to assume that the amount of asbestos in a
material is greater than onc peroent, rcgardless of the amount detcrmincd by visual cstimation,
and the material is treated as asbestos-containing. Our laboratory utilizes visud area estimation
on a routine basis and does not include point counting unless specincally tcqucsted.
Resinously bound materials such as flooring mastics, when uralyzcd by lhe EPA method, may
yield false negative results because of limitations in scparating closely bound fibers and in
detecting asbestos fibers of small length and diameter. tVhen a definitive result is required,
LAW rccommends utilizing altemative methods of identifications including Transmission
Electron Microscopy (IEM).
Summarv of Analysis Results
Structural: No stnrctural ACM matcrials wsrc dctccrcd.
Mechanical: The hard end mud on this boilerpcipe in Boiler Room in Phasc tr was
detected to contain l-5% chrysotile asbestos. The hard end mud on hot
water circulation pump #2 in the boiler room of Phase tr was dso detectod
to contain l-5 % chrysotile asbestos. No other mechanical materials were
detected to contain asbestos.
Finishes:Phase I - Brown sheet vinyl underlying shcet vinyl in the bathroom ofa
Phase I unit was found to contain lO-15% chrysotile asbestos. Tan carpet
mastic in the Phase I guest rocim hallway was found to contain l-5%
chrysotile asbestos. Black mastic underlying tan floor tile in the Phase I
kitchen preg ata was found to contain l-5% Chrysotite asbestos.
Phase II - Red sheet vinyl underlying patterned sheet vinyl in bathrooms
of Phase II guest rooms was found to contain l0- 15 % chrysotile asbestos.
Radisson Resort
Vail, Colorado
August 22' 1994
law Engincering Projert 2744152{f0
24
Black mastic for tari floor tile observed in the 6rh floor elevator service
closet as well as the athletic club maintenan@ rcxrm was found to contain
l-5% chrysotile asbestos.
Phase III - Black and ycilow mastic compositc for pinkish-brown floor tile
in the 6th floor vcnding area and for crcam & brown flor tile in the 6th
floor gucst laundry room was found to oontain l-55 chrFotite asbestos.
A description of the materials samplai, their locations, their condition, rhe analytical resutts and
approximate guantities of asbestos are prescntcd in Tablc l.
7.4 Opinion of Confirmed ACM Removel Cost
This spction Presenls LAW's Engineering Opinion of Cost for the removal of building materials
found to contain asbeslos. The quutities of eCU were field approximated based on visual
observation of limired areas and are given in square feet (s.f.).
Radissoo Resort
Vail. Colondo
August 22, 1994
l:w Engineering Projecr 27 44152.&0
E
Material Quantity Unit Removal Cost
Cost
BROWN SHEET VINYL
Bathrooms
TAN CARPET MASTIC
Guest hallways
BI-ACK MASTIC
Kitchen preparation and hallway by
lmding dock - tan floor tile
360 sq. ft.'
9,200 sq. ft.
650 sq. ft.
1,090.00
18,400.00
1,950.00
3.00
2.00
3.00
Pbase tr
RED SHEET VINYL
Bathrooms
BLACK MASTIC
6th floor elevator service closet & athletic
club maintenance room - tan floor tile
HARD END SEALANT
Boiler pipe - Phase II boiler room
HARD END SEALANT
Hot water circulation pump - Phase II
boiler room
4,400 sq. ft.
230 sq. ft.
70 ends
l0 cnds
13,200.00
590,00
700.00
r00.00
3.00
3.00
10.00
r0.00
Pbase III
BLACK & YELLOW MASTIC
6th floor vending area - pinkish-brown
floor tile
BLACK & YELLOW MASTIC
6th floor guest laundry room, gream urd
brown lloor tile
100 sq. ft.
100 sq. ft.
3.00
3.00
300.00
300.00
r Notc l: This material observed
based on 10% of rooms accessed
in only one guest room accessed. Total quantity estimated
versus total rooms in Phase I.
Radissoo Resort
Vail, Colorado
August 22, 1994
[:w Enginecring Project 2744152N
26
I
l
I
:
t
l
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Please note that this opinion of cost is u unrefined estimate for the cost of rcmoval of ACM in
a single phase withoui replacement materials and does not include consulting or testing costs.
Unpredictable variables such as phased rcmovd, seasonat workloads, oontractor commitments
ud cost of insurance and bonding may have a mdor impact on overall rcmoval cosls. Although
the unit rates used in this cost opinion reflect our unders-tanding of tpical oontractor oosts in this
region, contractors were not rcquested to preparc estimates for this ProPerty.
For budget pulposes, our Engineering Opinion of Cost for removing asbestos-oontaining floor
tile rnastic identified at the property is $3,240.
Our Engineering opinion of cost for removing asbcstosontaining carpct mastic is $18,400.
Orr Engineer's o'pinion of cost for remwing asbestos{ontaining sheet vinyl is $14'280.
Our Engineering opinion of cost for removing hard end scalant on mechanical systems is
$800.00.
1.5 Recommendatiors
When the existing ACM in a building is in good condition, the implementation of an Operations
& Mainrenance (O&M) Program is acceprable industry-wide as an interim provision prior to
rcmoval. The following arc specific recommendations for ACM found in the Radisson Rcsort:
ACM mastic (floor tile or carpet) is non-friable and stable. The gcncrally
accepted industrJ philosophy is that this material poses little threat of asbestos
fiber release in normal use. The customary practicc is to lcave well maintaincd
ACM flooring products in ptace until planned replacement during renovation.
Sanding, sawing, or coring of any cxposed mastic should be avoided or
performed under controlled conditions.
The asbestos detected in the sheet vinyl samples is confined to the cushion layer
which is protected from everyday disturbancc by the exposed vinyl surface. Both
types of shect vinyl that werc determined to contain asbestos arc original
installations foundteneath a newer Non-ACM) sheet vinyl tayer. The genenlly
accepted industry philosophy is Oar this material poses lit0e thrcat of asbestos
fiber release in normd use. The customary practice is to leave well maintained
ACM flooring products in place un'jl planned replacement during renovation.
Sanding, sawing, or coring of any exposed material should be avoided c
performed under controlled conditions. However, due to the friable nature of the
sheet vinyl backing, this material must be feated specially during removal and
disposal, according to Colorado regulations.
Radisson Resort
Vail, Colorado
August 22, 1994
l:w Engineering Project 27 441574A0
2l
I
I
I
I
I
) The ACM hard sealant on the ends of piping insutation (fiberglass) is non-friable
but stable and in good condition. This material should pose linJe threal of
asbestos fiber release ifleft undisturbed. Abrating the scalant materid should be
avoided.
lf a suqpect material was not specifically sampled or does not appear to be re?resented by a
similar material previously sampled, it should be analyzcd for asbestos prior to disturbuce. To
comply with NESHAP requirements, a morc extensive survcy should be performcd prior to
rcnovation/demolition. All rcmoval and repair work of ACM slrould be performed by a licensed
asbesos abatement contractor.
Radisson Resort
Vail, Colorado
August 22' 1994
law Engineering Project 2744152{[o
28
I
i
i
j
I
iI
i
i
J
i
i
i
t.O CONCLUSIONSANDRECOMMENDATIONS
Based on lhe extent of our observations and available information, there does not aPPeat to be
circumstances that would indicate the need for further asscssment.
As discusscd in Scction 7.0, asbcstos-containing marcrials wcre dismvcrpd during this
assessment. We recommend that an Operationi and Maintenance (O&M) Program be
implemented to manage these materials since they were in good condition'
According to Colorado regulations, the removal and disposal of the sheet lxlyl mlst F tt?ttO
rpoidfy,-Ou. to the friabl na$rc of the backing matcrial, as slrould friable hard cnd scalant'
Futt containment practices must be observed duri-ng rcmovat and the waste must be diqporcd of
at a landfiu that acceps friable ACM.
The non-friable floor tile mastic urd carpet mastic must be wetted and rcmoved with hand
scraping. Negative air pressure must atso-be used during removal. The ACM waste, due to its
non-friable nature, may be sent to any landftll.
For budget purposes, our Engineering Opinion of Cost for removini the asbestos-containing
floor tile mlsric, ."rp.r r"ri", streer vinyl flooring, and hard end sealant identified at the
properly is $36,720.00
Radisson Resort
Vail, Colorado
August 22, 199'l
I-arv Engineering Project 27 44152'0[o
29
t
i
o o
a 9.0 LTMTTATTONSI
fire findings and opinions are rclevant to the dates of our sitc work and should not be relied on
I to r€?resent conditions at substantially later dates.I
Ilrc orpinions included herein are based on information obtained during the study and our
I experilnce. If additional information bccomes available wNch might impaA our cnvfuonmenhl
I conclusions, we request the o,pportunity o review the information, sEassess the potential
oonoerns, and modify our opinion, if warruted.
tI Atthough this assessmenr has attempred to identi$ the potential for conAmination of the subject
pfopcrty, potential iouroes of confamination may havc cscapcd dcfcfion duc to: (l) thc linitod
i scopc ol this assessment, @) the inaccuracy of public records, urd (3) the prascnce of underccrcd
I and unreported environmental accidents.
I
i
i Radisson Resorr
; Vail, Colorado
i
August 22, 1994
law Eogineering Project 2744152ffi
30
oz
Eg<t-
z3I 9tta v, -)A PqI V' 98IqF
I
t
Eta&
6E
5g
€E
I
il1tillilililt1
Eoox
ro
=oE
e
-alr.
li___: ] r
ASBESTOS TESTTNG REQUIREMENTS
THE TOWN OF VAIL AND STATE OF COLOMDO DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH REQUIRE ASBESTOS TESTING
ANYTIME WHEN MORETHAN 160 S.F. OF MATERIALWILL BE DISTURBED OR REMOVED.
AN ASBESTOS TEST AND REPORT IS REQUIRED TO BE SUBMTTTED WITH YOUR BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION
FOR ALL REMODEL, ADDMON OR OTHER PROJE TS INVOLVING ANY DEMOLMON OR REMOVAL OF BUILDING
MATERIALS THAT MAY CONTAIN ASBESTOS. BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTED AFTER OCTOBER 12, 1988 THAT HAVE
NO ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS ARE EXEMPT.
A COPY OF THE REPORT MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH YOUR BUILDING PERMIT APPLICANON
my building permit application
OR
o I certify my project will not disturb or remove more than 160 s.f. of building material. The construction
plans submitted with my application cleady indicate this information. (This will be verified during plan
review, and will delay your project if found to be inaccurate)
applicant signature
OR
r The building was constructed after October 12,1988. The date of construction was
orrginal construction date
applicant signature date
OC
I have included the asbestos test and repoft with
F: \cdev\FORMS\Permits\Buildrng\building_permit_4-2 1-06. DOC Page 4 of 16 04/2112006
BUILDING PERMIT ISSUANCE TIME FRAME
If this permit requires a Town of Vail Fire Department Approval, Engineer's (Public Works) review and approval,
a Planning Depaftment review or Health Department review, and a review by the Building Department, the
estimated time for a total review will take as long as three (3) weeks.
All commercial (large or small) and all multi-family permits will have to follow the above mentioned maximum
requirements. Residential and small projects should take a lesser amount of time. However, if residential or
smaller pCIects impact the various above mentioned departments with regard to necessary review, these
projects may also take three (3) weeks to review and approve.
Every attempt will be made by this department to expedite this permit as soon as possible.
I, the undersigned, understand the plan check procedure and time frame. I also understand that if the permit
is not picked up by the expiration date, that I must still pay the plan check fee and that if I fail to do so it may
affect future permits that I apply for,
Agreedtony: ADArnr tr)rt tAr<rn-S
project Name: |\'ARQL6TT- 1lLr+Jfi Bl+Lrn*.t
"FrJo&iNA,.xaolfl- 1, Lcfr6
Signature
F: \cdev\FORMS\PermiE\Building\buildingJermit_4-2 1 -06. DOC Page 5 of 16 Ml?Ll2006
WHEN A'PUBIIC WAY PERMTT" IS REQUTRED
PLEASE READ AND CHECK OFF EACH OF THE FOLLOWIT{G QUESTIONS REGARDING THE NEED FOR A
.PUBLIC WAY PERMTT':
o Is this a nevu resHence? YES NO
Does demolition work being performed require the uge of the Rlght-of-Way, easements or
pubtic property? - VfS ng y'
ls any utility wo* needed? YES NO-4-
Are there any improvements being done to the drivanay? YES NO_t'-
Is a different access needed to the site other than the existing driveway? YES NO r/
" frSrt
drainage v,rolpg done that affects the Right-of-Way, easements, or public property?
NO r.-'o Is a "Revocable Right-of-Way Permit" required? YES
o Is the Right-of-Way, easements or public property to be used for staging, parking or ferring?YES_No y'
If ansr er it 1{O, is a parking, staging or fendng plan required by fublic Works?YES- NO
If you have ans:wered YES to arry of these quesUons, a "Public Way Permit" must be obtained.
'Public Way Permlt" applicaUons may be obtained at the Public Works omce or at @mmunity Developnent (a sample ls
attached). If yql have arry questions please call Leonard Sandoval in Public Works at 970-479-2t98. tlt,Cl?1
Contractor Signature
lob or ProFct Narqe:
Date Signed:
I HAVE READ AND AN$I/ERED AL
Fr \cdev\FoRl,ls\Perntts\Bualdip\buildingLleermit_4-2 f -06. DOC Pag€ 7 of 16 Ml2U2O06
I
,i
J
I
PUBLIC WORKS AND THE PUBLIC WAY PERMIT PROCESS
How it relates to Building Permits:
Fill out the attached check list with the Buildinq Permit Aoolication.
If yes was answered to any of the questions then a "Public Way" permit is required. You can pick up an
application at either Community Development, located at 75 South Frontage Road or Public Works, located at
1309 Elkhorn Drive.
Notice sign-offs for utility companies. ALL uUlities must field veriff (locate) respective utilities prior to signing
application. Some utility companies require up to 48 hours notice to schedule a locate.
A construction traffic controfstaging plan must be prepared on a separate sheet of paper. An approved site plan
may also be used. This plan will show locations of all traffic control devices (signs, cones, etc.) and the work
zone, (area of construction, staging, etc,), This plan will expire on November 1" and will need to be resubmitted
for consideration for approval through the winter. Be aware that your resubmission for winter may be denied
depending on the location of construction.
Sketch of work being performed must be submitted indicating dimensions (length, width and depth of work).
This may be drawn on the traffic control plan or a site plan for the job.
Submit completed application to the Public Works office for review. If required, locates will be scheduled for the
Town of Vail electricians and irrigation crew, The locates take place in the morning, but may require up to 48
hours to perform.
The Public Works Construction Inspector will review the application and approve or deny the permit. You will be
contacted as to the status and any requirements that may be needed. Most permits are released 48 hours of
being received, but please allow up to one (1) week to process.
As soon as the permit is approved, the Building Department will be notified, allowing the "Building Permit" to be
released. Please do not confuse the "Public Way Permif'with the "Building Permit".
NOTE; The above process is for work in a public way ONLY. Public Way Permits are valid only until
November 15th. A new Public Way Permit is required each year if work is not complete. Re-
application each November l5th does not mean an automatic renewal.
At'o5;- 7'74
Date Signed
I have read-and understand the above.
F: \cdev\FORMS\Permits\Building\building jermit_4-2 1-06. DOC Page 9 of 16 0412r12006
\
DRAINAGE AND CULVERT INSPECTIONS ARE REOUIRED BY PUBLIC WORKS!
Please read and check off each of the items below:
d fne Town of Vail Building Department has developed the following procedures to ensure that new construction
sites have adequately established proper drainage from building sites along and adjacent to Town of Vail roads or
streets.
{tn"Town of Vail Public Works Department will be required to inspect and approve drainage adjacent to Town of
Vail roads or streets and the installation of temporary or permanent culverts at access points from the road or
street onto the construction site. Such approval must be obtained prior to any requests for inspection by the
Town of Vail Building Department for footings, temporary electrical or any other inspection. Please call Leonard
Sandoval at970-479-2198 to request an inspection from the Public Works Department. Allow minimum of 24
hour notice.
I Also, the Town of Vail Public Works Department will be approving all final drainage and culvert installation with
resulting road patching as necessary. Such approval must be obtained prior to any Final Ceftificate of Occupancy
issuance,
Agreed to by:
ProjectName: fAAzl2{zff A[4JD 34ki{::rr\ AA@k-ktL
Date Signed: loJCa,s{ 1, Z tw
Print Name
F: \cdev\FORMS\Permits\Building\building_permit_4-2 1-06. DOC Page 10 of 16 0412r12006
MATERIAL STORAGE AND CONSTRUCTION PARKING
Please read and check off each of the items below,
(Copies of complete text are available upon request)
CODE 5-2-10: DEPOSITS ON PUBTIC WAYS PROHIBITEo
d Unlawful deposits: Subject to subsection C thereof, it is unlawful for any person to litter, track or deposit, or cause to
be liftered, tracked or deposited, sand, gravel, rocks, mud, dirt, snow, ice, or any other debris or material upon any
street, sidewalk, alley or public place, or any portion thereof.
q/ Notice; Abatement: The Director of Public Works may notifo and require any person who violates or causes another
to violate the provision of subsection A hereof, or who has in the Director's employment a person who violates or
causes another to violate the same, top remove such sand, gravel, rocks, mud, dirt, snow, ice or any other debris or
material within twenty four (24) hours after receipt of said notice by the Director of Public Works. In the event the
person so notified does not comply with the notice within the period of time herein specified, the Director of Public
Works, or other authorized agent, may cause any such sand, gravel, rocks, mud, dirt, snow, ice, debris or any other
material to be removed from any street or alley at the expense of the notified.
d Summons and Penalty: As an alternative to the notice for removal provided in subsection B above, any person
who violates or causes another to violate the same, may be issued a summons to appear before the Municipal Court of
the Town for said violations, and upon being found guilty of a violation hereunder be punished as provided in Section
l4-1 of this code.
d Notice and Penalty: It is unlawful for any person to fail or refuse to comply with the notice of the Director of Public
Works as provided in subsection B hereof, and any such person shall, in addition to payment of the expense of removal
incurred by the Director of Public Works, as provided in subsection B hereof, upon being found guilty of a violation
hereunder, be punishable as provided in Section 1-4-1 of this Code. (1997 Code: Ordinance 6 (1979).
,, CODES 7-3A-L AND 7-3A-3: PARKING OBSTRUCTING TRAFFIC & IMPOUNDMENT AUTHORIZED
C/ No person shall park any vehicle upon a street or at any other place within this Municipality in such a manner or under
such conditions as to interfere with the free movement of vehicular traffic or proper street or highway maintenance.
l.ord. 2(t968) g l)
d Whenever any police officer finds a vehicle attended or unattended, standing upon any portion of a street or upon any
place within this Municipality in such a manner as to constitute a violation of any section of this Article, or left
unattended for a period of twenty four (24) hours or more and presumed to be abandoned under the conditions
prescribed by Colorado Revised Statutes section 42-4-LI02, as amended, the officer shall require the vehicle to be
removed or cause it to be removed and placed in storage in the nearest garage or other place of safety designated or
maintained by this Municipality, and the charges for towing and storage of such vehicle shall be charged to the owner
of the vehicle in addition to a ten dollar (910) impoundment charge. (Ord. 2(1968) $ 3: Ord. 28(1981) S 1)
I have read and rvill comply rvith the above code provisions:
Position or Relationship to Project:
Date Signed: h)A'Sf q, Ze4;
F:/everyone/forms/bldpermT
F:\cdev\FORM5\Permits\8uildin9\building_permiu-2 1-06.DOC
Signatulc
Page 11of 16 0412112006
.*. T*rin clf Vail
; r ,TfT'- !;s lxrtt-\rd}l
Chris Gunion, Building Plans Examiner
Town of Vail
Department of Community Development
Building Safety and Inspection Seryices
75 South Frontage Road
Vail, Colorado 81657
Re: Permit# 806-0242
Vail Mariott Grand Ballroom remodel
October 10,2006
Dear Chris,
l
l ocl 1: 2006
Boc-oay?
Please find attached our re-submittal of the Vail Malriott Ballroom plans and specifications. As
discussed previously with you and with Charlie, the scope of work has been substantially
reduced. It is ow hope that you will be able to issue a permit for construction within a week or
so since the window for construction at the hotel is finite and cannot be changed or extended. To
that end, if you have any questions, please do not hesitate to call me and I will try to resolve
whatever issue you have as quickly as possible.
Attached you will please find 4 copies of the following:
l. Revised Plans:
a. Architectural and Interiors
b. Mechanical
c. Electrical
d. Audio Visual
e. Telecom
f. Fire Protection
2. Revised specifications:
a. Architectural specs are not being re-issued- your original copy may contain
excess sections that no longer apply.
b. Mechanical
c. Electrical
d. Audio Visual
e. Fire Protection
f 000 South Fronfog€ Rood West, Suite '102 . Voil, Colorodo 81657 . Tel: (970, 476-1147 . Fox. (97O, 476-1612 . Emoil: gpsxvoil@ol.com
3. Plan Review Comm€,lrts with our responses
revised finish index
flame and smoke test data for wallcoverings
engineers response comme,nts
Comcheck Ligbting and Power Conrpliance Certificate
e. Electical calcs
f. Lightingpanelschedules
Gwathmey Pratt Schultz Architects, P.C.
a,
b.
c.
d.
Deryfunent of Community Development
Euilding htety and Inspstion *ruices
75 Soum Fronbge R@d
Vail, Colorado 81657
970479-2138
Fp( 970479-2452
wwwuailgov.com
BUILDING SAFETY AND INSPECTION SERVICES PLAN REVIEW COMMENTS:
TO:ContractoriApolicant
Viele Construction
Brent Arnold
Architect
Gwathmey Pratt SchulE
proj# Marriott Ballroom
3
Chris Gunion, Building Plans Examiner
09/08/2006
806-0242
Diamond Rock Hospitality
714 West Lionshead Circle
A-2
?
?
?
FAX/Email#: brent@vieleconstruction.com4T6.l6L2
NUMBER OF PAGES:
FROM:
DATE:
BUILDING PERMIT #:
OWNERS NAME:
SITE ADDRESS:
OCCUPANCY GROUP:
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION:
NUMBER OF STORIES:
BUILDING AREA:
The documents submitted for this project have been reviewed for compliance with the 2003
International Building Code, 2003 International Residential Code, 2003 International Mechanical
Code, 2003 International Fuel Gas Code, 2003 International Plumbing Code, 2003 International
Energy Conservation Code and 2002 National Electrical Code as modified and adopted by the Town of
Vail.
The following commenE will ned to be addrcssd prior b issaane of a building permit:
For processing:
o Please submit four comolete sets of revised construction documents containinq the requested
information with all plan revision items clouded or otherwise identified.
o Please respond in writing to each comment by marking the attached list or creatinq a resoonse
letter. Indicate which olan sheet, detail, soecification, or calculation shows the requested
information. Please send revisions to the attention of the olans examiner with the building
oermit aoolication number noted.
o Please be sure to include on the resubmittal the engineer's or architecfs "wet" stamp. siqnature,
reqistration number and date on the cover oage of any structural calculations, all structural
details and structural sheets of the olans. For commercial or multi-family oroiects all sheets of
the plans must be stamoed.
General Resoonse Com ments
The scope of work, as defined by the amended plans and specifications (I will list the changes made
since the permit submittal after the responses below), does not include any structural modifications
nor does any of the work "adversely affect any structural member or the fire-resistance rating of any
part of the building or structure". Therefore, per Section 3403.3 of the 2003 IBC, "nonstructural
alterations or repairsto an existing building orstructure are permitted to be made of the same
materials of which the building or structure is constructed". Therefore we respectfully submit that
the information requested in items 5,6 and 7 is not required. I am including the information known
to me in this response but I cannot provide stamped drawings for any design or construction done by
other Architects or not altered by the work proposed herein.
With regard to egress, again we are doing nothing to alter the existing conditions or occupancies and
therefore respectfully submit that the information requested in items 1, 2, 3 and 4 is not required. I
am including the information known to me in this response but I cannot provide stamped drawings
for any design or construction done by other Architects or not altered by the work proposed herein.
With regard to accessibility and accessible routes and excepting item #14, we are doing nothing to
alter or amend the oristing conditions. Therefore, we respectfully submit that the information
requested in item 12 is not required. I am including the information known to me in this response
but I cannot provide stamped drawings for any design or construction done by other Architects or not
altered by the work proposed herein.
Architectural Comments:
Amend plans to include a complete means of egress plan. Include occupant loads, travel distances,
common path of egress travel, exit widths, location of exits and exit discharge to the public ways.
Where exits pass through adjacent spaces include complete information and plans for the adjacent
areas. IBC 106.1.2, IBC ch. 10
Archited response: All egress is existing and shown on the plans. The scope of this work does not
include any modifications that would alter the existing egress in any way,
Even sq a quick calculation of required exit width for the Grand Ballroom, using table 1005.1 and the
occupant load given in (2) below, resul5 in a total width of 179". This equates to 6 doorc with a
clear width of 34'i The current and proposed plan shows 24 doorc, equally distributed. For the Pre-
fundion lobbies, the required exist width is 166" or 5 doorc. The combined exit width is 11 doorc.
The existing plan shows 11 exit doorc of at least 34" clear width and does not include the stairc up to
the lobby which will obviously be used as an exitway.
The travel distances are what they are and cannot be changed. We have added notes to the
drawings which indicate the exi6 to public ways that already exist. Charlb seemed OK with this at
our meeting.
Occupant load calculations for assembly areas shall use 5 occupant load factor for standing space and
7 for areas with unfixed chairs. IBC Table 1004.1.2.
Architect response: The propoxd occupancy of the Grand Ballroom, based on I percon/7 SE is 1189
pesons. Due to a slight redudion in floor area, this is 6 percons less than the curent occupant load.
The proposed occupancy of the prefunction lobbies, based on 5 sf/percon, is 1097 percons. This
number represents no change to the floor area of the existlng spaces.
Means of egress plan shall include analysis of exits for various configurations of room dividers, IBC
ch. 10.
Architect response: We are doing nothing to alter the existing ballroom spaces and configurations
and feel that this analysis is not warranted. That being sarQ we will note that the smaller individual
salons B, C, H and I only have one exit. Therefore they do not comply with the requirements of the
2003 IBC Sedion 1014 if an occupant fador of 7 sf/percon is used. If the less concentrated
occupant load factor of 15 SF/percon is used for these smaller rooms, they do comply. Since it ls
technially infeasible to add a code-compliant second exit to these spaces we would therefore submit
that the existing condition be allowed to remain but with the occupancy of each space limited to less
than 50 persons- the threshold requirement for a second exit. In our meeting on September 2Zo,
Charlie indicated that this would be ok.
Amend plans to show the main exit and other exits for the assembly area, Show compliance with IBC
L024.2. and 1024.3.
Architect response: The proposed scope of work does not alter the existing occupancies or exiE so
we feel that compliance with the stated I1C sedions is not required. We are prouiding a new sheet
A1.0 to show the existing the exi9 and have identified the "main'exit Wth approximately 165"of
clear width, the existing doors at this main exit do not amply with the requirements of ftction
1024.2 for 50ok of the total exit width (approx 172') to be through these doorc, although the
numberc are close.
Amend plans to specify the construction type of the building per IBC ch. 6.
Archited response: Existing construction type is unknown. We can only assume type 2b since there
is no fireproofrng of the strudural frame.
Amend plans to speciff occupancy groups and incidental uses at all areas on the floor plans. Show
location of existing and proposed separations. IBC table 302.1.1 and 302.3.2.
Architect response: The existrng occupancies are unknown and are not altered by the proposed
scope of work. The Grand Ballroom and Pre-function lobbies would be classified as A-2 under the
2003 IBC. The existing separations are believed to be 3 hour between Building 3 and Building J one
hour between the Assembly spaces and the R-l spaces of Building 3 (this latter one was per the
codes when Building 3 was rebuilt a few yearc ago) and one hour between the Assembly spaces and
the Service Corridor. Even though there are 45 minute doorc between the Ballroom and the Pre-
Fundion lobby, the IBC does not require any fire rated assembly between these spaces. Except for
the new closets at the setyice conidor, the proposed scope of work does not alter any separations.
Per 3403,3 of the IBC the construction of the new close9 will match the existing construction
(assumed t hour) and the closet doorc will be specified with a rating of I hour.
Include fire resistive assembly details and listings for all fire resistive walls, floor/ceiling and roof
ceilings. The existing roof/ceiling, floor/ceiling, structural frame, beam and columns are required to
be protected as required for a t hour, 2 hour or 3 hour fire resistive rating per IBC table 601.
Archited response: All assemblies are existing, are not we// documented and are not easily accessible
for evaluation. Per Table 601, and assuming Type 2b construdion, none of the above items are
required to have any fire resistive rating, Per Section 3403.3 we are allowed to make non-strudunl
alterations using the same materials as currently exist The scope of wo* has been reduced so that
there is no significant removal and replacement of the Ballroom ceiling drywall.
8 Include plans for posting of occupant load per IBC 1004.3
Architect response: This requirement will be met. Signage is being provided by the Owner.
9 Include the flamespread index for all proposed interior finish materials per IBC ch. 8.
Archited response: See revised finish schedule and produd data which is attached.
10 Include flamespread index and smoke developed index for proposed acoustic spray insulation
proposed in the ceiling areas. IBC 719,
Architect response: The spny applied insulation has been deleted from the rcope of work for this
prolect. Vaious batt insulations are being researched. We would ask that this be a defered
submittal and the informatron will be provided when the actual material proposed fur installation is
submitted by the Contractor.
11 Amend guard detail sheet A5.2 to show a minimum 42" height per IBC 1012.
Architect response: fuisting guardrait to which repairc are being made is 42" above the adjacent
finish floor. Drawing has been corrected to refled this. The repairc no longer involve structural
modification and that detail has been removed from the drawings.
12 Show accessible route to the area of remodel. IBC 3409,6
Architect response: Eristing accessible route is uia the elevatorc in Buildings 2 (middle wing) and
Building 3 (west wing). These have been noted on sheet A1.0 The scope of work proposes no
changes to the existing routes. Chailie seemed to accept this in our meeting.
13 Amend registration counter to show accessible portion per ANSI 117,1 1998. ch. 9
Archited response: This counter is not a "hotel" facility per se (not used for hotel check-in) and is
made available to groups that rent the Ballroom to use as they see fit. In lieu of an accessible
section of countertop, the hotel and the users have been providing, and would like to continue to
prowdq the seruices associated with this desk (actually more of a coat check facility) in a one'on-one
as needed manner. ANSI 112 section 103 does allow for alternatives if they are acceptable to the
TOV.
Amend plans to provide pull side clearances at accessible route at restroom entry doors. ANSI 117.1
1998 section 404.2.4.t
Architect response: The drawings have been so amended.
Amend plans to provide complete construction details for the accessible restroom facilities. Include
details for accessible fixtures, fi*ure mounting heights, grab bars, toilet compartment sizes, doors,
dimensions, signage etc. ANSI 117.1 1998 ch. 6, IBC 3409.6
Architect response: All items above are extsting and are assumed to comply with the requirements
of ANSI 117 since the last remodel was done after the requirements of the ADA became law. The
existing toilet partitions are being replaced with similar installation type, size and location. Existing
plumbing fixtures and toilet room accessories, etc are to remain and at this point are not scheduled
to be replaced. New countettops and vanity sinks (required for the new countertops) are shown on
the plans. We have revised the details on the interior elevation sheeB to show dimensions and
detailing in compliance with ANSI 117.
T4
15
Mechanical Comments:
See attached response from Alvine Engineering.
Electrical Comments:
See attached response from Alvine Engineering,
Chanoes to the Prooosed Work since the Prcvious Permit Submittal
A. The center-center moveable partition wall in the Grand Ballroom has been re-specified to use the
existing pockeb. The proposed new pocket in the Seruice Corridor has been deleted.
B. The removal of part ofthe space and structure at the Baggage room above the nofth end ofthe
Grand Ballroom has been deleted. Instead we are constructing new A/V closets under this space
that are accessed from the Seruice corridor as a way to hide the existing dropped soffit of the
baggage room and which will provide enclosure for the A/V equipment. The new walls will have 1
hour fire-resistive construction (5/8" gyp on both sides of the stud walls).
C. The proposed new A,/V closet in the Pre-Function Lobby has been deleted.
D. The existing lighting controls closet in the Pre-Function Lobby has been expanded by 18".
E. The proposed lighting plan for the Grand Ballroom has been amended so that no new fixtures are
being installed unless the existing ones are non-functional or at the end of their seruice. Only
relamping is proposed at this time.
F. The existing ffV speakers are to remain in their existing locations. Only the actual speaker motors
are being replaced. The new design re-uses all the existing wiring,
G. The mechanical scope of work in the Ballroom has been deleted from the project. Only the HVAC
modifications necessary to install the recessed ceilings in the prefunction lobbies still remain in the
scope.
H. The scope of work involving changes to the Ballroom ceiling have been deleted- there will be only
minor cutting and patching of the ceilings.L All doors in the ballroom are being replaced including those which should have been 3 hour rated.
The doors into the service corridor will be t hour rated and the others will not be rated. See the
revised door schedule for more details.
J. All decorative wall panels have been deleted from the project.
VAIL MARzuOTT RESORT AND SPA
BALLROOM/PREFUNCTION/PUBLIC RESTROOM
FINISH INDEX
October 10.2006
Note: Any numbers not shown are assumed not used. Provide fire rated
plastic laminate materials where required by code and indicated
on drawings. Preferred Product/Manufacturer specifications must
comply with General Conditions, the Bidding Procedures, and the
intent ofthe various Specification Sections.
FLOOR
Finish # Material Description
CPT - I Carpet Mfr: Tai Ping Carpets
(Ballroom) Specification: See FF & E drawings/specs
Contact: Darren Hayward
(202)232-3638
CPT - 2 Carpet Mfr: Tai Ping CarPets
(Prefunction) Specifications: See FF & E drawings/specs
Contact: Darren Hayward
(202)232-3638
CT - 4 Porcelain Tile Mfr.: Dal Tile
Field tile -(Men's/ Women's Pattern: Veranda
Restrooms) Color: Sand P505
Dimensions: 13" x20"
Grout: 1116" lMapei #05 Chamois
CT - 5 Porcelain Tile Mfr: Dal Tile
Accent border tile - (Men's/ Pattem: Veranda
Women's Restrooms) Color: Custom P505 and P501
Dimensions: 3t' x 20"
Grout: lll6"lMapei #05 Chamois
ST-4
BASE
Finish #
B- I
CT- 3
cT-7
WALL
Finish #
wc -l
wc -2
Description
Mfr:
Pattem:
width:
Repeat:
Flame:
Contact:
Mfr:
Pattern:
width:
Repeat:
Flame:
Contact:
Mfr:
Dal Tile
Granite
Absolute Black
Seabrook
vD1250W
54"
NiA
Class A
Frank Sandor
800-406-4193
Seabrook
VDI249N
54"
N/A
Class A
Frank Sandor
800-406-4193
Seabrook
Stone Threshold
Material
Wood Base
Porcelain Tile
(Men'siWomen's Restroom-
Wet walls only)
Porcelain Tile
(Ments/Woments Restroom -
All Vinyl Wall covering walls)
Material
Vinyl Wall covering
Prefunction- (above &
Below chair rail)
Ballroom - (Air walls)
Vinyl Wall covering
Prefunction - Accent wall
Ballroom - above wood trim,
Pocket doors)
Dimensions: 3h" thick x cut to fit door size.
Description
Mft. Bosley Moulding Co.
Profile # MB 300
Dimensions: 5" x 4/4"
Finish:Paint P - 2
Contact: 800-638-5010
Mfr.: Dal Tile
Pattern: Veranda
Color: P505 Sand
Dimensions: 6" H x 13" (cut in field)
Grout: l/6'7 Mapei #05 Chamois
Mfr. : Dal Tile
Pattern: Veranda S-44K9M
Color: P505 Sand
Dimensions: 4" x 20" bull nose
Mfr.:
Pattern:
Color:
wc-3 Vinyl Wall covering
Ballroom - below wood Pattern: VDI238N
Trim/above base Repeat: 24.5" repeat, straight across
match
Width: 54"
Flame: Class A
Contact: Frank Sandor
800-406-4193
WC- 4 Vinyl Wall covering Mfr: Eykon
Men's & Women's Restrooms Pattem: Jonathan 2DE-133
Weight: Zlox.
Width: 54"
Repeat:
FSR: Class A
Contact: Jake Kelly
P - 1 Paint Mfr: Sherwin Williams
Prefunction- upper wall area Color: SW 2834 Birdseye Maple
(See elevations) Restrooms - Finish: Eggshell
Door (restroom side only)
P -2 Paint Mfr: Sherwin Williams
Prefunction - Chair rail , wood Color: SW 009 Eastlake
Base, all painted door frames,
Fire door & Restroom - door frames- Finish: Semi - gloss
(Prefunction side only)
P - 3 Paint Mfr: Sherwin Williams
Prefunction-All painted Color: SW 6388 Golden Fleece
Serrice and Fire doors.
Rollup door @ Registration/
Coats area, Finish: Eggshell
Reshoom doors-
Prefunction side only)
P -4 Paint Mfr: Sherwin Williams
Men's/Women's Color: SW 0012 Empire Gold
Restroom - door trim - (Restroom Finish: Semi gloss
Side only),
Air grilles,
P - 7 Paint Mfr: Sherwin Williams
Men's/Women's Color: SW 6385 Dover White
Restroom - (Grout Finish: Flat
Joints on stone wall)
CT- I Porcelain Tile Mfr: Dal tile
Men's/Women's
Restroom - walls
ST - 2 Stone
Lav top and Purse shelf-
(Men's/Women's Restrooms)
Pattem: Semi - gloss
Color: White K101
Dimensions: 3" x 6"
Grout: 1116" lMapei #00 White
Mfr: Dal Tile
Pattem: Granite
Color: Cariaco Gold G.284
Dimensions: Per detail drawings
CT - 2 Porcelain Tile Mfr. Dal Tile
Men's/Women's Pattem: Castle de verve
Restroom - accent Color: Universal CVl4
Dimensions: 3" x 13"
Grout: l/6"/ Mapei #00 White
WD - I Wood stain Mfr.
Ballroom- entry doors, panels Color: To match sample provided
Species: Alder
Above doors. Finish: Clear coaVlow luster
Prefunction- Stained wood panels
On walls
ST-l Stone Mfr:
Prefunction - accent pillars & Pattern: To match existing
Face of Coats/Reeistration desk Color
ST - 3 Stone Mfr: Dal Tile
Buffet top - (Prefunction built-in Pattem: Granite
Buffet unit) Color: Galaxv Black
Dimensions: Per detail drawings
WP I Wall Panel Mfr: Interlarn
hrset panel (Prefiuretie* Series: r\rt Diffosien
eerride4 large Prefonetien Pattem: l603r1a\
,, drr*il, *rd **,orog,#
e'orft:daF ?7625L,5?gg
WP 2 WallPanel Mfr:B+Nlndus*ies
krset panel (Prefirctien between Series: Ieenie
onr*.
W
G - I Glass Panel Mfr: DesignTex
Transom panel - (above Pattem: Fusion
Ballroom and Prefunction Color: Oyster Lucent 4P077
Entry doors) Dimensions:
Contact: Holly Watts
l-8---22r-r540
PL-l Not Used
WC-5 Vinyl Wall Covering Mfr: GenesysAy'ersa
(Prefunction- Accent @ Pattern: Seneca
WallsoppositeRegistration/Coats) Color: A73-640-PrarieBrush
Width: 32154"
Weight: 20 oz
Type: II
Fire rating: Class A
Installation: Reverse hang/Random
Match
Contact: Whitney Tredwell
1800-647-3633 X 307
CT-6 Ceramic Tile Mfr. Dal Tile
(Liner above and below Pattern: Liner
CT-z) Color: Kl0l White
Dimensions: Y2' x 6" flat top
Grout: Mapei #00 \ilhite
CEILING
Finish # Material Description
P - 5 Paint Mfr: Sherwin Williams
(Ballroom & Prefunction- Color: SW 6224 Mountain Air
Uppermost dryrvall Finish: Flat
Surfaces)
P - 6 Paint Mfr: Sherwin Williams
(Ballroom & Prefunction- Color: SW6385 DoverWhite LRV
Lower bulkheads and Finish: Flat /Semi gloss
for moldings
Sollitts & any existing
ceiling moldings to remain)
Page I of6
Subj: Fw: Marriott Vail: Seabrook, Technical quostionDate: 9111120067:10'.44 P.M. Mountain Standard TimeFrom: phefner@cox.ne!To: QPAxVAIL@as!.eam
Henry/Brent,
Did you get this one? lt is fo
Paula
--- Original Message -----
From: Frank Sandor
To:'Paula DeMarco-Hefner' ;'Diane_Cudworth'
Cc: lAdan luil[ems' ; Grcspry]HawXing ; 'SCOTT ENGSAHL'
Sent: Monday, September 11, 2006 9:02 AM
Subject: RE: Marriott Vail: Seabrook, Technical queslion
Paula/Diane.
These 3 items specified easily meet or exceed all federal requirements of CCC-W-408D, type ll
wallcoverings. Similar items from this specific book, (Domino), have been regularly used on other Marriott
projects nationwide, mosl recently al the San Francisco airport location. For your convenience, I am attaching the
spec sheet listing the federal requirements, and the results. The ounce weight is NOT a factor in determining
durability of the product (ihat particular requirement was dropped sometime in the mid 1980s). PLEASE let me
know if I can provide anv further documentation pertaining to this, thanks!!
Regards,
Frank
PS - Paula, I have all the necessary Flame Spread information, I witl provide that on a separate email. In
general, all items are Class A Rated - again, l'll provide that separately.
Thanks everyone for your patience, please let me know if you need any further informalion.
Y@RK rest Resurts
Test ldentificatlon
Colorfastness to Light
Washability
Scrubability
Abrasion Resistance
Breaking Strength
Cracking Resistance
Standard
Fed. Stand. l9l, method 5660
CCC-W-408D, Par-4.4.
CCC-W-408D, Par-4.4.3
CCC-W-408D, Par4.4.4
ASTM-D.75I
Fed. Stand. l9l, method 5651
Type II Test Results
Pass - No Change in Color after
2000 hours ofexposure
Pass - No damage after 100 cycles
ofabrasion
Pass - No damage afler 300 cycles
of abrasions
Pass - No damage after 300 cycles
ofabrasions
Pass - Exceeded length and width
break strength requirements
Pass - No color transfer: l-5
WC-1, WC-2, and WC-3
()
Trresdav Sentemher 12.2006 America Online: GPAxVAIL
Page 2 of 6
Stain Resistance
Tear Resistance
Blocking Resistance
Coating Adhesion
Cold Crack Resistance
Heat Aging Resistance
Flame-Spread
Smoke Development
Shrintage
Mildew Resistance
CCC-W-408D, Par-4.4.5
ASTM.D-75I
Fed. Stand. l9l, method 5972
ASTM-D-75I
CCC-W-408D, Par4.4.6
Fed. Stand. l9l, method 5850
ASTM.E.84
ASTM.E.E4
CCC-W-408D, Par4.4.7
CCC-W-408D, Par-4.4.8
rating (5 best), rating:4.5
Pass - No staining when exposed
to 12 reagents
Pass - Exceeds tear strength
requrrements
Pass - No color transfer: l-4
rating ( I best) rating I
Pass - Exceeded 3lbVinch
Pass - No cracking at 20 F
Pass- Tdays@ l58F: No
discoloration, stiffness,
soft ening or brittleness
Pass - 0-25 rating (0 best) rating:
0
Pass - 0-50 rating (0 best) rating:
0
Pass - No Shrinkage
Pass - No Bacterial Crowth
From: Paula DeMarco-Hefner Imailto:phefner@cox.net]
SenE Frlday, September 08, 2006 11:01 AM
To: Diane Cudworth; Frank Sandor
Cc: Adam Williams
Subject: Re: Marriott Vail: Seabrook, euote Needed
Public space vinyls should be 21o2. minimum per Marriott standards. ls this a problem?
Paula
--- Original Message ---
From: Diale Cudworth
To : F_LAOk Sandor ; P_agla_DeMatc.A:Hefnel
Sent: Friday, September 08, 2006 10:21 AM
Subject: RE: Marriott Vail: Seabrook, Quote Needed
Frank, thanks for the item # clarification(s).
Paula, please confirm if the ounce weight (15) is acceptable. Thanksl
Thanks,
Diane
Tuesdav- Seotember 12-2006 America Online: GpAxVAIL
Page 3 of6
---Original Message-----
From: Frank Sandor [mailto:fsandor@comcast.net]
Sent: Friday, September 08, 2006 8:06 AM
To: Diane Cudworth
Cc:'Paula DeMarco-Hefner'
Subject: RE: Marriott Vail: Seabrook, Quote Needed
Diane,
Before I begin, I have a technical correction to make: ltems WC-2 and WC-3, the suffix should end in a "W"
instead of an "N". (the N or W indicates roll goods, 27", or wide goods, 54"). I have taken the liberty of changing
those suffixes on our quote.
That being said, here is the information you requested:
e The price per linear yard on all 3 items (559 LY of VD1250W, 486 LY of VD1249W, and 390 LY of
VD1238W) will be at $9.69 per yard.
o There is no need for potential overage; the amounl you request will.in fact be the exact amount shipped.
o The FOB is York, PA.
r The backing for all three items is Non Woven, TYPE ll tested and approved.r The ounce weighl for all three items is'l5oz, TYPE ll tested and approved.
The lead time on all three items is 3 weeks from receipt of the Purchase Order.
lwill make sure your Purchase Order is facilitated properly and efficiently; you can submit it directly to me,
either via fax @ (301) 210-0427, or email to this address. Also, please let me know if you need any further
technical information, l'll be happy to provide it ASAP.
Thanks again for considering Seabrook!
Regards,
Frank
Frank Sandor
Seabrook Wallcoveri ngs, Inc.
fsandor@comcast.net
csll (301 )77SM52, voice (800)406-41 93
From: Diane Cudworth [mailto:dcudworth@benjaminwest,com]
Senh Thursday, September 07, 2006 7:52PM
To: Frank Sandor
SubJect RE: Marriott Vail: Seabrook, Quote Needed
Importane: High
Frank, please also provide:
-Price per LY
-Potential Overage o/o (if any)
-FOB City and State
-Backing for each
-Ounce weight for each
Here are the final quantities by spec #:
WC-1: 1,559 LY (VDl250W, 54" W)
WC-2: 486 LY (VD1249N, 54" W)
WC-3: 390 LY (V01238N, 54'W)
lwant to re-confirm pricing (and the other items) because guantities are different and you have minimums.
Trresdav Sc-rrtemher 1) ).006 America Online: GPAxVAIT,
u I,ALL souRcE o
Refdg
2l ozPLY
14 oz PSY
Ooatrug rNon:Wortn
CCC-W408A/D, IITcII
CFFA-W-101-D, $Tc tr
. 50x55 tb Gltm'un)
25x25 (Minimm)
3lh1io. (Mbimu)
NoCbgc
1.1o.2 (Mdinum)
2ctttl% orronul)
No Cfragr
300 (Mdm)
100 (Midnm)
300 (Midnurn)
SEP-11-2006 14303
P.O, lor 65,
,@ l.F. @odfth nocd
udlcno, of 4tc)
t.0Jr.1,6,0 Fhs.€
7!0,3t35m ?q
Data Sheet
2f oz I}Tc II Conguctionr
ToolWciglt
Fabric
Fedrral Spccificdio
CFFASpccificatim
TcnsibWrF
TcrWxF
Aftcsio
ColaFaoolt C200hr.)
Ekrc&ilg (Scrbnladng)
lkbbgcWrF
ColdCrr L@2trF
Ahadm (Cl,clcr)
W.dnbih'ty (CFLt)
Ssufbabnny (Cyclcs)
Ftt'o TGahS
901355044? P,001/001
ffi
HeatAgitrg (?&Fatl5f$ NoCtrngo
StabRcsirc(RcegpG l.l2) Passr
NFPA lolt Lib s&y c.odco. ffffefSS(fSnUEt{C ltlsI|EDf)frrrclTrgtr
Tlc$rtad l0
SdollatcloPod 5
r NXPA2t6ConcrEnTaf
Moa nqnnm fu Ft n€ Smr4 Soolc Dsvclqo4
md Ftashottr
I D6o|ti.rc ornanic q{Tlct wrllooyrrilst SoId oV bc clmd wftt niltl iogtldbltr $dr a. so.o, atrcr8p4 ad stlcr'
S&ug33, or€ dSli'r ms*,U ctain (rec Lc*ol$ fnrc tc p6ltid to d'n'.g' lhc srrbcc o,f 6c rrelhottriog
t . Whca +li.d b ORC bodd ti6 A.til&B AdbGdr€.
2, Wbct diuod b 5/f Tt?c - X aP&D torrd widr A{1&B ADctivc
Bl,B2{x
TOTAL P.OO1
SPECIFICATION
DeMarco Interior Design
601 River Bend Road
Great Falls, VA 22066
(703)759-0869
(703)759-2681 FAX
Project lD:
Project: Vail Marriott
Area(s): Prefunction
lssue Date: September 24,?OOG
Last Revision:
Manufacturer Source
GenesysA/ersa
1825 Macarther Blvd
Atlanta, GA 30318
800.673.4593
WhitneyTredwell
800.647.3633 X 307
Description
VINYL WALLCOVERING
PATTERN: SENECA
COLOR: A73-640 PRARIE BRUSH
WIDTH: 521il"TYPE: ll
BACKING: OSNABURGFIRE; CLASS A .
INSTALLATION: REVERSE HANG/RANDOM MATCH
PRICE: $20.15 / LIN YD (INCLUDES $3.00 cur CHARGE FoR LESS THAN 30 YDS/BOLT)
lssued Bv:Drawinq Ref.Quantity Description Specification No.
PD 24 LIN YDS.
VINYL WALL
COVERING.
ACCENT
wc-5
I
trE
to:
Alvine
Engineeri ng
1102 Oouglas on lhe Mall tr
Omaha, Nebraska 68102
Phone: 402-346-7007
Fax: 402€116-9576
Vail Marriott
John Delaney
Russell Sack
1 800 O Street. Suile 1 04
Lincoln, Nebraska 68508
Phone: 402-477€'l61
Fax:402-477- 16
Memorandum
rB08 University Avenue
Des Moines, lowa 50311
Phone: 515-243-0569
Attn:
From:
Re:
cc:
Date: October 5, 2006
Prolect Name: Vail Marriott Grand Ballroom
Alvine No:2006 9026
Below are Alvine's responses to code questions.
MECHANICAL
1. Gomment: Please clarify if ceiling space is proposed to be used as a plenum or if all
supply and return grilles will be ducted. A duct plan was not provided for the ceiling
space. lf plenum ceiling is proposed, include specification for all materials exposed in
the plenum. IMC 602.
Response: The supply air to the salon areas within the ballroom is an existing ducted
system. The return air for this area is an existing plenum system return. This is part of
the original design and will remain. ll is unknown to what type of malerial is within the
plenum space above each salon area. Within some of the accessible locations, only
drywall and structure was observed.
2. Comment: Amend plans to show compliance with IMC 606 for smoke detection.
Response: Existing two multizone air handling units that serve the ballroom area will
remain as is. No work will be perlormed on these units. Alvine Engineering was
informed by the building engineer that the two units shut off and damper close on a
smoke alarm condition.
3. Comment: Include calculation showing required outdoor ventilation air per IMC Table
403.3.
Response: The existing two multizone air handling units that serve the ballroom area
will remain as is. There will be no work performed on these units. The existing airflow
and outside air llow will remain as the original design.
Page 1 of 2
o
Vail Marriott Grand Ballroom
Alvine No.2006 9026
Memorandum
October5.2006
ELEGTRICAL
1. Comment: Specity type of fuse and circuit breakers,
Response: See attached panel schedules.
2. Comment: Provide short circuit calculation.
Response: See attached short circuit calculation
3. Comment: Provide lighting Statement of Compliance for IECC Chapter 8.
Response: See attached Lighting Statement of Compliance for IECC Chapter 8.
4. Comment: Provide electrical room plan for MDC and MDP.
Response: See Sheet E2.2tor enlarged electrical room layouts.
JAD/RS/ajf
Page 2 ol 2
Permit #
Pormit Date
{Vf coMcheck software version 3.2.1
V I Lighting and Power Gompliance
Gertificate
Standard 90.1-2001
Report Date: 10/06/06
Data fi lename: J :\2006_Projects\20069026\Calcsvail,Co.ock
Section 1: Project Information
Project Title: Maniott Ballroom Renovation Vail, CO
Construction Site:
Vail, CO
Owner/Agent:Designer/Contractor:
Section 2: General Information
Building Use Ooscription by: Acilvlty TypoPmjecnType: Addltlon
Actvltv Tyoe(d ElceIAEr
Public Assemblf Oonvenlion Center Exhibit Space 15328
Section 3: Requirements Ghecklist
Interior Lighting:
E 1. Toial actual watts must be less than or squal b total allowsd watts.
Aloyrod W.tL Aciual Watts Compllat
50582 37063 YES
Exterior Lighting:
B 2. Minimum s cacy of 60 lumon/watt for lamps greater than 100W.
O a. Lbtrting po\,r6r for canoples, entrances, and exib meets the following criteda (bade-ofis dlorcd amng tt|ese applications):(i) Lighling poivor br fise.standing canopy areas or building ontrancss with canopies is less than or equal to 3 watts
p€r squars bot(iD Lighung porvor for building entrances without a canopy is l6ss than or equal lo 33 watts per linsar foot of door width.(iii) Lighting porrer for building exib is less than or equal lo 20 watts per linear foot of exit door widlh.
E +. Lignting power for bulldlng facades is less than or equal to 0.25 watts per squar€ bot of the illuminat8d aroa.
Excep('ons:
Controlled by motion sensor, slgnal or advertising signage, highlighting features of historic monumonls and buildings, or
requir€d for safoty or security.
Gontrols, Switching, and Wiring:
D 5. Independent manual or ocolpancy sensing controls for each spacs (rernots switdl with indicator allorved ior safety or
secuntyl
B 6. Automatic shutofi control for lighting in >5OOO sq.ft buildings by timeofday device, occupanl sensor, or other automalic
control.
Ercop0ons:
24 hour operation lighting.
D 7. Master switch at sntry to hoteumotel guest room.
f,l 8. Separate control dovice for display/accent lighting, cas6 lighting, lask lighting, nonvisual lighting, lighting for sale, and
Page 1 of 3
d€monstratlonlighting. CE g. Phoocall/astonombal time slvitch on ext€rior lighb.
Exc€ptions:
Covored vehlcle enfanc€y'exit areas requidng lighting for safety, security and eye adaptation.
E 10. Tandem wired one.lamp and throe-lamp ballasted luminalr€s (No singl*lamp ballasts).
Exc',ptions:
Eledrcnic high-fr€quency ballesbi
L{minaiFs nol on same 3witch:
Roco$ed luminair€s 10 n. aperl or $rface/p€rdant not oontinuous;
LuminaiBs on em€rgency cirwits.
Voltage Drop:
E 11. Feeder condudoB have been designed for a maximum voltagB drop of 2 p$cent.
O 12, Branch clr@lt conductors ha\re been d€signed for a maximum r/oltage drcp of 3 porcent.
Section 4: Compliance Statement
hn pliancf S:b]ton e/rf Tho prcposed llghtlng deslgn repres€nt€d in this documeni ls consistont wlth lhe building plans,
sp€dficatims ard oth€r calculations submitbd wih this pemit apdication. The propoo€d lighting systom has been d€signed to
msst lhe Standard 90.1-2001 r€quir€m€nts in CoMcrracr(Vorsion 3.2.'l and to oomply with tho mandator), rgquiremsnts in tho
Rsquir€m€nb Cfi ocklist.
Pdncipal Lighting Dosigner-Name Signalur€
Sectlon 5: Post Gonstructlon Gompllance Statement
R.co.d DrawlngF rnd Op.ratlng and n lnt n nc. [anudi
Constructon dooimont3 with r€oord dra$rlngs and op€ratlng and maintenance manuals prwided to lhe owner.
Page 2 of 3
Pemit#
Permit Dat€
iW coMclreck software version 3.2.1
Lfl Lighting Application Worksheet
Standard 90.1-2001
Report Date:
Data fi lename: J:\2006_ProJscts\20069026\Calcavail,Co.cck
Section l: Allowed Llghting Power Galculatlon
A
Ar.r GA.gory
BCD
Floor Artr Allow.d Allosd w.tt!(ll2) Watt , fi2 (B x G)
Puuic Assomblsconvsnton C€nter Exhiut Spece 15328 3.3 50582
Totral Allowed Watts = 50582
Section 2: Actual Lightlng Power Galculation
AFhrr. lD : D..crlpuon , Lrmp , W.tt g. P.r lsmp , B.llEt
BCL.mp., ,d
Flrtu]l Flxtura3
DE
Flxturr (CX D)
Watt
Incandescent 1: Exlstng: Ballrcom Dovvnlights / Incandescent 10O /
Incand€scent 2: Existng: Prefunc{on lobby Downlights / Incandescent 100W
Linear Fluo{oscont 1: C1 : ballrcom 8. covBs / 46' T5 28W / Eletllonic
Lln6ar Fluor€sc€| 2: C2: ballroom .+' co\6s / 46f T5 28W / Elecironic
Lineer Fluor$csrt 3: C:l: prsfunc-tion 8 co\ros /,f6' T5 28W / Electonic
Llnear Fluor?scont 4: C4: pr€func1ion 4 co\r$ / 46'T5 28W / El€ctonic
Incandescenl 3: D1: Balhoorn largo Pendanl / Olher
Incandescenl 4: D2: Balhoom small Pondant / Other
Incandescent 5: 03: Prefunction Lobby Sconce / Oher
Incandoscent 6: D,/t: Pofurrlion Lobby Pendant / Othet
Cornpad Fluor€scent 1: E2: P.efunclbn downlightB / Quad 2-pin 26W / Eloclrcnic
Incand€scsnt s(GMND BALLROOM): D3: GRAl\lD BALLROOM SCONCE / Other
Incand6csnt 8: T1: pr€funcdon tack lights / Incandescont 65W
Incand€scsnt 9: P1: bathroom pin spols / Incad€scent 35Vv
lncandesc€.rt 10: P2: art pin spots / Incandesent 35W
116 100 11600
E 100 2900
124 56 6944
28 28 7U
12 56 672
8 28 224
6 480 2880
8 3m 2560
2 100 mo
4 W 3360
74
18
7
11n
re 1924
80 1440
70 4,(X)
36 385
35 700
Total Ac-lual Watts = 37063
Section 3: Gompliance Galeulation
lf the Totral Allowsd Watts minu6 th6 Totel Actrel Wa[s is gr€abr han or equal to zoro, the building complies.
Total Allowsd Watb =
Tolal Aciual Watb =
Pmject Complhnce =
50582
37063
13519
Pags 3 ot 3
'#
vi
SHffT Nq
Alvlne
Engineering
tt
oorE qhillt--tmro.,fthr f4-16_-_7_---.--.-
I lSz Doudos Ctn Tln r-ttll, *noho, Ncblwlo 68 lO2d023467d07 For 402346.9576 cAr-cuu{rFoff RRf-.-ct.p*
1..-i-
PROJECT NO 20069026 DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARRIOTT
CALC. BY: RRS
6/30/2006
NOTES:
LIGHTING PANEL: GBRA VOLTAGE: 2o8l12}v 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
RATING: 100AMLO 30POLES TYPE: WGND.BAR
MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
0 0
LOAD LOAD
DESCRIPT.TIGHTIN(RECEPT EQUIP.otc CKT #ota EOUIP.RECEPT _rGt-fTtN(DESCRIPT.
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 1 2 2U1 180 SALON A RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 3 4 20t1 '| 80 SALON A RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 o 20t1 180 SALON A BECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 7 I 20t1 180 SALON A FECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 I 10 201'l '| 80 SALON A RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 11 12 20t1 180 SALON A RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 't3 't4 20t1 180 SALON A RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 15 to 20rl 180 SALON B RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 17 18 20t1 180 SALON B RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 19 20 20t1 180 SALON B BECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 21 22 2011 180 SALON B FECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 23 24 60/3 1 SALON B SPECIAL
SPARE 2011 25 26
SPARE 20t1 27 28
SPARE 20t1 29 30 20t1 SPAHE
0 2160 0 TOTAL rOTAL 0 1981 0
LOAD VA D.F.DEMAND
EMD 4141
SPARE o
TOTALVA 4141
FLA 11.s
MIN. FEEDER 14
FEEDER USED:
LIGHTING 0 't.0 0
RECEP 4'141 1.0 414'l
RECEP 0 0.5 0
EQUIP.0 1.0
OTHER
0
TOTAL 4'141 4141
Panel Schedule.xls 10/6,/2006
9:58 AM
Page 1
PROJECT NO 20069026 DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARRIOTT
CALC. BY: RRS
6/30/200€
NOTES:
LIGHTfNG PANEL: GBRE OUB 1) VOLTAGE: 2O8|12OV 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
RATING: 2OOA MLO 42 POLES TYPE: WFEED THRU LUGS AND GND BAR
MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
0 0
LOAD LOAD
DESCRIPT,-IGHTIN(RECEPT EQUIP.o/c CKT #ota EQUIP.RECEPT -IGHTINC DESCRIPT.
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 1 2 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTA
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20rl 3 4 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 q 201'l 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 A 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 10 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 11 12 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 13 14 2011 '180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 15 to 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 17 18 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 19 20 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 't80 2011 21 zz 20/1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 23 24 20t'l 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
SALON E RECEPT 180 2011 25 26 20t1 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 20t1 27 28 20t1 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 20t1 29 30 20t'l 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t'l 31 32 20/l '| 80 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 33 34 20t'l 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 35 JO 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 37 38 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 39 40 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 41 42 20t1 SPARE
rUB 2 0 5040 0
0 8820 0 TOTAL rOTAL 0 3600 0
LOAD VA D.F.DEMAND
EMD 11210
SPARE O
TOTAL VA 11210
FLA 31.2
MIN. FEEDER 39
FEEDER USED:
LIGHTING 0 1.0 0
RECEP 10000 'I .0 10000
RECEP 2420 0.5 '1210
EQUIP.0 1.0
OTHER
0
TOTAL 12420 11210
Panel Schedule.xls 10/9/2006
1:41 PM
Page 1
PROJECT NO 20069026 DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARRIOTT
CALC. BY: RRS
6/30/200€
NOTES:
LfGHTING PANEL: GBRF CTUB 1) VOLTAGE: 2o9l12}v 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
RATING: 2OOA MLO 42 POLES TYPE: WFEED THBU LUGS AND GND BAR
MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
0 0
LOAD LOAD
DESCRIPT.-IGHTIN(RECEPT EQUIP.otc CKT f otc EQUIP.RECEPT -IGHTIN(DESCRIPT.
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 1 2 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTA
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 201'l 4 20/1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 6 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 8 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 q 10 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 11 12 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 1e 14 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 IE 16 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20rl 17 't8 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 19 20 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 21 22 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 23 24 20/1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
SALON F RECEPT 180 2011 25 26 2011 180 SALON F RECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 2011 27 28 20t1 180 SALON F RECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 20t1 29 30 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 201'l 31 32 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 ae 34 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET BECEPTACLE 180 20t'l 35 36 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 37 38 20t1 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 39 40 2011 180 POCKET RECEPTAC
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 41 42 2011 SPARE
fuB 2 0 4680 0
0 8460 TOTAL rOTAL 0 3600 0
LOAD VA D.F.DEMAND
EMD r1o3o
SPARE o
TOTAL VA ,I1O3O
FLA 3o.7
MIN. FEEDER 38
FEEDEB USED:
LIGHTING 0 't.0
RECEP 10000 't.0 10000
RECEP 2060 '1030
EQUIP.1.0 0
OTHER 0
0
TOTAL '12060 1 1030
Panel Schedule.xls '10/9i2006
1:42 PM
Page 1
PROJECT NO 20069026 DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARRIOTT
CALC. BY: BRS
6/30/200€
NOTES:
LfGHTfNG PANEL: GBRG VOLTAGE: 2OB|12OV 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
RATING: 100AMLO 30POLES TYPE:WGND.BAR
MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
0 0
LOAD LOAD
OESCRIPT.-IGHTIN(RECEPT EOUIP.otc CKT #otc EOUIP.RECEPT.-IGHTIN(OESCRIPT.
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 2 20t1 180 SALON G RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 e 4 20t1 180 SALON G RECEPT
POCKET BECEPTACLE 180 20t1 o 20t1 180 SALON G RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 I 2U1 180 SALON G RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 o 10 2U1 180 SALON G RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 11 12 20t1 180 SALON G RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 13 't4 20t1 180 SALON G RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 15 16 20/l 180 SALON H RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 17 18 20t1 180 SALON H RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 19 20 2011 180 SALON H RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 21 22 20rl 180 SALON H RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 23 24 60/3 1 SALON H RECEPT
SPARE 20t1 25 26
SPARE 2011 27 28
SPARE 2011 29 30 20t1 SPARE
0 2160 0 TOTAL rOTAL n 1981 0
LOAO VA D.F.DEMAND
EMD 4141
SPARE O
TOTAL VA 4141
FLA 11.5
MIN. FEEDER 14
FEEDER USED:
LIGHTING 0 1.0 0
RECEP 4141 1.0 4141
RECEP 0 0.5 0
QUIP.1.0 0
OTHER 0
0
TOTAL 4141 4141
Panel Schedule.xls 10,6/2006
10:06 AM
Page I
PROJECTNO. 20069026DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARRIOTT
CALC. BY: RRS
6€0/m0€
NOTES:
LIGHTING PANEL: PFRA (TUB 1) VOLTAGE: 208fi20V 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
RATING: 2OOA MLO 42 POLES TYPE: WFEED THRU LUGS AND GND BAR
MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
00
LOAD LOAD
OESCRIPT.-IGHTINC HECEPT EOUIP.otc CKT #otc EOUIP.RECEPT -IGHTINC DESCRIPT.
P.F. CORRIDOR 180 20t1 1 2 20t1 180 P.F. CORRIDOB
P.F. CORRIDOR 180 2011 3 4 2011 180 P.F. CORRIDOR
SPARE 20t1 5 20t1 180 P.F. CORRIDOR
SPARE 20t1 7 n 20t'l 180 P.F. LOBBY
SPARE 20t1 o 10 2011 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. CORRIDOR 180 20t1 11 12 2011 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. CORRIDOR 180 20t1 13 14 2U1 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. CORRIDOR 180 20t1 15 16 2U1 180 P.F. LOBBY
SPARE 2011 17 18 2011 180 P.F. LOBBY
SPARE 20t1 19 20 20fi 180 P.F. LOBBY
SPARE 20t1 21 22 20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. CORRIDOR 180 20t1 23 24 20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. CORRIDOR 180 20t1 25 26 20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. COBRIDOR 180 20t1 27 28 2011 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. CORRIDOR 180 2011 29 30 20rl 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. COBRIDOR 180 20t1 31 32 2011 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. COBRIDOR '180 2011 33 34 20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. COBRIDOR 180 20t1 36 20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
SPARE 201'l 37 38 2011 180 P.F. LOBBY
SPARE 2011 qo 40 20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. LOBBY 180 20t1 41 42 20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
lub 2 0 23/,0 0 0 3780 0 tub 2
0 4680 0 TOTAL IOTAL 0 7560 0
LOAD VA D.F,DEMAND
EMD 11120
SPARE O
TOTALVA 11120
FLA 3o.e
MIN. FEEDER 39
FEEDER USED:
LIGHTING 0 '| .0 0
BECEP 10000 1.0 '| 0000
RECEP 2&0.5 1120
EQUIP.0 1.0 0
OTHER 0
0
rOTAL 12240 11120
Panel Schedule.xls 10/6/2006
lO:08 AM
Page 1
PROJECT NO 20069026 DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARRIOTT
CALC. BY: RRS
6t30/2006
NOTES:
UGHING PANEL: PFRB VOLTAGE: zOBfi2OV 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
BATING: 1004MLO 42POLES TYPE: WGND.BAR
MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
0 0
LOAD LOAD
DESCRIPT.-IGHTIN(RECEPT EOUIP.o/c CKT #o/c EQUIP.RECEPT -IGHTINC DESCRIPT.
P.F. HALL 180 2011 1 2 20t1 180 LOWER LOBBY
P.F. HALL 180 20t'l e 4 20t'l 180 LOWER LOBBY
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 5 6 20t'l 180 LOWER LOBBY
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 7 I 20t1 180 LOWER LOBBY
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 o 't0 2011 't80 LOWER LOBBY
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 11 12 2011 180 LOWER LOBBY
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 13 14 2011 SPABE
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 15 lo 2011 SPARE
P.F. HALL 180 20fi 17 18 2011 SPARE
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 19 20
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 21 22
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 23 24
P.F. HALL 't80 20t1 25 26
P.F. HALL 180 201'l 27 28
P.F. HALL 180 2011 29 30
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 31 32
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 33 u
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 35 36
JI 38
39 40
41 42
0 3240 TOTAL rOTAL 1080 0
LOAD VA D.F.OEMAND
EMD 4320
SPABE O
TOTALVA 43?o
FLA 12.o
MIN. FEEDER 15
FEEDER USED:
LIGHTING 1.0
RECEP 4320 1.0 4320
RECEP 0 0.5 0
EQUIP.1.0 0
OTHER 0
0
TOTAL 4520 4320
Panel Schedule-xls 10/6/2006
3:14 PM
Page 1
Panel Schedule.xls
PROJECT NO.:
PROJECT:
CALC. BY:
20069026 DATE:
10/9/2006
1:42PM
SWITCH BOARD/DISTRI BUTION PAN EL SCH EDULE
HBOARD/PANEL: DPBR1 VOLTAGE: 208Y/120V
3 PHASE 4 WIRE
PERAGE: 400A TYPE: MAIN LUG ONLY
ISTRIBUTION: BREAKER DISTRIBUTION A.l.C. RATING: 18000 AIC
EMD 71106
TOTALVA 71106
FLA 197.6
MIN. FEEDER 247.006
Page I
PROJECT NO, 20069026 DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARRIOTT
CALC. BY: RRS
6/30/2006
NOTES:
LIGHTING PANEL: GBRD VOLTAGE: 2O8|12OV 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
RATING: 100AMLO 'S0POLES TYPE: WGND. BAR
MOUNTING: SUBFACE MOUNTED A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
0 0
LOAD LOAD
DESCRIPT.LIGHTINC RECEPT EOUIP.otc CKT #o/c EQUIP,RECEPT..IGHTIN(DESCRIPT.
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 1 z 20t1 180 SALON D RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 e 4 20t1 't80 SALON D RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20/1 2011 180 SALON D RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20/1 R 20t1 180 SALON D RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE '180 20t1 10 201'l 180 SALON D RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 11 12 2011 180 SALON D RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 13 14 20rl 180 SALON D RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 15 16 2011 180 SALON C RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 17 18 2011 180 SALON C RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 19 20 20t1 180 SALON C RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 21 22 20t1 180 SALON C RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 23 24 60/3 1 SALON C SPECIAL
SPARE 201'l 25 26
SPARE 2011 27 28
SPARE 2011 29 30 20t1 SPARE
0 2160 n TOTAL TOTAL 0 1981 0
OAD VA D.F.DEMAND
EMD 4141
SPABE O
TOTAL VA 4141
FLA 11.s
MIN. FEEDER '14
FEEDER USED:
LIGHTING 0 1.0 0
RECEP 4141 1.0 4141
RECEP 0 0
EQUIP.0 1.0 0
CTHER 0
rOTAL 414'l 4141
Panel Schedule.xls 10/6i/2006
'l0:00 AM
Page 1
PROJECT NO 20069026 DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARRIOTT
CALC. BY: RRS
6/30/200€
NOTES:
LIGF ITIN G PANE LS
LfGHTfNG PANEL: GBRE (TUB 2) VOLTAGE: 2o81120v 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
RATING: 200A MLO 84 POLES WPE: W GND. BAR
MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
0 0
LOAD LOAD
DESCRIPT.-IGHTINC RECEPT EOUIP.otc CKT #EQUIP.rtEUCT I -IGHTIN(DESCRIPT.
SALON E RECEPT 180 20t1 43 44 2011 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 20t1 45 46 20t1 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 2011 47 48 20t1 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 20t1 49 50 201'l 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 20t1 51 52 2011 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 20t1 53 54 2011 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 2011 55 56 20t1 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 2011 57 58 20t1 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 2011 4q 60 20t1 180 SALON E RECEPT
SALON E RECEPT 180 20t1 6l 62 20t1 360 AA/ CLOSET
SALON E RECEPT 180 20t1 63 o!+20t1 720 CEILING RECEP.
THEATBICAL RACK 180 201'l 65 oo 20t1 SPARE
IHEATRICAL RACK 180 20t1 67 68 20t1 SPARE
SPARE 2011 69 70 2011 SPARE
SPARE 20t1 71 72
73 74
75 76
77 78
79 80
81 82
83 u
2340 0 TOTAL IOTAL 2700 0
LOAD VA D.F.DEMAND
EMD so4o
SPARE O
TOTAL VA 5O4O
FLA 14.0
MIN. FEEDER 18
FEEDER USED:
LIGHTING 1.0 0
RECEP 5040 't.0 s040
RECEP 0 0
EQUIP.0 1.0 0
OTHER 0
0
TOTAL 5040 5040
Panel Schedule.xls '10/9/2006
1:41 PM
Page 1
PROJECT NO 20069026 DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARRIOTT
CALC. BY: RRS
6/30i200€
NOTES:
LIGI.ITIN(
LIGHTING PANEL: GBRF OUB 2) VOLTAGE: 21gfi2oV 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
RATING: 200A MLO 84 POLES TYPE: W GND. BAR
MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
0 0
LOAD LOAD
OESCRIPT..IGHTIN(RECEPT EOUIP.o/c CKT #ac EOUIP.RECEPT -IGHTIN(DESCRIPT.
SALON F RECEPT 180 20/,l 43 44 2011 180 SALON F RECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 20t1 45 46 2011 180 SALON F RECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 2011 47 48 20t1 180 SALON F RECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 2011 49 50 20t1 180 SALON F BECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 20t1 51 52 2011 180 SALON F RECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 2011 53 54 20t'l 180 SALON F RECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 2011 55 ctt 20t1 180 SALON F RECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 20t1 57 58 20t1 180 SALON F RECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 20t1 59 60 2011 180 SALON F RECEPT
SALON F RECEPT 180 20t1 61 62 2011 360 AA/ CLOSET
SALON F RECEPT 180 20t1 63 64 2011 720 CEILING RECEP.
SPARE 20t1 65 oo 2011 SPARE
SPARE 20t1 67 68 2011 SPARE
69 70
71 72
73 74
75 to
77 78
79 80
81 82
83 84
0 't 980 TOTAL rOTAL 0 2700 0
LOAD VA D.F.DEMAND
EMD 4680
SPARE O
TOTAL VA 4680
FLA i3.o
MIN. FEEDER 16
FEEDER USED:
LIGHTING 0 1.0 0
RECEP 4680 1.0 4680
RECEP 0 0.5 0
EQUIP.0 1.0 0
OTHER 0
0
TOTAL 4680 4680
Panel Schedule.xls 10/9/2006
1'.42 PM
Page 1
PROJECT NO 20069026 DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARBIOTT
CALC. BY: RRS
6/30/200€
NOTES:
LIGHTING PANEL: GBRJ VOLTAGE: 208fi20V 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
RATING: 100A MLO 30 POLES TYPE: W GND. BAR
MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
0 0
LOAD LOAD
DESCBIPT.LIGHTIN(RECEPT EQUIP.o/c CKT *o/c EOUIP.RECEPT -IGHTIN(DESCRIPT.
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 1 2 20t1 180 SALON J RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 3 4 2U1 180 SALON J HECEPT
POCKET BECEPTACLE 't80 20t1 6 zci1 't80 SALON J BECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 I 20/1 180 SALON J RECEPT
POCKET BECEPTACLE 180 20t1 o 10 20t1 180 SALON J RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 11 12 20t1 180 SALON J RECEPT
POCKET BECEPTACLE 180 20t1 la 14 20t1 180 SALON J RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 15 16 20t1 180 SALON RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 17 18 20t1 180 SALON RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 19 20 2U',l 180 SALON RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 20t1 21 22 20rl 180 SALON RECEPT
POCKET RECEPTACLE 180 2011 23 24 60/3 1 SALON RECEPT
SPARE 20t1 25 26
SPARE 20t1 27 28
SPARE 20t1 29 30 20t1 SPABE
2160 0 TOTAL rOTAL 0 1 961 0
LOAD VA D.F.DEMAND
EMD 4141
SPABE O
TOTALVA 4141
FLA 1t.s
MlN. FEEDER 14
FEEDER USED:
LIGHTING 0 1-0 0
RECEP 4141 1.0 4't 41
RECEP 0 u-c 0
EQUIP.0 1.0 0
OTHER 0
0
rOTAL 414'l 4141
Panel Schedule.xls 10/6/2006
10:07 AM
Page 1
PROJECT NO. 20069026 DATE:
PROJECT: VAIL MARFIOTT
CALC. BY: RRS
6/30/2006
NOTES:
LIGFITIN (
LIGHTING PANEL: PFRA (TUB 2) VOLTAGE: 2O8/120V 3 PHASE 4 WIRE
BATING: 200A MLO 84 POLES TYPE: W GND. BAR
MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTEO A.l.C. RATING: 10 KAIC
0 0
LOAD LOAD
DESCRIPT.-IGHTIN(RECEPT EOUIP.CKT #EQUIP.RECEPT -IGHTIN(DESCRIPT.
P.F. LOBBY 180 2011 43 44 2011 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. LOBBY 180 2011 45 46 20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
P,F. LOBBY 180 20t1 47 48 20/l 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. LOBBY 180 20t1 49 50 20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. LOBBY 180 2011 51 52 2011 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. LOBBY 180 20t1 53 54 2011 180 P.F. LOBBY
SPARE 20t1 55 3c)20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
P.F. LOBBY 180 201'l 57 58 20t1 180 P.F. LOBBY
SPARE 20rl 59 60 20t1 180 P.F.HALL
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 61 62 20t1 180 P.F. HALL
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 63 64 2011 180 P.F. HALL
P.F. HALL 180 20t1 oc oo 20t'l 180 P.F. HALL
P.F. HALL 180 20t'l 67 68 20t1 180 P.F. HALL
P.F. HALL 180 2011 AO 70 20t1 "t80 P.F. HALL
P,F. HALL 180 20t1 71 72 20t1 '180 P.F. HALL
P.F. LOBBY 180 2011 73 74 20t1 180 P. F. HALL
P.F. LOBBY 180 20t1 75 76
P.F. LOBBY 180 20t1 77 78
79 80
81 82
83 84
2880 0 TOTAL rOTAL 0 2880 n
LOAD VA D.F.DEMAND
EMD 5760
SPARE O
TOTAL VA 5760
FLA 16.0
MIN. FEEDER 20
FEEDER USED:
LIGHTING 1.0 0
RECEP 5760 1.0 5760
RECEP
EQUIP.1.0
OTHER 0
0
TOTAL 5760 5760
Panel Schedule.xls 10/6/2006
10:10 AM
Page 1
Vait Marriott Ballroom *frnn^,
Vail, Colorado AUTOMATIC FIRE
sEcTtoN 13930
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SECTION 13930
FIRE SPRINKLER
PART 1 GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS
A. Division 1 General Requirements of these specifications shall
in this section.
1.1
The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor, engineering,
drawings, etc. necessary for a complete fire protection system, with said systems
being made ready for operation in accordance with the requirements of the
authorities having jurisdiction. The purpose of the Owner furnished specifications
and drawings is to convey to the Contractor the scope of work required, all of
which the Contractor is responsible to furnish, install, adjust, and make operable.
The omission by the Owner of any necessary system component as required by
the authorities having jurisdiction, in the specifications and drawings shall not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing such necessity, without
additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall visit the site before submitting
his bid and shall examine all existing physical conditions which may be material
to the performance of his work. No extra payments will be allowed to the
Contractor as a result of extra work made necessary by his failure to do so. Any
case of error, omission, discrepancy or lack of clarity shall be promptly identified
to the Owner and Engineer for clarification prior to the bid due date.
The Contractor shall provide all devices and equipment required by these
specifications and drawings. The Contractor shall furnish and install additional
devices to meet future requirements that may be required prior to Fire Prevention
Bureau permit review of the fire protection systems. Under no circumstances will
the Contractor delete any equipment or devices without the written directive of
the Engineer.
1.2 PERFORMANCE GUIDELINES
Work Provided Under This Section
1. Complete automatic sprinkler system as outlined in these specifications,
including all labor, materials and shop drawings needed to provide an
operating system, and all of the following:
a. Control Valves
b. Drain and test valves.
c. Pipe and fittings.
d. Hangers and supports including earthquake protection.
B.
(-.
A.
SEC Project No. 2406047-000 13930-1 October 9, 2006
Vait Maniott Ballroom afrv"tio,
Vail, Colorado AUTOMATIC FIRE
sEcIoN 13930
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
f.
Sleeves including fire stopping and watertight caulking.
Ceiling and wall plates.
Signs.
Water flow alarms,
Supervisory devices.
Coordination with all other trades.
Shop drawings, hydraulic calculations, device manufacturer's
literature, and samples.
Site visit to determine existing conditions.
Contractor's Material and Test Certificates and as-built drawings.
Training and operating instructions.
Spare parts/sprinklers in cabinet with special wrenches.
All permits and fees for this work.
1.3 SYSTEM ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
9. Contractor:
Unless otherwise stated, materials, equipment or
submittals approved by the Engineer.
American National Standards Institute.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
American Society for Testing and Materials.
American Welding Society.
American Water Works Association.
Where used in connection with installation of
piping or conduit and accessories, shall mean
"hidden from sight" as in shafts, furred spaces, in
soffits or above suspended ceilings.
The company awarded the prime contract for this
work and any of its subcontractors, vendors,
suppliers or fabricators.
1.Approved:
ANSI:
Architect/
Engineer:
ASME
ASTM:
AWS:
AWWA:
Concealed:
2.
J.
4.
5.
7.
8.
SEC Project No. 2406047-000 13930-2 October 9, 2006
O sEctoN 13e30
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
Vail M arriott Ballroom *frrn^,
Vail, Colorado
10. DP: Dry pendent sprinkler.
11. EC: Extended coverage sprinkler.
12. ELO: Extra large orifice sprinkler.
13. Engineer: Schirmer Engineering Corporation (SEC).
14. ESFR: Early suppression, fast response sprinkler.
15 Exposed:
il1illflii"lx;Hg:LTrlil':::'3Hll"ilg"
16. FM: Factory Mutual.
17. FM Approved: Materials or equipment approved by Factory
Mutual and included in the most recent edition of
the FM Approval Guide.
18. Furnish: Supply materials.
19. gpm: Gallons per minute.
20. Install:
IrjS!;;ffi:lls,
mount and connect equipment
21. lRl: IndustrialRisk Insurers.
22. ISO: Insurance Services Office.
23. LDS: Large drop sprinkler.
24. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
25. Owner: Colorado Department of Corrections
26. PIV: Post indicating valve.
27. Provide: Furnish, install and connect.
28. psi: Pounds per square inch.
29. QR: Quick response sprinkler.
30. Remove: Remove material and equipment and restore
surface.
31. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
32. UL Listed: Materials or equipment listed by Underwriters
SEC Prolect No.2406047-000 13930-3 October 9, 2006
Vail Manioft Ballroom *t n^n
1.4
sEcTroN 13930
Vail, Colorado AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
Laboratories and included in the most recent
edition of the UL Fire Protection Equipment
Directory.
DESIGN CRITERIA/ SCOPE
A. Sprinkler system(s) shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.
1. Space contains an existing wet-pipe sprinkler system. Modify the system
as necessary to provide sprinkler coverage as shown in the contract
drawings. Existing control valves, flow-switches and tamper-switches are to
remain. Contractor shall provide a system to conform with the design
criteria stated below.
a. Design Pre-Function Lobby, janitors' closets, electrical room,
storage rooms, utility rooms to ordinary hazard group 2 occupancy
requirements. Design the remainder of the area of work to light
hazard occupancy requirements.
b. Light Hazard Occupancy requirements: .10gpm/1 ,500 sq. ft; Hose
stream 100gpm; Max sprinkler spacing 225 sq. ft.
c. Ordinary Hazard Occupancy requirements: .20gpm/1 ,500 sq. ft;
Hose stream 250gpm; Max sprinkler spacing '130 sq. ft.
d. Demand for hose station shall be added to system demand at point
of connection to standpipe.
e. Provide hydraulic calculations demonstrating compliance with the
above desion criteria.
B. Water Supply
1. The Sprinkler contractor shall provide a current flow tests at the source lo
determine the water available to the facility. Deduct 10psi static and 1Opsi
residual pressure noted in flow test and use this as the basis for the
hydraulic calculations.
APPLICABLE CODES. STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS
A. The design and installation shall be in conformance with all applicable local,
state, and national codes and standards.
B. Reference Codes & Standards: The following codes and standards are included
as part of this specification.
1. NFPASTANDARDS
a. NFPA 25 2003 - Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-
Based Fire Protection Systems.
1.5
SEC Project No. 2406047-000 13930-4 October 9, 2006
Vail Marriott Ballroom ^frrn^,
1.6
Vail, Colorado AUTOMATIC FIRE
sEcTtoN 13930
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
b. NFPA 13 2002 ed. - Installation of Sprinkler Systems
2. Factory Mutual Systems (FM) Publication:
a. Approval Guide.
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publication:
a. Fire Protection Equipment List (Annually with Quarterly
Supplements).
REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. All material, design, installation and other work shall conform to all applicable
regulatory agencies, including but not limited to:
1. State, local building codes and ordinances, and agencies,
2. Fire department and fire prevention bureau requirements, (Town of Vail)
B. Contractor shall include in the base bid all costs associated with complying with
the applicable regulatory agencies. Failure to specifically reference on these
plans and/or specifications any restrictions, materials and/or work required by the
regulatory agencies shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for fully
complying with the regulatory agencies without additional cost to the owner.
APPROVALS
A. Obtain approval of shop drawings from all applicable local, state regulatory
agencies, prior to fabrication and installation of materials.
B. Obtain approval of shop drawings from SCHIRMER ENGINEERING
CORPOMTION prior to fabrication and installation of materials.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit 7 prints of complete shop drawings, hydraulic calculations, and
manufacturer's data to the engineering consultant for all necessary reviews
prior to fabrication of materials.
2. Contractor shall submit complete system packages. Partial system
submittals will be rejected.
3. When the plans are rejected because of incomplete or incorrect
information, the Contractor shall be responsible for the Engineeis extra
review time and expenses beyond one re-submittal. Such extra fees shall
be paid by the Contractor directly to the engineer when the re-submittal is
made. The Contractor is not responsible for the engineer's review time for
1.7
'1.8
SEC Project No. 2406047-000 13930-5 October 9, 2006
Vait Marriott Ballroom nt "tio,Vail, Colorado
sEcTtoN 13930
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
the first submittal and first re-submittal, or for re-submittals required
because of project changes.
4. The contractor shall make arrangements with the engineer before any
second submittals to reimburse the engineer's extra review time.
5. The Engineer will return submittal sets back to the Contractor, who shall
then submit required prints to the AHJ for final review and approval.
6. Submit 1 set of shop drawings and manufacturer's data bearing the review
stamp of all applicable local, state, federal and insurance authorities to the
architecVowner.
7. Hydraulic calculations shall include a water supply graph and hydraulic
cover sheet. The cover sheet shall include the name and location of the
calculated area, ceiling height, occupancy, design criteria, sprinkler
spacing, system type, sprinkler make, model, size, K factor and
temperature rating, flow requirements, C factor used, water supply data
and source of information, and commodity storage class, height and
configuration. Hydraulic Calculations shall bear the stamp of a licensed
Professional Engineer P.E who gained licensure through testing in the fire
protection discipline.
8. Prepare shop drawings at minimum scale of 118" = 1'-0" for plans, and 112"
= 1'-0" for details. Show all piping, sprinklers, hangers, type of pipe, tube
connections, outlets, roof construction, and occupancy of each area,
including ceiling and roof heights as required by NFPA 13. When welding
is planned, shop drawings shall indicate the sections to be shop welded
and the type of welded fittings to be used. Shop drawings shall bear the
stamp of a licensed Professional Engineer P.E who gained licensure
through testing in the fire protection discipline.
9. Shop drawings shall include details of earthquake sway bracing.
Changes
1. Make no changes in installation from layout as shown on the approved
drawings unless change is specifically approved by the Engineer of
Record. This does not include minor revisions for the purpose of
coord ination.
2. Any pipe fabricated and/or installed before all approvals are obtained at the
Contractor's own expense and responsibility. Any changes made to the
approved drawings other than as stated above are at the Contractor's own
expense and responsibility.
Manufacturer's Data
1. Provide data from manufacturer on the following devices, including
installation, maintenance, and testing procedures, dimensions, wiring
diagrams, etc. Where any devices which are provided or furnished involve
B.
c.
SEC Project No. 2406047-000 13930-6 October 9, 2006
Vail Marrioft Ballroom nfrv"Aon O sEctoN 13e30
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMVail, Colorado
work by another contractor, submit additional data copies directly to that
Contractor.
a. Sprinklers and escutcheons.
b. Pipe, fittings and hangers.
c. Control valves.
d. All other system components.
D. As-Built Drawings
1. Maintain at the site an up-to-date marked set of as-built drawings which
shall be corrected and delivered to the Owner upon completion of work.
2. Upon completion, furnish the Owner with 2 sets of prints, and one set in
electronic AutoCAD 2004 "DWG" format of each reviewed shop drawing,
revised to show "as-built" conditions.
E. Final Inspection and Test
1. Upon completion of final inspections and tests, as required by appropriate
NFPA Standards and these specifications, submit documentation of all test
results and copies of the Standard Contractor's Material and Test
Certificates to the Architect and Owner.
1.9 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide spare sprinkler cabinets, complete with sprinklers of assorted
temperature ratings of the type necessary and in use throughout the installation
(provide for each facility). Each cabinet shall be equipped with quantity of spare
sprinklers as required by NFPA 13 and 1 special sprinklerwrench foreach type
of sprinkler installed.
1. Install sprinkler cabinet
2. Confer with the Owner representative for exact location of cabinet.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of one
year beginning with the date of final acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor
shall be responsible during the design, installation, testing and guarantee periods
for any damage caused by his (or his subcontractors') work, materials, or
equipment.
1.11 BASE BID.
A. Base Bid
SEC Proiect No. 2406047-000 13930-7 October 9. 2006
Vail Marriott Ballroom nf,cry"Uo,
Vail, Colorado
O sEctoN 13s30
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1. The base bid shall be in accordance with drawings and specifications.
Note: Drawings are conceptual only.
2. The Contractor shall indicate the number of Sorinklers included in the base
bid.
1.12 PRODUCT DELIVERY
Delivery of Materials: Delivery of all materials and equipment to the job site shall
be scheduled to assure compliance with the predetermined construction
schedules.
Storage of Materials, Equipment and Fixtures: Contractor shall be responsible
for storage of materials on job site, including furnishing of any storage facilities or
structures required.
Handling Materials and Equipment: Contractor shall be responsible for on-site
handling of materials and equipmenl.
1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor shall be fully experienced and licensed in all aspects of the fire
protection systems herein specified.
The Contractor shall provide a single person as a point of contact who is
responsible for issues of scheduling, coordination, and quality control. This
person should be a minimum of Nicet level lll in the design and installation of Fire
Sprinkler systems.
1.14 EMERGENCY SERVICE
A. The Contractor shall provide emergency repair service for the sprinkler/standpipe
system within four hours of a request for such service by the Owner during the
warranty period. This service shall be available on a 24-hour per day, seven-day
per week basis.
1.15 TRAINING AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. Operating Instructions:
1. At the completion of the work, provide a small scale plan of the building
indicating the localions of all control valves, low point drains, and
inspector's test valves. The plan shall be neatly drawn and color coded to
indicate the portion of the building protected by each system.
2. Furnish 2 copy(ies) of NFPA 25 and bound set(s) of printed operating and
maintenance instructions to the Owner, and adequately instruct the
Owner's maintenance personnel in proper operation and test procedures of
all fire protection components provided, furnished, or installed.
A.
B.
c.
A.
B.
SEC Project No. 2406047-000 13930-8 October 9, 2006
Vail Marriott Ballroom ntation
Vail, Colorado
O sECtoN 13e30
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
'1.16 PERMITS AND FEES
A. Pay for all permits, fees and charges required for this work.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 GENEML
A. All sprinkler system components shall be manufactured in the USA and shall be
UL listed andior FM approved. Components shall be used in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and its UL listing and/or FM approval.
B. The naming of manufacturers in the specifications shall not be construed as
eliminating the materials, products or services of other manufacturers and
suppliers providing approved equivalent items.
C. The substitutions of materials or products other than those named in the
specifications are subject to proper approval of the Owner granted in writing.
2.2 PIPE
A. Pipe shall be new, designed for 175psi working pressure, conforming to ASTM
specifications, and have the manufacturer's name and brand along with the
applicable ASTM standard marked on each length of pipe.
1. Steel: Steel piping shall be Black or Galvanized.
a. 1.112-inch pipe and smaller shall be black or galvanized Sch40 or
Eddythread steel and must comply with the specifications of the
American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM A 795 for black
pipe, and hot dipped zinc coated galvanized welded and seamless
steel pipe for fire protection use. Galvanized pipe shall be used
where exposed to atmosphere. Dimensions for all overhead pipe
must be in accordance with the American Standard for Wrought
Steel and Wrought lron Pipe ANSI 836.10-'1975 for pressure up to
175psi. Schedule 40 pipe is considered "standard wall" pipe. pipe
ends shall be threaded.
b. 2-inch pipe and larger shall be black or galvanized Sch10 pipe
conforming to ASTM A 53-80 specifications. Pipe ends shall be roll
grooved or welded in accordance with NFPA 13.
c. Pipe and preparation shall conform to the fltting manufacturer's
recommendations.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Changes of direction shall be accomplished by the use of fittings suitable for use
in sprinkler and standpipe systems and defined in NFPA 13. Fittings exposed to
outside atmosphere shall be galvanized.
SEC Project No. 2406047-000 13930-9 October 9. 2006
Vail Marriott Ballroom nfrvation
Vail, Colorado
o
C FIREAUTOMATI
sEcTtoN 13930
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1. SteelPipe:
a. Screwed fittings shall be cast ron, 125 pound class, black, and in
accordance with ANSI B 16.4 or malleable iron, 150 pound class,
black and in accordance with ANSI B 16.3. Bushings shall not be
used unless written approval is obtained from the Engineer of
Record.
b. Weld fittings shall be steel, standard weights, black, and in
accordance with ASME B 16.9, ASME B 16.25, ASME B 16.5,
ASME B 16.11 and ASTM A 234.
c. Grooved fittings and couplings shall be produced by the same
manufacturer.
d. Grooved couplings shall be dimensionally compatible with pipe.
e. Flanged fittings shall cast iron, short body, Class 125, black and in
accordance with ASME B 16.1. Gaskets shall be full-faced of 1/8-
inch minimum thickness red sheet rubber. Flanged bolts shall be
hexagon head machine bolts with heavy semi-finished hexagon
head nuts, cadmium plated, having dimensions in accordance with
ANSI B 18.2.
SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers in the area of work shall be new concealed style, standard coverage
sprinkler with a 5.6 K-factor.
B. Cover plates shall be custom colored by the factory to match ceiling color.
Coordinate with Architect for paint color (code).
C. Temperature ratings shall be based on ambient conditions anticipated and per
NFPA-13 standards.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Swivel rings and building attachments shall be listed/approved.
1. Trapeze/hanger component station module shall meet or exceed values
listed in NFPA 13 Tables 9.1.1.6.1(a) & 9.1.1. 6.1(b).
SLEEVES FOR WALUFLOOR PENETRATIONS
A. Sleeves through walls and floors shall be of a type that can be made watertight
and fire stopped.
1. Sleeve sizes shall be as required by NFPA '1 3. for Earthquake Protection.
2.4
2.5
2.6
SEC Project No. 2406047.000 13930-10 October 9. 2006
Vait Marriott Ballroom afrrnio,sEcTtoN 13930
Vail, Colorado AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SIGNS
A. Valve signs shall indicate purpose and system of each control, test, trim and
drain valve.
1. Hydraulic information sign shall meet requirements of NFPA 13.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENEML
A.Product Delivery
Delivery of Materials: Delivery of all materials and equipment to the job site
shall be scheduled to assure compliance with the predetermined
construction schedules.
Storage of Materials, Equipment and Fixtures: Contractor shall be
responsible for storage of materials on job site, including furnishing of any
storage facilities or structures required.
Handling Materials and Equipment: Contractor shall be responsible for on-
site handling of materials and equipment.
B.Clean-up
Maintain the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish
caused by this work.
At the completion of the work, removed all surplus materials, tools, etc.,
and leave the premises clean.
c.Leak Protection
Damage: Protect all unfinished work to prevent damage and furnish
protection of all sunounding areas where necessary.
Leak Damage: The Contractor shall be responsible during the installation
and testing periods of the fire protection system for any damage to the
work of others, to the building or its contents caused by leaks in any
equipment, by unplugged or disconnected pipes or fittings, or by overflow,
and shall pay for lhe necessary replacements or repairs to work of others
damaged by such leakage. Water shall not be introduced into the system
during conditions where there is danger of freezing.
Existing Operations:
1. Installation shall not interfere with Owner's use of existing facilities.
Existing fire protection systems shall not be shut-off or impaired without
providing 2 days notice to the Owner and the Owner's Insurance
2.7
PART 3
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
D.
SEC Project No. 2406047-000 13930-11 October 9. 2006
Vail Manioft Batlroom ntation
3.2
sEcTroN 13930
Vail, Colorado AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
Underwriter. Contractor is responsible for coordinating fire watch or other
requirements of the Fire Department during system impairments.
FABRICATION
A. Pipe Ends
1. Ream and remove burrs after cutting pipe. Sch40 and Eddythread pipe
ends shall be threaded.
2. Sch10 pipe ends shall be welded or roll grooved in accordance with the
fitting manufactures' recommendation.
3. Threads shall be in accordance with ASME 81.20.1 "Pipe Threads,
General Purpose (inch)." Each thread on light wall pipe shall be gauged
before fitting make-on.
B. Grooved Ends
1. Pipe minimum thickness, squareness and out-of roundness shall be in
accordance with the coupling manufacturers specifications.
2. Pipe surface shall be free of indentations, projections, or roll marks from
the end of the pipe to the groove.
3. Pipe of less than minimum wall thickness listed shall not be cut grooved.
C. Welding
1. No field welding of sprinkler/standpipe piping shall be permitted.
2. Feed mains and Cross mains may be shop welded using acceptable
welding fittings. Welding methods shall comply with all the requirements of
AWS 82.1, "specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and
Welder for Piping and Tubing."
3. Certified records shall be maintained upon the completion of each weld,
welder shall stamp an imprint of their identification into the side of the pipe
adjacent to the weld.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. A clean set of prints or shop drawings shall be maintained at the site and
marked up to show any changes.
2. Piping shall be installed above ceilings. Install piping in exposed areas as
high as possible using necessary fittings and auxiliary drains to maintain
maximum clear head room.
SEC Project No. 2406047-000 13930-12 October 9, 2006
Vail Marriott Ballroom a!frvation sEcTtoN 13930
Vail, Colorado AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
3. Complete installation and place in service during nonworking hours in all
areas where materials are stored or in place.
4. Coordinate with the general contractor to provide before owner's scheduled
moving of combustible contents into building.
5. Flushing connections shall be installed at ends of cross mains.
B. Joining Pipe
1. Steel Pipe
a. Apply tape or joint compound to male threads only.
b. Threaded close nipples shall not be used.
c. Grooved and plain end joints shall be made in accordance with the
fitting manufacturer recommendations.
C. Drain and Test Piping
1. Where drain and test piping is piped through wall to atmosphere, install a 4'
or greater length of pipe from valve outlet to inside of wall.
2. All sprinkler/standpipe piping, drain and test piping, fire department
connection piping, etc., exposed to weather shall be galvanized.
SPRINKLERS
A. General
1. Sprinklers below ceilings shall be Concealed style.
2. Locate sprinklers as shown on the contract drawings, deviations must be
approved by the Architect.
3. Pendent/concealed sprinklers shall be located within 1-inch of center of tile
4. Install sprinklers as required by NFPA 13 with regard to ducts, obstructions
and partitions.
VALVES
A. General
1. Valves shall be installed with sufficient clearance for operation, testing and
maintenance.
2. Where wafer bodied valves are used, they shall be installed so that the
discs do not interfere with other components.
B. Control valves shall be installed so that valve posilion indicator is visible.
3.4
3.5
SEC Project No. 2406047-000 13930-13 October 9. 2006
Vait Marriott Battroom n!frvation
J.b
Vail, Colorado AUTOMATIC FIRE
sEcTroN 13930
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
C. Drain, test, and trim valves.
1. Valves shall be installed no more than 7-feet O-inches above the finished
floor and be accessible.
HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND EARTHQUAKE BRACING
General
1. All piping must be substantially supported from building structure and only
approved types of hangers shall be used. Piping lines under ducts shall
not be supported from duct work, but shall be supported from building
structure with trapeze hangers where necessary or from steel angles
supporting duct work in accordance with NFPA 13.
2. All thread rods shall not be bent.
3. Hanger components shall be ferrous.
4. Aftach hanger to top chord of bar joists only.
5. Powder driven studs shall not be allowed
Feed and Cross Mains
1. Install at least one hanger per length of pipe up to 8-feet in length joined by
grooved couplings.
2. Use rigid grooved couplings where more than two couplings are used per
run.
Risers
1. In one story building, install riser clamp or hanger on horizontal connection
close to riser.
2. Where ceiling heights exceed 25{eet, install at least one lateral support per
each riser pipe section.
3. In multi-story buildings riser/standpipe shall be supported at lowest level
and alternate levels above using riser clamp.
4. Install rigid coupling in standpipe except in seismic areas.
5. Install one riser clamp below slab at each fifth level where riser/standpipe is
joined by flexible coupling.
Sleeves, Wall & Floor Penetrations
A. Install steel sleeves through masonry and concrete walls and floors.
B. Sleeves through fire rated assemblies shall be fire stopped.
B.
C.
3.7
SEC Proiect No. 2406047-000 13930-14 October 9, 2006
Vait Marriott Ballroom ntation
Vail, Colorado
C. Sleeves through floors shall be made water tight.
3.8 SIGNS
A. Valves
1. Secure to each valve with corrosion resistant wire or chain.
B. Hydraulic Design Information
1. Secure to each system riser with corrosion resistant fasteners.
3.9 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. Tesls
1. General system test shall be coordinated with the owner's representatives
for training and witnessed by the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction).
Problems noted during testing such as air or water leaks, difficulty in
operating valves, alarm failures, etc. shall be corrected before the
contractor leaves the job.
2. Hydrostatically test all piping, including fire department connections
between the check valve and connection, at 200psi for 2 hours. lf the
highest static pressure at the lowest point in the system exceeds 150psi,
the system shall be tested at 50psi more than the highest static pressure.
3. Flow Tests
a. Main drain shall be opened wide until pressure stabilizes then
slowly closed, noting and recording flowing (residual) and static
(non-flow) pressure.
b. Backflow oreventers shall be forward-flow tested.
4. Special system trip tests shall be in accordance with valve manufacturer
instructions. Test by operating detection system and manual release.
Drain system and restore to service.
B. Valve Operation
1. Operate each valve through its entire range. Adjust valve packing glands.
a. Hose valves shall be capped during the test.
2. Threads for hose valve/wall hydrant outlets and fire department inlets shall
be verified to conform to those used by the local fire department.
C. Water flow and supervisory devices
1. Coordinate testing of electric components with the alarm contractor.
O sEctoN 13e30
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SEC Project No.2406047-000 13930-15 October 9, 2006
a sEctoN'r3e3o
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
Vait Marriott Ballroom t#rvorn
Vail, Colorado
2. Each water flow device shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 by
opening the inspectors tesl or alarm test valve.
3. Each valve supervisory device shall be tested by operating the valve
wheel/crank.
4. Verify all signals have been noted by the fire alarm control panel and each
audible alarm device operates.
D. Contractor's material and test certificates shall be completed for each
systemisubsystem/floor and signed by the contractor and witnessed by the
owner's reoresentative/AH J.
E. Training
1. General - In addition to the tests required in Parts A through C and
witnessed by the owner's representative(s), conduct a two hour training
session to familiarize the representatives with all operating features of the
system, including control valve, drain and test valve locations and
operations.
2. Provide owner's representatives with:
a. A small scale plan of the system/building showing locations of
control, drain & test valves.
b. Component manufacturer's inspection and testing manuals.
c. Two copies of NFPA 25 "lnspection, Testing and Maintenance of
Water Based Fire Protection Systems."
3. Spare Parts
a. Provide spare sprinklers in accordance with NFPA-13, in a steel
cabinet complete with special sprinkler wrenches. Install cabinet as
directed bv owner.
END OF SECTION
SEC Project No.2406047-000 13930-16 October 9, 2006
Table of Contents
.,....Jt (;lt91r I ruri ............
DIVISION 15 . MECHANICAL
1 501 0......... General Mechanical Requirements ....................
1 5050......... Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
1 5080.........Mechanical Insulation ..................
1 581 5......... Metal Ducts
1 5820......... Duct Accessories
1 5855......... Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
1 5990......... Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16010.........Genera| Electrical Requirements.
16075......... Electrical ldentification ...............
1 6'100.........Wiring Methods..
1 6140.........Wiring Devices...
1 641 0......... Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers.........
1 6442.........Panelboards .......
16491 ......... Fuses .................
1 6500......... 1i9htin9................
1 6821 ......... Background Sound System
1 6850......... Television Equipment......
16851.........Video Display Syslems
1 6901 ......... Telecommunications Cabling....
7I
5
9
8
3
7
3
2
2
3
4
1
2
2
10
7
b
I
AE #2006 9026 15010-1 10/09/06
sEcTroN 15010
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
'1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the general mechanical requirements of these specifications and
shall apply to all phases of the work specified, shown on the drawings, or required to pro-
vide for complete installation of mechanical systems for this poject.
1.3 WARRANTIES
A. The Contractor shall warrant all materials, workmanship and equipment against defects
for a period of one year after the date of substrantial completion. Certain equipment shall
be wananted beginning at the time of final acceptance or for longer periods of time as
specified in those divisions of the Project Manual. The Contractor shall repair or replace,
at no additional cost to the Owner, any item which may become defective within the war-
rant period. Any manufacturers' warranties concerning any item installed will run to the
benefit of the Owner. The Contractor agrees not to void or impair, or to allow Sub-
Contractors to void or impair, any wananties regarding products or items installed as part
of this project. The repair of faulty workmanship shall be considered to be included in the
contract.
,1.4 ALTERNATES
A. Alternates, if required, shall be as described in the "Alternates" section of this Project
Manual, as described on the proposal form, or as shown on the drawings.
1.5 QUESTIONS OF INTERPRETATION
A. lf questions arise during the bidding pocess regarding the meaning of any portion of the
contract documents, the prospective bidder shall submit the questions to the Archi-
tecUEngineer for clarification. Any definitive interpretation or clarification of the contract
documents will be published by addenda, properly issued to each person holding docu-
ments, prior to the bid date. Verbal interpretation or explanation not issued in the form of
an addendum shall not be considered part of the bidding documents. When submifting
questions for clarification, adequate time for issuance and delivery of addenda must be
allowed.
B. The ArchitecVEngineer shall be the sole judge regarding interpretations of conflicts within
contract documents.
.1.6 CONTRACTDOCUMENTDISCREPANCIES
A. lf any ambiguities should appear in the contract documents, the Contractor shall request
clarification from the ArchitecUEngineer before proceeding with the work. lf the Contrac-
AE #2006 9026 15010-1 't0/09/06
tor fails to make such request, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failure to carry
out the work in a manner satisfactory to the ArchitecyEngineer. Should a conflict occur
within the contract documents, the Contractor is deemed to have estimated the more ex-
pensive way of doing the work unless a written clarification from the ArchitecVEngineer
was requested and obtained before submission of proposed methods or materials.
1.7 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall apply throughout the contract documents:
1. ArchitecUEngineer: Architect or Engineer2. Code: All applicable national, state and local codes3. Contractor: Any Contractor performing work required by the Contract Documents
4. Electrical: All electrical work required by the contract documents
5. Fumish: Supply and deliver to the site ready for installation
6. Indicated: Noted, scheduled orspecified7. Mechanical: All mechanical work required by the contract documents8. Provide: Furnish, install and connect, complete and ready for use9. Selected: Selected by the Architect or Engineer
1.8 SYMBOLS
A. ltems of equipment and materials are indicated on the drawings in accordance with the
symbols shown on the plans.
1.9 ABBREVIATIONS
A. The followlng abbreviations apply throughout the contract documents:
1. AMCA: Air Moving Council of America2. ANSI: American National Standards Institute3. ARI: American Refrigeration Institute4. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engi-
neers5. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers6. ASTM Specification: Standard speciftcations of the American Socie$ for Testing
Materials7. FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation8. lRl: lndustrial Risk lnsurers9. NEC: National Electrical Code, latest edition10. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association11. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association12. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association13. UL or Underwriters: Undenivriters Laboratories, Inc.14. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act
1.10 CODES
A. The work shall be performed by persons skilled in the trade involved and shall be done in
a manner consistent with normal industry standards. All work shall conform to all appli-
cable sections of currently adopted editions of the following codes, standards and specifi-
cations:
1. 2003 International Building Code (lBC)2. Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
AE #2006 9026 15010-2 10/09/06
1.11
3. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA), National Consensus Stan-
dards and Established Federal Standards4. National Electrical Code (NEC), 20025. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
6. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)7. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation or other recognized national laboratories
8. American Gas Association (AGA)
9. Underwriters'Laboratories,lnc.(UL)10. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
11. Applicable national, state and local codes12. 2003 International Plumbing Code (lPC)13. 2003 International Mechanical Code (lMC)
B. Where there is a conflict between the code and the contract documents, the code shall
have precedence only when it is more stringent than the contract documents. ltems that
are allowed by the code but are less stringent than those specified shall not be substi-
tuted.
PERMITS
A. The Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all requirements regarding all permits,
fees, etc., and shall mmply with them. All permits, licenses, inspections and arrange-
ments required for the work shalt be obtained by the Contractor at his expense- All utili-
ties shall be installed in accordance with the local rules and regulations and all charges
shall be paid by the Contractor.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
A. The Conlractor's options in selecting materials and equipment are limited by require-
ments of the contract documents and governing regulations. They are not controlled by
industry traditions or procedures experienced by the Contractor on previous construction
projects. Materials and equipment shall be provided in accordance with the following:
1. Primary Design Products: Primary design products are those products around
which the project was designed in terms of capacity, performance, physical size
and quality. Primary design products are indicated by use of a single manufac-
turer's name, model number or similar data on drawings or schedules or within
the specifications. The Contractor shall provide primary design products unless
substitutions are made in accordance with the following paragraphs.
2. Acceptable Equivalent Substitutions: Acceptable equivalent substitutions are
products of manuf,actures other than those listed for the primary design products.
Equivalent acceptable substitutions shall meet each of the following require-
ments:a. The product shall be manufactured by one of the acceptable manufac-
turers listed in the Project Manual, drawings or addenda.b. The product shall meet or exceed the requirements of the contract
documents in terms of quality, performance, suitability, appearance and
physical characteristics.c. The Contractor providing the substitution shall bear the total cost of all
changes due to substitutions. These costs may include additional com-
pensation to the ArchitecVEngineer for redesign and evaluation services,
increased cost of work by the Owner or other Contractors, and similar
considerations.3. Performance Requirements: Where the contract documents list performance re-
quirements or describe a product or assembly generically, provide products that
1.12
AE #2006 9026 15010-3 10/09/06
comply with the specific requirements indicated and that are recommended by
the manufiacturer for the respective application.4. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the specifications
require only compliance with an imposed standard, code or regulation, the Con-
tractor has the option of selecting a product that complies with specification re-
quirements, including the standards, codes and regulations.
B. Proposed substitutions will be judged on the basis of quality, performance, appearance
and on the governing space limitations. The reputation of the manufacturer, delivery time
requirements, and the availability of repair or replacement parts may also be considered.
C. The ArchitecUEngineer shall be the sole and finaljudge as to the suitability of substitution
items.
1.13 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples:
1. See Division 1 Section "Submittral Procedures". Section shall be adhered to if
more stringent than the following paragraphs.2. When required by other sections of this Project Manual, the Contractor shall
submit shop drawings, product data or samples to the ArchitecvEngineer for re-
view. Unrequired submittals will not be reviewed. A completed copy of the
transmittal form included with the Project Manual shall accompany each submit-
tal. Submittals shall be numbered consecutively. Unless othenrise noted, sub-
mit a minimum of six (6) copies of shop drawings and product data for review. A
minimum of four (4) copies will be retumed to the Contractor. Where samples
are required, submit one (1) sample of each required item.a. Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data spe-
cifically prepared for this project by the Contractor, or any manufacturer,
supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the work.b. Shop drawings shall be drawn to accurate scale and of adequate size to
illustrate required details. Maximum sheet size shall be 30 inches by 42
inches. For each shop drawing sheet larger than 11 inches by 17
inches, submit one drawing on reproducible media and one blue'line or
photocopied print. The ArchitecUEngineer's action shall be indicated on
the reproducible drawing and the drawing shall be returned to the Con-
tractor.c. Product data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts,
instruction brochures, diagrams and other information fumished by the
Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of
the work.d. Samples are physical examples fumished by the Contractor to illustrate
materials, equipment or workmanship and to establish the standards by
which the work will be performed.3. All submittals shall cleady indicate proposed items, capacities, characteristics
and details in conformance with contract documents. All equipment items shall
be marked with the same item number as used on drawings or schedules. Ca-
pacities, dimensions and special features required shall be certified by the manu-
facturer.4. Submittals shall indicate manufacturer's delivery time for the item after review by
the Architect/Engineer.5. The ArchitecvEngineer shall review or take other appropriate action upon the
Contractor's submittals such as shop drawings, product data and samples, but
only to determine conformance with the design concept of the work and the in-
formation given in the contract documents.
AE #2006 9026 15010-4 10/09/06
B.
6. The Conlractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the
requirements of the contract documents by the ArchitecVEngineer's review of
shop drawings, product data or samples. The Contractor shall not be relieved
from responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings, product data or
samples by the ArchitecVEngineer's review of those drawings.7. No portion of the work requiring submission of a shop drawing, product datia or
sample shall be commenced until the submittal has been reviewed by the Archi-
tecyEngineer. All such portions of the work shall be in accordance with reviewed
submittals.8. Provide submittals in accordance with the schedule at the end of this section.
See individual project manual sections for additional requirements.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. The Contractor shall prepare three (3) operation and maintenance manuals for
the equipment furnished. Manuals shall be submitted to the ArchitecVEngineer
for review and dishibution to the Owner not less than 30 days prior to substantial
completion of the poject. Manuals not meeting the following requirements may
be rejected by the ArchitecUEngineer.2. Each manual shall be assembled in a three-ring binderwith hard cover and plas-
tic finish. Binders shall not exceed a 3-inch thickness. Where more than one
binder is required, the manuals shall be separated into a logical grouping, i.e.,
"Mechanical", "Electrical", "Maintenance", "Operation", "Parts", Shop Drawings",
etc. Where loose-leaf inserts are used, the sheets shall be reinforced to prevent
tearing from continuous usage. Each binder shall have the following information
clearly printed on its front cover:a. Project name and address.b. Portion of the work covered by each volume (if more than one volume in
the set). Where more than one volume is required, label each volume as
"Volume _ of _",c. Name, address and telephone number of Contractor and all Sub-
Contractors including night or emergency number.3. Manual shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:a. A Complete Index. Contractor may submit the index to the Archi-
tecVEngineer for review prior to submittal of complete manuals if desired.b. Names, Addresses and Telephone Numbers. This list shall include the
manufacturer and local representative who stocks or furnishes repair
parts for all items of equipment and shall be typed on a single page in
front of the binder.c. Startup, Operation and Shutdown Procedures. Provide a written descrip-
tion of procedures for startup, operation and shutdown of each mechani-
cal item or system. This description shall include motors to start, valves
to open, etc., in proper sequence, and the location of switches, starters,
pushbuttons and valves. Description shall include item references or la-
bels used in the contract documents unless otheruise instructed in ad-
vance by the Owner.d. Seasonal Changeover Procedure. Provide a written description of the
procedure for necessary seasonable changeover from heating to cooling
and vice versa.e. Equipment Accessory Schedule. Upon completion of the work, the Con-
tractor shall furnish the Owner with a complete equipment accessory
schedule listing each piece of equipment and the related size, type,
number required and the manufacturer of all renewable items.f. Lubrication Schedule. Provide a chart listing each piece of equipment,
the proper type of oil or grease required, and recommended frequency of
lubrication.
AE #2006 9026 15010-5 '10/09/06
Manufacturer's Ooeration and Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists.
Emergency Procedures. Provide a written description of emergency op-
erating procedures or a list of service organizations (including addresses
and telephone numbers) capable of rendering emergency services to the
various parts of the system.
One copy of all shop drawings and product data, clearly marked for each
item furnished using the designation label specified or indicated on draw-
ings.
All manufacturers' warranty information.
Normal Maintenance Schedule. Include a listing of work to be performed
at various time intervals; i.e., 30, 90, 180 days and yearly.
Motor List. The list shall indicate motor location, equipment served (us-
ing labels indicated on drawings), horsepower, electrical characteristics,
motor type, and RPM. Motors less than 112 horsepower need not be in-
cluded.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Unless othenrise specified, all materials and equipment shall be new, unused and un-
damaged. Materials and equipment shall be the cunent and standard designs of manu-
facturers regularly engaged in their production.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A. Where materials and equipment are indicated as furnished by others and installed or
connected under this contract, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify installa-
tion details and reouirements.
QUANTITY OF SPECIFIED ITEMS REQUIRED
A. Wherever in these specifications an article, device or piece of equipment is refened to in
the singular number, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are shown
on the drawings or required to complete the installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used.
s.
h.
J.
k.
2.1
2.2
2.3
AE #2006 9026 1s010-6 10/09/06
MECHANICAL SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION 15010
SECTION
NUMEER SECTION NAME
SHOP
DRAWINGS
PRODUCT
DATA SAMPLES WARRANTY OTHER
15010 General MEchanical Requirements
15050 Basic Mechanical Meterials and Methods
15080 Mechanical lnsulaton
15815 Metal Ducb
15820 Duct Accessories
't 585s Difrrsers, Registers, and Grill€s
15990 Testing, AdJusting, and Balanclng
AE #2006 9026 15010-7 10/09/06
sEcTroN 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to comple-
ment other Division 15 Sections.
1. Delivery and storage of materials.2. Cooperation with other contractors.3. Coordination of work.4. Incidental work.5. Electrical wiring,6. Laying outofwork.7. Data and measurements.8. Position of outlets.9. Protection of apparatus.10. Access to equipment.
11 . Examination of premises.12. Roadways, curbs and walks.13. Work in existing buildings.14. Firestopping penetrations.15. Test reoorts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished oc-
cupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms-
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical con-
tact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafis.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather con-
ditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient tem-
peratures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styreneplastic.2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
AE #2006 9026 15050-1 10/09/06
3. NP: Nylon plastic.
4. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.2. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Transitionfittings.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Mechanical sleeve seals.4. Escutcheons.5. Access doors.6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and instiallation for metal and wood supports and an-
chorage for mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.
1.5 OUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section lX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping".2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding proc-
esses involved and that certification is current.
B. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical char-
acteristics may be fumished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing
and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately
modified. lf minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply
with reouirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through ship-
ping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt,
debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bend-
ing.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during pro-
gress of construction to allow for mechanical installations.
AE #2006 9026 15050-2 10/09/06
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring ac-
cess that are concealed behind finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ELECTRICAL WIRE
A. All wiring materials covered by this section shall be in accordance with the latest revision
of the National Electrical Code and applicable local codes and shall carry the UL label
where applicable. All wiring running exposed in return air plenums shall be plenum-rated
cable for fire and smoke spread.
ACCESS DOORS
A. Prime coated 14 gauge steel, flush, with screwdriver operated cam lock, frame to ac-
commodate construction type; size as indicated on plans or in this specification. Milcor
style M or DW, or equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete mechanical system shall be done by
qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so
as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Mechanical Contractor shall check all
areas and surfaces where mechanical equipment or materials are to be installed and re-
port any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work signifies
the Contractor's acceptance of the conditions as fit and proper for the execution of the
mechanical work.
B. Equipment and systems shall be installed in accordance with manufacture/s instructions,
requirements or recommendations.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. Each Contractor shall make provisions for the delivery and safe storage of materials and
shall make the required arrangements with other Contractors for the introduction inio the
building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Materials shall be de-
livered at such stages of the work as will expedite the work as a whole and shall be
marked and stored in such a way as to be easily checked and inspected.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for adequately protecting all supplies and equipment
during cold weather. All items subject to cold weather damage shall be protected by
covering, insulating or storing in a heated space,
COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTMCTORS
A. Perform the mechanical work in conformance with the construction called for by other
trades and afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work.
2.1
2.2
5.t
3.3
AE #2006 9026 15050-3 10/09/06
3.4
Properly connect and coordinate the mechanical work with the work of other contractors
at such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with their work.
B. Examine the contract documents for the General, Mechanical and Electrical work and the
work of other trades. Coordinate mechanical work accordingly.
C. Promptly report to the ArchitecUEngineer any delay or difficulties encountered in the in-
stallation of the mechanical work which might prevent prompt and proper installation of
work required from other trades.
D. Systems Test and Balance Contractors or personnel shall coordinate their work with the
contractors who installed the systems being tested or balanced. The Temperature Con-
trol Contractor or personnel shall be present during systems test and balance.
COORDINATION OF WORK
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall plan all work so it proceeds with a minimum of interfer-
ence with other trades. lt shall also be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to
inform the General Contractor of all openings required in the building construction for the
installation of the mechanical work. The Mechanical Contractor shall cooperate with all
other contractors in furnishing material and information, in proper sequence, for the cor-
rect location of all sleeves, inserts, foundations, wiring, etc. Provisions shall be made for
all special frames, openings and sleeves as required.
B. The Mechanical Contractor shall pay for extra cutting and patching made necessary by
his failure to properly direct such work at the correct time.
ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. All wiring and conduit shall be run parallel to, or at right angles to, the building structure
and shall be concealed in finished soaces.
B. All electric wiring shall be done in accordance with the National Electrical code. All line
voltage and low voltage wire shall be installed in flexible conduit or electrical metallic tub-
ing. Flexible metal conduit shall not exceed 6 feet in length. Conduit may be run ex-
posed in mechanical rooms or in areas where other piping is exposed.
C. Low voltage wiring in equipment rooms or concealed in walls shall be in one of the metial
raceways mentioned above. Final connection shall be made with exposed wiring which
shall be protected by a suitable protective grommet and the end of the metal container
shall be securely fastened. Jacketed harnesses may be used where a number of wires
are run together.
LAYING OUTWORK
The Contractor shall carefully lay out all work in advance of installation using data and
measurements from the site, the appropriate architectural and structural drawings, and
shop drawings. Equipment layout and all system layouts shall confirm adequate clear-
ances for installation, operation, maintenance and code required clearances from the
structure or other equipment and systems. The layout shall not cause problems of opera-
tion, maintenance or clearance for items installed by other crntractors.
Prior to installation of any work, make certain the location does not conflict with other
items in or near the same location. lf the layouts so prepared indicate that the required
3.5
3.6
A.
B.
AE #2006 9026 15050-4 10/09/06
3.7
3.8
conditions Grnnot be met in the space provided, the Contractor shall so inform the Archi-
tecUEngineer prior to installation and shall request clariflcation.
C. Failure to properly coordinate and lay out the work will require correction by the Contrac-
tors at their own expense.
DATA AND MEASUREMENTS
A- The data given herein and on the drawings is as accurate as could be secured; absolute
accuracy is not guaranteed. The Contractors shall obtain exact locations, measure-
ments, levels, etc., at the site and shall adapt their work to actual conditions. The Con-
tractor shall examine the General Construction, Mechanical, Electrical, and other appli-
cable drawings and the Specifications. Plans and specifications are available for exami-
nation at the office of the ArchitecUEngineer. Only Architectural drawings, Structural
drawings, and site measurements may be utilized in calculations. Mechanical and Elec-
trical drawings are diagrammatic or schematic.
POSITION OF DEVICES
A. Locate devices mounted on finished surfaces with regard to paneling, furring, trim, etc.
Where several devices occur in a room, they shall be symmetrically arranged as re-
viewed by the ArchitecVEngineer. Devices improperly located or installed shall be re-
paired, replaced or relocated at the Contractor's expense. Devices shall be set plumb or
horizontal and shall extend to the finished surface of the wall, ceiling or floor without pro-
jecting beyond the surface.
B. Devices shown on wood trim, cases or other fixtures shall be installed symmetrically and,
where necessary, shall be set with the long dimension of the plate horizontal.
C. All Contractors shall coordinate their respective devices so as not to destroy the aesthetic
effect of the surface in which the devices are mounted. Coordinate the locations of all
mechanical items with work furnished by other trades to avoid interference. lf the re-
quired coordination is not done, the outlets or devices shall be removed and relocated if
so directed by the ArchitecUEngineer and the damaged surfaces repaired at the Contrac-
tor's expense.
D. Devices shall be installed at the height shown below unless othenrvise noted. All heights
of devices are measured from finished floor to centerline of device. Heights may be ad-
justed to correspond to nearest masonry course or as necessary to clear wall-mounted
cabinets, fin tube convectors, unit heaters, etc.
1. Temperature control panels
2. Thermostats
60 inches
48 inches
PROTECTION OF APPARATUS
A. Take such precautions as necessary to properly protect all apparatus, fixtures, appli-
ances, material, equipment and installations from damage of any kind. Failure to provide
such protection to the satisfaction of the ArchitecUEngineer shall be sufficient cause for
the rejection of any particular piece(s) of material, apparatus, equipment, etc., concerned.
ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT
3.9
3.10
AE #2006 9026 15050-5 10/09/06
All motors, terminal boxes, valves, control devices, specialties, etc., shall be located to
provide for easy access for operation, repair and maintenance; if concealed, access
doors shall be orovided.
Access doors (AD) required for access to equipment requiring inspection or service shall
be provided. This Contractor shall provide all access doors not already fumished by
other contEctors but which are required for access to mechanical equipment. Doors
shall be '12 inches by 12 inches unless shown otherwise. Person access doors shall be
18 inches by 18 inches minimum.
3.11 EMMINATION OF PREMISES
A. The Contractor shall examine the oremises and all conditions thereon and/or therein.
The bid proposal shall take into consideration all such conditions which may affect the
work under this contract.
3,12 ROADWAYS, CURBS AND WALKS
A. The Contractor shall use every possible precaution to prevent injuries to roadways, curbs
and walks on or adjacent to the site of the work. Any damage shall be repaired at the
Contractor's own expense. This shall also include damage necessary for installation of
the mechanical work.
3 13 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS
F.
General: All work in the existing building, indicated on the drawings or specified herein,
shall be executed with a minimum amount of interference with the normal activities of the
occupants of the building. All work shall be scheduled in advance with the Owner and
shall not proceed without the Owner's written approvat.
Utilities: Utilities shall not be interrupted without the Owner's prior wriften approval re-
garding the time and duration of such interruptions. Utilities to existing facilities shall not
be disconnected until new or temporary facilities are installed except for short periods of
inlerruption which are necessary for the performance of the new work and which are ap-
proved by the Owner. Storm water may be temporarily diverted to surface drainage pro-
vided such drainage is arranged to prevent flooding of structures, basements, and exca-
vations for construction.
Fire Alarm System: The existing fire alarm system shall remain functional throughout
construction. As a minimum, the existing degree of protection shall be maintained for all
areas. All required outages shall be coordinated with the Owner and the Fire Marshal.
Welding: The Owner shall be notified before starting welding or cutting. Fire extinguish-
ers shall be immediately accessible when welding or cutting with an open flame or arc.
Welding or cutting with an open flame or arc shall be stopped not less than one hour be-
fore leaving the premises.
Noisy Operations: Noisy operations such as those involving use of air hammers, etc., in
demolition, or cutting of openings shall be scheduled with the Owner.
Occupancy: The Owner will continue to occupy the building and carry on normal activity.
Each Contractor shall protect the occupied areas from dust, smoke, etc., by a method re-
viewed by the ArchitecUEngineer.
B.
A.
B.
c.
D.
E.
AE #2006 9026 15050€10/09/06
3.14
G. Owner's Right to Direct Work: The Owner shall have the right to direct the places of be-
ginning work, its prosecution, and the manner in which all work under this contract is to
be conducted, insofrar as may be necessary to secure the safe and proper progress and
quality of the work.
H. Cutting and Patching: Each Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and patching
required for the work. Patching shall be done by craftspersons skilled in the trade in-
volved and shall be prepared to receive paint. Openings through floors may be drilled up
to 1 inch but shall be core drilled over 1 inch. Whenever the building surfiaces (walls,
floors, etc.) and openings are modified, removed and/or replaced to accommodate the
new work or to introduce into or remove items from the building, such surfaces or open-
ings shall be carefully reinstialled in conformance with the applicable code to protect the
integrity of the building.
l. Existing Piping, Ductwork or Mechanical Equipment: lf any existing piping, ductwork or
mechanical equipment is encountered which would interfere with the proper installation of
new work, it shall be removed or relocated as required or as directed by the Archi-
tecVEngineer. Where existing work is to be modified, it shall be done in conformance
with these specifications. Materials used shall be the same as for new work unless oth-
erwise soecified.
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components in-
dicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and
plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equip-
ment.6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and re-
move equipment and deliver to Owner.
B. lf pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal ca-
pacity and quality.
3.15 FINISHEDSURFACESPENETRATIONS
All piping and ductwork penetrations of flnished surfaces shall have escutcheons and/or
closure plates.
Openings shall be cut only as large as required for the installation, sleeves and/or frames
installed flush with finished surfaces and grouted in place.
A.
B.
AE #2006 9026 15050-7 10/09/06
C. Surfaces around openings shall be left smooth and finished to match surrounding sur-
face.
D. Duct frames and pipe sleeves through floors in concealed locations and in unfinished
spaces such as mechanical rooms, etc., shall extend 2 inches above finished floor level
and shall be caulked watertight. All other sleeves shall extend approximately 114 inch
above finished floor but shall allow placement of escutcheons.
3.16 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RATED WALL / FLOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. Contractors shall provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to
accommodate their work through penetrating items. All voids between sleeve or core-
drilled hole and pipe passing through shall be firestopped to meet the requirements of
ASTM E814. Install all materials complete, attached securely and permanently in place
in accordance with manufacturers' printed directions.
END OF SECTION 15050
AE #2006 9026 15050-8 10/09/06
sEcTloN 1s080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 . GENERAL
1,1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for duct and equipment including the follow-
ing:
1 . Insulation Materials:a. Mineral fiber.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to prod uct selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers soecified.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall
be applied.
B. Products shall not contiain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content
of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. lnsulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type ll and ASTM C 1290, Type lll with factory-
applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products:a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; DuctWrap.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
AE #2006 9026 15080-1 10/09/06
e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
2,3 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive cov-
ered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type l.2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type ll.
2.4 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhe-
sive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic ad-
hesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed.
1. Width: 2 inches.2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 5 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact
with stainless-steel surfiaces. use demineralized water.
AE #2006 9026 15080-2 10/09/06
3.2 COMMONINSTALLATIONREOUIREMENTS
A. lnsulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and
the requirements of the specifications.
B. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even sur-
faces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping in-
cluding fittings, valves, and specialties.
C. Install insulation with tightly butted joinb free of voids and gaps. Vapor barriers shall be
continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-banier system.
D. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insula-
tion system schedules.
E. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. In-
stall accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in ei-
ther wet or dry state.
F. lnstall insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
G. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
H. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and special-
ties.
l. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
J. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufiacturer.
K. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetra-
tions in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-banier
mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of aftachment to
structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier
mastic.3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insula-
tion to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by in-
sulation material manufacturer.4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,
support, and shield,
M. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate
and wet and dry film thicknesses.
N. lnstall insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
AE #2006 9026 15080-3 10/09/06
1 . Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both
edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-112 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-
sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches
o.c.a- For below ambienl services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manu-
facturer to maintain vaoor seal.5. Where vapor baniers are indicated, apply vapor-banier mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
O. Gut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its
nominal thickness.
P. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and
cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged ar-
eas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal
patches similar to butt joints.
R. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-controldevices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Narneplates and data plates.
3.3 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE. GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. lndoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.3. Indoor. concealed return located in nonconditioned space.4. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.
B. ltems Not Insulated:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHME/IESNA 90.1.2. Factory-insulatedflexibleducts.3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.4. Flexible connectors.5. Vibration-control devices.6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.4 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed and Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket,
1-112 inches thick and 1.0-lb/cu. ft. nominal densitv.
AE #2006 9026 15080-4 10/09/06
B. Conealed and Exposed, Retum-Air Duct and Plenum Insuhtion: Mineral-ftber blanket,
'l-1f2 inches thick and 1.O-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Concealed and Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket,
'1-1l2 inches thick and 1.O-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
END OF SECTION .t5O8O
AE #2006 9026 15080-5 10/09/06
sEcTtoN 15815
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 . GENERAL
1,1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the
following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.2. Single-wall, round spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.3. Duct liner.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM
C168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg
F or Wm x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or
W.
1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.25 or 0.037,
B. Pressure - Velocity Classification for Ductwork: As defined by SMACNA Duct Construc-
tion Standards - Metal and Flexible (latest edition), and applicable codes. Pressure clas-
sification for th is specification:
1. Low Pressure: Maximum 2500 FPM velocity; maximum 2.0 inches WG positive
or -2.0 inches WG negative static pressure class.2. Medium Pressure: Maximum 4000 FPM velocity; maximum 4 inches WG posi-
tive or -3.0 inches WG or greater negative static pressure class.
C. Gauge:
1. Steel Sheet U.S. Standard gauge.2. Aluminum Sheet: Brown & Sharoe schedule.3. Steel Wire: Washburn & Moen gauge.
AE #2006 9026 1581 5-1 10/09/06
D. Concealed Insulated Surfaces: Piping, ductwork and equipment located in walls, parti-
tions, floors, chases, shafts, alleyways, and above ceilings.
E. Exposed Insulated Surfaces: Piping, ductwork and equipment located in mechanical
rooms, tunnels and rooms without suspended ceilings.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving
and -distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or con-
figuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by ArchitecUEngineer.
Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed
layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to prod uct selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for ac-
ceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless other-
wise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains, d iscolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces
exposed to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 908 and with NAIMA AH124.
1. Manufacturers:a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.b. Johns Manville Intemational, Inc.c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.d. Owens Corning.2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to pre-
vent erosion of glass fibers.a. Thickness: as indicated.
AE #2006 9026 15815-2 10/09/06
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at75 deg F mean temperature.c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 908 and with
ASTM C 916.e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attach-
ment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without
damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and
without causing leakage in duct.1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb-tensile, dead-load
test perpendicular to duct wall.2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and
without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.
3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-
hazard classification of duct liner system.
2,4 SEALANT MATERhLS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of ad-
hesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips
and mastics.
B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound
and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, du-
rable, airtight seal.
D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light
when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, po-
lymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying
with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2,5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attiachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate con-
cretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-
aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods
or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer afier installa-
tion.
AE #2006 9026 1581 5-3 10/09/06
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Stan-
dards-Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod
diameters.3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces
painted with zinc-chromate primer.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metial screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; com-
patible with duct materials.
2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other conshuction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and
rigidity class required for pressure class.2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not excced deflection limits according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible."
B. Prefabricated Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using
manufacture/s guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and
joint reinforcement.
1. Manufacturers:a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.b. Nexus lnc.c. Ward Industries. Inc.
C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Stan-
dards-Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Manufacturers:a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.b. Lockformer.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and
larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area
unless ducts are lined.
2,7 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Lined ducts shall be fabricated to provide the net inside dimensions shown.
B. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers
of duct liner is prohibited.
C. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metial
nosing.
D. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
AE #2006 9026 1581 5-4 10/09/06
E. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-
edge overlapping.
F. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints neces-
sary.
G. Apply adhesive coating on all longitudinal seams.
H. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceed-
ing 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceed-
ing '18 inches longitudinally.
l. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that
have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharges.2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than
2500 fpm (12.7 mls) orwhere indicated.
J. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, tuming
vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other
buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts,
screws, rivets, or welds.
2.8 ROUND DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION
A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B. Round, Low Pressure: Longitudinal seams shall be spiral lock or button punch snap lock.
Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Con-
struction Standards-Metal and Flexible".
C. Duct Joints:
1. Ducts up to 20 lnches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed
before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
D. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses speci-
fied for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
E. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no ex-
cess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
F. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius
of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-112 times duct diameter. Unless el-
bow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible,"
unless otherwise indicated.
AE #2006 9026 15815-5 10/09/06
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness
for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness
for pressure classes from 2- to 1O-inch wg:a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION
A. Field measure to determine exact conditions.
B. Coordinate routing with all other trades to establish space requirements for each.
C. Determine that equipment and ductwork will fit available space.
3.2 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the
following:
1. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg.2. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.
3.3 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA'S 'HVAC Duct Construction Stan-
dards-Metal and Flexible", unless otherwise indicated.
B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indi-
cate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
C. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indi-
cated.
D. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings.
E. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
F. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and con-
nections.
G. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Se-
cure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a
minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
H. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpen-
dicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
l. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
AE #2006 9026 15815€10/09/06
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid parti-
tions, unless specifically indicated.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting lay-
outs, and similar finished work.
Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connections before insertion, and
afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer
vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between constructaon opening
and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct.
Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1l2 inches.
Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exte-
rior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire
and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestop-
ping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Me-
chanical Materials and Methods".
Verify location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Refer to re-
flected ceiling plans, finish schedule, material finish speciflcation, and shop drawings.
Coordinate routing with all other trades to establish space requirements for each.
Contractor may vary route and shape of ductwork and make offsets during progress of
work if required to meet structural or other interferences, Where such changes impair the
system performance, the changes will be corrected at Contractor's expense.
All ductwork shall be substantially and neatly supported on galvanized steel straps or an-
gles riveted or bolted to duct flanges and properly anchored to the construction so that
horizontal ducts are without sag or sway, vertical ducts are without buckle, and all ducts
are free from the possibility of deformation, collapse or vibration. Supports in corrosive
environments shall be stiainless steel except aluminum ductwork shall have aluminum
supports.
Openings required for ductwork through structural elements in new construction shall be
coordinated with the General Contractor. Shop drawings locating such openings shall be
prepared in ample time to meet the construction schedule.
Prevent passage of air around dampers with felt, rubber, neoprene gaskets, or other ap-
proved safing material.
Provide openings in ductwork to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide
pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal cap with spring device or
screw to prevent air leakage.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and main-
tenance activities.
P.
o.
s.
T.
U.
W.
X.
AE #2006 9026 15815-7 10/09/06
Y. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. Keep openings
covered until ready for continuing duct run or final connections.
Z. Paint ductwork visible behind wall-mounted air outlets and inlets matte black.
AA. HVAC Duct, Fittings, and Connections:
1. Branch ducts to air devices shall be bell-mouth, conical or45 degrees to round
boot type fitting as a basis. Straight trap-ins, splifter dampers, and air extractors
shall not be used. Branch ducts shall not be located opposite each other.2. Elbows, round and rectangular, shall be 1.5 diameter minimum centerline radius.
Mitered rectiangular elbows with turning vanes with trailing edge are acceptable
where required.3. Transitions shall be designed with an angle of convergence not exceeding 30
degrees or divergence not exceeding '15 degrees.4. The use of cushion heads at the end of duct run is not allowed.5. Duct connections to fans/air-handling units shall be designed for proper entering
and leaving conditions at the fan to avoid any adverse system effect fan losses.
BB. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes I inches and smaller
and install with crimp in direction of air flow.
CC. Provide closure flanges around exposed ductwork at wall and ceiling penetrations, 1-114
inches wide minimum.
DD. Provide light baffle plate above all ceiling-mounted plenum return air grilles. Plate to be 6
inches larger than the grille on all sides and shall be supported 6 inches above grille.
Paint underside matte black.
EE. Provide flexible connect between ductwork and all moving equipment.
FF. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.
Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction".
GG. Incidentral work:
1. The following incidental work shall be furnished by the Contractor under the su-
pervision of the Temperature Control Contractor:a. The Air Distribution Contractor shall install all automatic dampers fur-
nished by the Temperature Control Contractor.b. The Air Distribution Contractor shall provide necessary blank-off plates
(safing) required to install dampers that are smaller than duct size,c. The Electrical Contractor shall provide power wiring to the variable fre-
quency drives.d. The Air Distribution Contractor shall assemble multiple section automatic
dampers, furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor, with required
interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through
duct for extemal mounting of damper actuators.e. The Air Distribution Contractor shall provide necessary sheet metal baffle
plates to eliminate stratification while providing air volumes specified.
Locate baffles by experimentation and affix and seal permanently in
place only after stratification has been eliminated.f. The Air Distribution Contractor shall provide access doors or other ap-
proved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment.
AE #2006 9026 15815-8 10/09/06
3.4 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and
as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible".
B. Ducts shall be sealed as follows:
1. Low Pressure Ductwork: SMACNA Seal Class "C"
2. Medium Pressure Ductwork: SMACNA Seal Class "B"
C. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied,
3.5 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
SMACNAs "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible."
B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each
branch intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
D. lnstall upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof{est) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate con-
cretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Ac-
cessories."
B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible".
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.
END OF SECTION 15815
AE #2006 9026 15815-9 10/09/06
sEcTloN 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 .GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
,1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Volume damDers.2. Fire dampers.3. Smoke dampers.4. Combination fire and smoke damoers.5. Turning vanes.6. Duct-mounting access doors.7. Flexibleconnectors.8. Flexible ducts.9. Duct accessory hardware.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Volume dampers.2. Fire dampers.3. Smoke damoers.4. Combination fire and smoke damDers.5. Turning vanes.6. Duct-mounting access doors.7. Flexibleconnectors.8. Flexible ducts.9. Duct accessory hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
1. Special fiftings.2. Manual-volumedamperinstallations.3. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper installa-
tions, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.
AA #2006 9026 15820-1 07t31tffi
1,4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "lnstallation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "lnstrallation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Compliance with ASHRAE Handbooks.
C. Compliance with SMACNA Design Manuals.
D. Compliance with International Building Code (lBC).
.1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Fumish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Materials shall be delivered to the site in original factory packaging, labeled with the
manufacturer's identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers soecified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for ac-
ceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless other-
wise indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/4 653M and
having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces
exposed to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel
ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
AA #2006 9026 't5820-2 07t31t06
1. Air Balance, Inc.2. American Warming and Ventilating.3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.4. METALAIRE, Inc.5. Nailor lndustries Inc.6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.7. Ruskin Company.8. Vent Products Company, Inc.9. Young Regulator Co.
B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a
fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal
duct consistent with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classes of 3-lnch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts
with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating
shaft.
C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design,
stiandard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontial or ver-
tical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Galvanized sheet steel channels. minimum of 0.064 inch thick,
with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attach-
ing to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch{hick, galvanized sheet steel.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze or molded synthetic.
D. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade de-
sign as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for
horizontal or vertical applications.
E. Jackshaft: 1-inch-diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly
mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each
damper in multiple-damper assembly.
F. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch
thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit
damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.Manufacturers:
2.
4.
2.4
I
2.
J.
4.
E
b.
7.
Air Balance, Inc.
Greenheck.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries lnc.
Pottorff.
Prefco Products, Inc.
M #2006 9026 15820-3 07t31t06
8. Ruskin Company.9. Safe-Air/Dowco.10. United Air Products.11. Vent Products Company, Inc.12. Ward Industries. Inc.
B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555.
C. Fire Rating: 1-112 hours.
D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream, fabricated with roll-formed, 0.064-
inch thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking comers.
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, breakaway type, galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: As required by UL. Minimum length, 16 inches.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.
F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as required.
G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of in-
terlocking blades, use full-length, 0.028-inch{hick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
H. Horizontal Dampers: lnclude blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
l. Fusible Links: Replaceable,2l2 deg F rated.
2.5 SMOKE COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance. Inc.2. Greenheck.3. Nailor Industries lnc.4. Penn Ventilation Company, lnc.5. Ruskin Company.
B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555S Class ll leakage. Combination fire
and smoke dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555 for 1-112-hour rating. Maxi-
mum pressure drop across a 24-inch by 24-inch damper, full open, flowing 5000 cfm,
shall be 0.06-inch WG.
C. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 212 deg F rated.
D. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch{hick, galvanized sheet steel, plated steel shaft with
bronze bearings, blade and jamb seals.
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-instralled, breakaway type, galvanized sheet steel; thickness
as required by UL. Minimum length, 16 inches.
F. Damper Motors: Modulating and tweposition action.
AA #2006 9026 15820-.4 07/31/06
1. Actuator shall have microprocessor-based motor controller providing electronic
cutoff at full-open position so that no noise is generated while holding open, shall
be incapable of burning out if stalled before fulLopen position, and shall be direct
coupled over shaft. Actuators shall operate in 15 seconds or less to drive or
spring open or closed.2. All gears and housing shall be steel.3. Actuators shall be UL listed and manufactured under ISO 9001 quality control
and shall have UL 5555 listing by damper manufacturer for 250 deg F.4. Electrical Connection: 115V, single phase, 60 Hz.5. Actuators shall be similar or equal to Belimo.
2.6 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metial and
Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1l2-inch-wide, single-vane, curved blades of
galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2
inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. Provide with 1-inch
trailing edge.
1. Manufacturers:a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.b. METALAIRE, Inc.c. Ward Industries, Inc.
2.7 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal
with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel
where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
1. Manufacturers:a. American Warming and Ventilating.b. Ductmate Industries, Inc.c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.d. Greenheck.e. McGill AirFlow Corporation.f. Nailor lndustries lnc.
S. Ventfabrics, Inc.h. Vent Products.i. Ward Industries, Inc.2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with
outside and inside handles.d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.
M #2006 9026 15820-5 07t31t06
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Ind., Inc.2. Ventfabrics, Inc.3. Ward Ind., Inc.
B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhe-
sives complying with UL 181 , Class 1 .
C. MetaFEdged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-112 inches wide at-
tached to two strips of 2-3l4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-
inch-thick aluminum sheets. Select metal comoatible with ducts.
D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight 26 oz./sq. yd.2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.3. Hart & Cooley, Inc.4. McGill AirFlow Corporation.5. Thermaflex.6. Wiremold.
B. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181 , Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with
latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation;
aluminized vaDor banier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and I .0-inch wg negative.2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten
band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel ac-
cessories in galvanized-steel and fibrousglass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in
stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
AA #2006 9026 15820-6 07t31t06
c.
D,
E.
lnstall backdraft damoers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two
duct widths from branch takeoff.
Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts.
Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical ldentification".
For fans developing static pressures of S-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors
with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps
Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
Final connections to diffusers, troffer boots, and terminal units may be made with flexible
ductwork. Expanded length of flexible ductwork shall not exceed 36 inches. Path of
flexible ductwork shall not exceed 45 degrees.
Flexible ductwork shall be attached to metal collars or sleeves with draw bands. Duct
adhesive shall be added to connections as required per duct system sealing class. Metal
collars or sleeves 12 inches and larger shall contain draw band holding beads.
Flexible Duct lnstallation:
1. Low Pressure Ductwork: Peel back vapor barrier and fold back insulation; then
secure to duct collar or sleeve with metal or nylon clamps or draw bands; then
fold over insulation and vapor barrier and secure with two stretched wraps of ap-
proved cut tape.2. Medium Pressure Ductwork: Peel back vapor barrier and fold back insulation;
then secure to duct collar or sleeve with approved duct sealer; then secure with
metal draw bands or clamps; then fold over insulation and vapor banier and se-
cure with two stretched wraps of approved duct tape. Take two or three tucks in
vapor barrier while taping.3. Support flexible ductwork following manufacturer's recommendations and
SMACNA HVAC Duct Conslruction Standards
Provide fire and smoke dampers at locations indicated and where required by applicable
codes. lnstall with required perimeter mounting angels, sleeves, breakaway duct connec-
tions, conosion-resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges per NFPA 90A. Follow
manufacturer's installation instructions to meet UL listing requirements for damper manu-
facturer, damper type and application. Coordinate dampers with Electrical/Fire Alarm
Contractor who will wire smoke and combination fire and smoke dampers.
Provide supply and return smoke dampers on air handling units 15,000 cfm and larger as
required by NFPA 90A. Dampers shall be controlled by Temperature Control Contractor.
Provide flexible connections to motor driven air moving equipment. Secure fabric to duct
or fan collar with 3/16-inch rivets spaced not more than 5 inches o.c. Provide thrust re-
F.
H,
t.
G.
J.
M.
N.
o.
P.
AA #2006 9026 15820-7 07t31t06
o.
R.
straints and other devices so that connections are not in tension with equipment running
or off. Air handling units with internally isolated fans need not have flexible connections.
Provide duct access doors to all internal devices requiring inspection for maintenance, in-
cluding fire dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, coils (entering side), humidifiers
(with window) and similar devices. Coordinate location devices in access door to allow
proper access to equipment once project has been completed. Said doors shall be
square and sized 2 inches less than the width of the duct. Maximum door size shall be
18 inches. lf required, provide multiple doors for adequate access to equipment.
Volume dampers located above non-removable ceilings shall be controlled by remote ca-
ble controls.
S. Provide turning vanes in all mitered duct turns.
T. Provide duct thermometers on all supply, return, mixed, and fresh air ducts at all air han-
dling units including hot and cold ducts of dual duct units. See Section "Meters and
Gages".
U. Provide volume dampers at branch duct take-ofi to diffusers and grilles. Registers and
diffusers with dampers shall be used only if devices are installed directly on the trunk
duct.
V. Provide volume damper on each zone of multi-zone air handling units.
ADJUSTING
Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing."
END OF SECTION 15820
3.2
A.
B.
M#2006 9026 15820-8 07t31t06
sEcTtoN 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1,1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-
control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, grilles, louvers and vents.2. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers,
registers, and grilles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the
ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions
and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be
located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1,4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
'1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indi-
cate construction, finish, and mounting details.2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise rat-
ings for each type of air outlet and inlet.3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and
methods of assembly of components.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers,
registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indi-
AE #2006 9026 15855-1 10/09/06
cated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Stan-
dard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Diffusers, registers, and grilles:
a. Kruegerb. Metal-Airec. Nailor Industriesd. Pricee. Titus
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
General: Sizes, types and capacities shall be as indicated. Ceiling and wall frame types
and dimensions shall be verified from architectural drawings. Verify ceiling frame and
panel style and dimension with reflected ceiling plan, room finish schedule and material
type. lf final diffusers or registers have a higher sound level than those specified or if di-
mensions are not compatible with finished walls, ceilings, floors or architectural air cabi-
nets (millwork), installed diffusers and registers shall be replaced at the Contractor's ex-
pense. Outlets and inlets shall be factory baked enamel finished with color selected by
ArchitecUEngineer unless indicated.
Ceiling Diffusers ("D"): Stamped or spun, multi-core $pe diffuser to discharge air in 360
degree pattern, with direction control and adjustable pattern where indicated.
Perforated Ceiling Diffusers ('D'): Perforated face plate, hinged for access to core and
duct accessories. Core shall be neck mounted, four-way deflection, fully adjustable,
curved blade design. Integral volume dampers shall be used only if diffusers are installed
directly on trunk duct.
Registers ("R") / Grilles ('G"): Streamlined blades, single or double deflection as indi-
cated. Integral volume dampers shall be used only if devices are instialled directly on
trunk duct.
Egg Crate Registers ("R") / Egg Crate Grilles ("G"): Aluminum construction, egg crate
design, with 112-inch by 1/2-inch x l-inch squares. Integral volume dampers shall be
used only if devices are installed directly on trunk duct.
Linear Diffusers ("LD") and Linear Grilles ("1G"): Extruded aluminum or steel linear de-
sign. Number of bars or slots as indicated. Diffusers shall have adjustable pattem con-
troller. Provide integral factory-insulated plenum for supply diffusers when indicated.
Frames and bars for floor diffusers and grilles shall be heavy duty and shall be welded if
required to provide adequate support.
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
AE #2006 9026 15855-2 10/09/06
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the
Performance of Air Outlets and lnlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3,2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fit-
tings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve de-
sign requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop.
Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in
ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or
other items conflict with installation, notify ArchitecVEngineer for a determination of final
location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service
and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
D. Provide manual locking volume dampers in branch ducts to all registers, grilles, and dif-
fusers. Dampers shall be installed as far from the air distribution devices as possible.
E. Integral volume dampers in diffusers and registers shall be used only if devices are in-
stalled directly on trunk duct.
3,3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as di-
rected, before starting air balancing.
3,4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean ex-
posed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and
grilles that have damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 15855
AE #2006 9026 15855-3 10/09/06
o
sEcTroN 15990
TESTING. ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART,I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:a. Multizone systems.2. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains,
branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and
ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke,
odors, and other pollutants.
D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of
high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is
withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E. NC: Noise criteria.
F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield re-
peatable results.
G. RC: Room criteria.
H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
l. System Effecl A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
J. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance rat-
ings of a fan when installed under conditions different ftom those presented when the fan
was performance tested.
K. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
AE #2006 9026 15990-1 10/09/06
L. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves
the distribution system.
M. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
N. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
O. MBC: Associated Air Balance Council.
P. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
R. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit four copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Sec-
tion, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.
B. Warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure
the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven
days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda ltems: Include at least the following:a. Submittaldistributionreouirements.b. The Contract Documents examination reoort.c, TAB plan.
d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes
the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified
TAB reports.2. Certifo that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the proc,edures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from TAB firm's forms approved by Archi-
tecVEngineer.
D. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more fre-
quently if required by instrument manufacturer.
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration
and the name of party performing instrument calibration.
AE #2006 9026 15990-2 10/09/06
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire
TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with
Owner's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and
equipment to support and assist TAB activities.
B. Notice: Provide seven days'advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates
and times.
C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have
been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Poject requirements and to
discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and
equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions
of Contract.
B. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record
Documents."
C. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, slatements of design as-
sumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philoso-
phies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
D. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
E. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
F. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Ob-
serve and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if
different from indicated values.
3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
AE #2006 9026 15990-3 10/09/06
J.J
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contiained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of En-
vironmental Systems" and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing
and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to
those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for
this Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-
speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final seftings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (lP) units.
GENEML PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
B. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow meas-
urements.
C. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and ex-
haustair dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
D. Check for airflow blockages.
PROCEDURES FOR MULTIZONE SYSTEMS
A. Set unit at full flow through the cooling coil if coil has that capacity.
B. Adjust each zone damper to indicated airflow.
PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be re-
used.
1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each
fan.2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.3. Check the condition of filters.4. Check the condition of coils.5. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap.6. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.7. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the resu lts of the meas-
urements taken. Report deficiencies.
B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment
that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and
refurbished.
1. New filters are installed.
3.4
J.C
AE #2006 9026 15990-4 10/09/06
2.
2
4.
5.
6.
Coils are clean and fins combed.
Drain pans are clean.
Fans are clean.
Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected,
c.Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the e{ent that existing systems are
affected by the renovation work.
1.Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows
and determine the new fan, speed, filter, and coil face velocity.
Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equip-
ment manufacturer.
lf calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than
5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and
water flow rates. lf 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
Air balance each air outlet.
TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipmentwith Fans: 0 to plus 10 per-
cent.2. AirOutlets and lnlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
REPORTING
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for sys-
tems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing de-
vices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes
and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for perform-
ance measuring and balancing devices.
Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for
each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
General: Typewriften, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper,
in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing
and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
2.
.t.
4.
3.6
2, '7
B.
c.
D.
E.
AE #2006 9026 15990-5 10/09/06
2. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop
Drawings and Product Data.
F. Round, Flat€val, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:a. System and air-handling unit number.b. Location and zone.c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.d. Ducl static pressure in inches wg.e. Duct size in inches.f. Duct area in sq. ft..
S. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.h. Indicated velocity in fpm.i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.j. Actual average velocity in fpm.k. Barometric pressure in psig.
G. Air-Terminal-DeviceReports:
1. Unit Data:a. System and air-handling unit identification.b. Location and zone.c. Test apparatus used.d. Area served.e. Air{erminalievice make.f. Air{erminal-devicenumberfromsystemdiagram.
S Air-terminal-device type and model number.h. Air-terminal-device size.i. Air-terminal-device effective area in so. ft.2. Test Data (lndicated and Actual Values):a. Airflow rate in cfm.b. Air velocity in fpm.c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.e. Final airflow rate in cfm.f. Final velocity in fpm.
S. Space temperature in deg F.
H. InstrumentCalibrationReoorts:
1. Report Data:a. Instrument type and make.b. Serial number.c. Application.d. Dates of use.e. Dates of calibration.
AE #2006 9026 159906 10/09/06
3.8 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing b verif, that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to conect unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: lf initial TAB procedures were not pertormed during near-peak sum-
mer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during
near-peak summer and winter condi0ons.
ENO OF SECTTON 15990
SrI.[L[ 2sxg4 rn
AE #2006 9026 15990-7 10/09/06
1.2
sEcTtoN 160,10
GENEML ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
t.l DEFINITIONS
The following definitions shall apply throughout the contract documents:
1. ArchilecVEngineer: Architect or Engineer2. Contractor: Any contractor performing work required by the contract documents3. Provide: Furnish, install and connect, complete and ready for use4. Indicated: Noted, scheduled orspecified
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The electrical work shall be performed by competent craftsmen skilled in the trade in-
volved and shall be done in a manner consistent with normal industry standards. All work
shall conform to the cunently adopted edition of the National Electric Code (NEC) and all
other applicable state and local codes or standards.
B. Where there is a conflict between the code and the contract documents, the code shall
have precedence only when it is more stringent than the contract documents. ltems that
are allowed by the code but are less stringent than those specified shall not be substi-
tuted.
PERMITS
A. All permits, licenses, inspections and arrangements required for the work shall be ob-
tained by the Contractor at their expense. All utilities shall be installed in accordance with
the local rules and regulations and all charges shall be paid by the Contractor.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Provide shop drawings for all items of electrical equipment listed below. Shop drawings
shall include manufacturer's literature describing the following:
1. Fire alarm2. Wiring devices3. Lighting fixtures4. Panelboards
WARRANTIES
A. The Contractor shall warrant all materials, workmanship and equipment against defects
or against injury from proper and usual wear for a period of one year after the date of
substantial completion. The Contractor shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the
Owner, any item which may become defective within the warranty period.
MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be new, unused and un-
damaged. Materials and equipment shall be the current and standard designs of manu-
facturers regularly engaged in their production.
1.3
1.4
1.5
t.D
167
AE #2006 9026 160'10-1 10/09/06
B. Where materials and equipment are indicated as furnished by others and installed or
connected under this contract, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify installa-
tion details.
1.7 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
The Contractor shall fully and carefully instruct the Owner, or his selected representa-
tives, regarding the proper operation, care and maintenance of each system and its
equipment.
The Contractor shall keep in a safe place all keys and special wrenches furnished with
equipment under his contract and shall give them to the Owner at the completion of the
project.
COORDINATION OFWORK
A. The Electrical Contractor shall plan all work so that it proceeds with a minimum of inter-
ference with other trades. The Electrical Contractor shall cooperate with all other con-
tractors in furnishing material and information, in proper sequence, for the correct location
of all sleeves, inserts, foundations, wiring, etc. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for all
extra cutting and patching made necessary by his failure to properly direct such work at
the correct time,
EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Devices shall be installed at the height indicated below unless otherwise noted. All
heights are measured from finished floor to centerline of device. Mounting heights shall
be in compliance with ADA requirements.
1. Wall switches: 48"
2. Receptacle, telephone or data outlet: 18"
3. Fire alarm indicating device: 80" to center of strobe
1.10 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS
All work in the existing building, indicated on the drawings or specified herein, shall be
executed with a minimum amount of interference with the normal activities of the occu-
pants of the building
Utilities shall not be interrupted without the Owner's prior written approval regarding the
time and duration of such interruptions. All interruptions shall occur during off hours.
The Owner shall be notified before starting welding or cutting. Fire extinguishers shall be
immediately accessible when welding or cutting with an open flame or arc. Welding or
cutting with an open flame or arc shall be stopped not less than one hour before leaving
the premises.
lf any existing conduit or electrical equipment is encountered which would interfere with
the proper installation of new work, it shall be removed or relocated as required or as di-
rected by the ArchitecUEngineer. Where existing work is to be modified, it shall be done
in conformance with these specifications. Materials used shall be the same as for new
work unless othenrvise soecified.
A.
B.
1.8
1.9
A.
B.
D.
AE #2006 9026 16010-2 10/09/06
1.11 DEMOLITION AND REMODEL
A. The Electrical Conhactor shall remove all existing lights, receptracles, switches, etc., indi-
cated on plans or which are not indicated but must be removed to accommodate demoli-
tion or new remodeling.
B. Where equipment, fixtures or wiring devices are to be removed, all associated conduit,
wire, fittings, supports and all other associated appurtenances shall be completely re-
moved. Where conduits are embedded in concrete floors or plaster walls, the conduits
shall be cut back and capped below surface. Refinish surface in a workmanlike manner
to match existing.
C. Where existing walls are shown to be removed, power to all elechical devices and asso-
ciated appurtenances relating to lhe walls shall be disconnected by the Electrical Con-
tractor and removed by the General Contractor. Circuit continuity shall be maintained up
and downstream from removed outlets. Extend circuiting to up and downstream devices
and reconnect as required.
D. In areas which are remodeled, existing wire shall be replaced with new wire. No existing
wire is permitted to remain unless noted. Existing concealed conduit and boxes may be
reused.
E. Verify existing conditions in field prior to bid date.
END OF SECTION 16010
AE #2006 9026 16010-3 10/09/06
sEcTtoN 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENEML
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply
with ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Complywith ANSI 413.1 and NFPA 70 for cotor-coding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYAND CABLE LABELS
A. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 3t4 Io 2
inches wide.
2.2 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS
A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVll, part 1910.14b.
B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate,
minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with white letters on black face unless otherwise indicated.2. Self-adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. ldentification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other des-
ignations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those re-
quired by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
AE #2006 9026 16075-'l 10/09/06
C. Sequence of Work: lf identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install identi-
fication after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive ldentification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
E. lnstall painted identification according to manufacturer's written inshuctions and as fol-
lows:
L Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting'
2. Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface.
3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel.
F. Circuit ldentification Labels on Boxes: Install labels externally.
1. Exposed Boxes in Unfinished fueas: Paint and label on cover.
2. Concealed Boxes Above Accessible Ceilings: Paint and label on cover.
3. Labeling Legend: Listing of panel and circuit number, or equivalent, using a
black permanent ink marker unless otherwise indicated.
4. Paint Colors:a. Emergency: Yellow.
G. Conductor Color Coding: Use the following colors:
1. 2OB|12O-Vconductors:a. Phase A: Black.b. Phase B: Red.c. Phase C: Blue.d. Neutral: White.e. Ground: Green.2. Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-
applied, color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for
sizes larger than No. 6 AWG:a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in halflapped turns for a dis-
tance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps
are made. Apply last two tums of tape with no tension to prevent possi-
ble unwinding. Use 3/4-inch- wide tape in colors specified' Adjust tape
bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings.
H. EquipmentldentificationLabels.
1. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Unless othenarise indicated, provide a single line of
text with 3/8-inch high lettering on 1-inch label; where two lines of text are re-
quired, use labels 1-3l4-inches high.
2. Install on each unit of equipment unless units are specified with their own self-
explanatory identification.
3. Apply labels for each of the following categories of equipment.
a. Panelboards, eleclrical cabinets, and enclosures'
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
c. Company switches.
END OF SECTION 16075
AE #2006 9026 16075-2 10/09/06
sEcTroN 16100
WIRING METHODS
1.1 SECTIONREQUIREMENTS
A. Summary: Building wire and cable and associated splices, @nnectors, and terminations
for wiring systems rated 600 V and less, and raceways and boxes.
1.2 WIRES AND CABLES
A. Conductors: Copper; color-coded; #12 AWG minimum size, except that conductors for
pilot and control circuits may be #14 AWG. Branch circuit runs over 100 feet must be
#10 AWG minimum.
B. Insulation Types:
1. #8 AWG and Smaller - THWN or as noted.2. #6 AWG and Larger - THW, RHW, THWN, XHHW, or as noted.3. Lugs and Conneclors:a. #6 AWG to #2 AWG: Thomas & Betts "Lock-Tite" or Burndy "Quicklug".
b. #8 AWG and Smaller: "Scotchlok" with insulator, Thomas & Betts "Sta-
Kon" with insulator or Buchanan Series 2002 with insulator.c. Cable Taps #1 AWG and Larger: OZ type PT/PTC or equal.4. Splicing Insulation: Electrical tape: Scotch #33 or equal.5. Point-of-Sale Cable: Two twisted pairs, 24 gauge, shielded, PVC jacket; Belden
*fs829.
C. All wires and cables must be delivered to the building in standard coils or reels with a tag
bearing the manufacturer's name and trade name of the wire and the Underwriters' La-
bel.
D. Connectors and Splices: Wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, and type
and class for application and for service indicated.
1.3 RACEWAYS
A. Outlet and Device Boxes: All boxes shall be pressed steel, zinc-coated, construction ex-
cept lhat exposed surface-mounted boxes shall be cast type with threaded hubs and
matching plates. Minimum box size: 4 inches square with plaster ring as required, ex-
cept use square comer masonry boxes in masonry walls.
B. Provide suitable zinc-coated metal covers for boxes not exposed to view.
C. Pull and Junction Boxes: Sheet metal boxes.
D. Support 3/8-inch malleable iron type fixture studs, zinc-coated, four-bolt type or "no-bolt"
type, at Contractor's option, except that all supports for each fixture must be the same
type. Provide as required.
1.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install wires and cables according to lhe NECA's "Standard of lnstallation."
AE #2006 9026 16100-1 10/09i06
B. Remove existing wire from raceway before pulling in new wire and cable.
C. Wiring at Outtets: Install with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack conductor at each out-
Iet.
D. Indoors Wiring Methods: As follows:
1. Exposed: Electrical metallic tubing.2. Concealed: Eleckical metallic tubing except as otherwise indicated.
3. Concealed Connections from Outlets in Ceiling Space to Light Fixtures Not Ex-
ceeding 6 Feet in Length: Flexible metal conduit (National Flexsteel or equal).
E. Conceal wiring, unless othenrvise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
F. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceway and suitable for use and location. For in-
termediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indi-
cated. Provide insulating bushings on fittings 1 inch or larger.
G. Install raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members.
For exposed raceways, follow the surface contours as much as practical.
H. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight.
Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. Use insulaling bushings to pro-
tect conductors.
l. lnstall raceway sealing fittings where required by the NEC and at wiring entrances to re-
frigerated spaces. Locate at suitable, approved, accessible localions and fill them with
UL{isted sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel
box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.
J. Install a separate green ground conductor in each branch circuit conduit'
END OF SECTION 16100
AE #2006 9026 16100-2 10/09/06
sEcTtoN 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
,1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit intenupters.2. Single- and double-pole snap switches.3. Device wall plates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interruoter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre.
marking wall plates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single
manufaclurer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Micle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Manufacturers and catalog numbers are scheduled to establish the stan-
dard of quality required. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. Wiring Devices:
a. Bryant Electric, Inc.b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
AE #2006 9026 16140-1 10/09/06
c. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices.d. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div.
e. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.f. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
S. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
2. Poke-through, Floor Service Outlets:a. American Electric.b. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div.c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.d. Square D Co.e. Wiremold.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty (specification) grade, side- and
back-wired with wire clamps for back wiring.
1. Simplex Receptacle,20A-15V: P&S 536'1.2. Duplex Receptacles,204-125V: P&S 5352.3. Ground Fault Interupter Duplex Receptacle, 2OA-125Y: P&S 2091 .
2.3 SWITCHES
A. Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type, 20A, 1201277-V AC.
1. Single Pole: P&S 20AC1.2. Three Way: P&S 20AC3.
2.4 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth plastic.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Color: Architect to specify.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. lnstall devices and assemblies plumb and secure.
B. Install wall plates when painting is complete.
C. Install wall dimmers such that derating is not required.
D. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging as instructed by
manufacturer. Do not remove fins when ganging dimmers.
E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
AE #2006 9026 't6140-2 10/09/06
F. Arrangement of Devices: Unless othenrvise indicated, group adjacent switches under sin-
gle, multigang wall plates.
G. Protect devices and assemblies during painting.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Sectlon 'Electrical ldentification.'
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conduc-
tor and to outlet box with grounding jumper.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-
tightening values. lf manufaclurers torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 4868.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at
least six times.
B. Test GFCI operation according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Replace damaged or defective components.
3,5 CLEANING
A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stiained or im-
properly painted wall plates or devices.
END OF SECTION 16140
AE #2006 9026 16140-3 10/09/06
sEcTtoN 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used
for the following:
1. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section $/iring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptiacles, and tog-
gle switches used for disconnecting means.2. Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fusible devices.
1,3 DEFINITIONS
A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
B. RMS: Root mean square.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indi-
cated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switch and circuit breaker.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clear-
ances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed de-
vices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Current and voltage ratings.c. Shorl-circuit current rating.d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual over-
current protective devices and auxiliary components.
C. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 or in Division 16 Section "General
Electrical Requirements". ln addition to requirements specified in Division 't Section
"Closeout Procedures," include the following:
AE #2006 9026 16410-1 10/09/06
L Routine maintenance requirements for components.2. Manufacturefs written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit
breakers.3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA70, Micle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NEMA AB I and NEMA KS 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otheruvise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104
deg F.2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain
reguired workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and
panels.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are pack-
aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spares: For the following:a. Fuses for Fused Switches: Quantity as specified in Division 16 Section
"Fuses".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
'l . Fusible Switches:a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.c. Siemens Energy & Automation, lnc.d. Square D Co.
AE #2006 9026 16410-2 10/09/06
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
c. Siemens Energy & Automalion, Inc.d. Square D; Groupe Schneider.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD (heavy duty), with lockable handle'
B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD (heavy duty), with
clips to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked
with cover in closed position.
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMAAB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available
fault cunents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
B. Molded-Case CircuilBreaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip rat-
ings, and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of
conductors.2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluores-
cent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating
equipment.
ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.2. OtherWet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclo-
sures before shiPPing.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only afler unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected.
AE #2006 9026 '16410-3 10/09/06
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
B. Bolt closed exterior grade level enclosures.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. ldentify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components as specified in
Division 16 Section' Electrical ldentification".
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Provide nameplates as specified in Division 16 Section "Electri
cal ldentification".
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground
continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Install power wiring. Instrall wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and
indication devices.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. lf manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 4864 and UL 4868.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component,
and control circuit.2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
B. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electrical cir-
cuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with require-
ments.
1. Conect malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otheMise, replace with new units and retest.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish'
END OF SECTION 1il10
AE #2006 9026 164104 10/09/06
sEcTtoN 16442
PANELBOARDS
1.1 SECTIONREQUIREMENTS
A. Submittals: Product Data.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
D. Fuses are specified in Division 16 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers'.
1.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Match manufacturer of existing lighting panelboards.
1.3 LIGHTINGPANELBOARDS
A. NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
1. Panelboard Capacity: As indicated on drawings.2. Cabinet: Minimum 20 inches wide and 5-112 inches deep.3. Front: Hinged to box with standard door within hinged cover.4. Doors: With concealed hinges, flush catches, and tumbler locks, all keyed alike.5. Bus: Aluminum or Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity.6. Feed-through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated.7. Interrupting Rating: 10,000 AIC .
B. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: NEMAAB 1, bolt-on type. Single handle for multipole
circuit breakers. Appropriate for application, including Type SWD for repetitive switching
lighting loads.
1.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1. Indicate installed
circuit loads on a typed circuit directory.
B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 72 inches above finished floor, unless otheruvise indicated.
C. Wiring in Panelboard Gufters: Anange conductors into groups.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque val-
ues are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4868.
END OF SECTION 16442
AE #2006 9026 16442-1 10/09i06
sEcTloN 16491
FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.'I RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1,2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cartridge fuses, rated 600 V and less, for use in swilches, panel-
boards, switchboards, controllers, and motor-control centers; and spare fuse cabinets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, per-
formance, electrical characteristics, and ratings for each fuse type indicated.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in operation and maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1 or Division 16 Section "General Electrical Requirements".
1.4 OUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide fuses from a single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse
size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.'I MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
'|.. Cooper Bussman, Inc.2. Fenaz Shawmut.3. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.
AE #2006 9026 16491-1 10/09/06
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indi-
cated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instruclions. Install fuses of
sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. For motor cir-
cuits, provide fuses rated at '125 percent of motor nameplate full load current.
B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be
applied to fuse ratings.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Fuses 600 Amps or Smaller: Class RK1, time delay, equivalent to Bussman Low Peak.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. lnstall fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch.
END OF SECTTON 't6491
AE #2006 9026 16491-2 10/09/06
sEcTtoN 16500
LIGHTING
1.1 SECTIONREQUIREMENTS
A. Submittals: Product Data for each luminaire, including lamps.
B. Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article '100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Coordinate ceiling-mounted luminaires with ceiling construction, mechanical work, and
security and fire-prevention features mounted in ceiling space and on ceiling.
1.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. As scheduled on drawings.
1.3 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Lighting fixtures shall be as scheduled on drawings.
B. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. Steel, unless otherwise indi-
cated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage
under operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping withoul use of tools. Ar-
range doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling dur-
ing relamping and when secured in operating position.
D. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or annealed
crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fixture Whips: Minimum length, 4 feet; maximum length, 6 feet; minimum conductor
size, #18 AWG. Include a grounding conductor.
B. Protective Lamp Jackets: Polycarbonate with end caps, compatible with lamps used.
1.5 INSTALLATION
A. Set units level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure.
B. Support for Recessed and Semirecessed Grid-Type Fluorescent Fixtures: Support from
ceiling grid where allowed by code.
C. Support for Suspended Fixtures: Brace pendants and rods over 48 inches (1220 mm)
long to limit swinging. Support stem-mounted, single-unit, suspended fluorescent fixtures
with twin-stem hangers. For continuous rows, use tubing or stem for wiring at one point
and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of chassis, including one at each
end.
AE #2006 9026 16500-'1 10/09i06
D. Use fixture whips for connection of recessed fixtures in an accessible ceiling.
E. Install protective lamp jackets on lamps in industrial fixtures and on exposed lamps in
strip fixtures.
END OF SECTION 16500
AE #2006 9026 16500-2 10/09/06
sEcfloN 16821
SOUND SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Seclion equipment for amplifying, distributing, and reproducing sound signals.
.1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or loudspeaker
zones, with separale amplificaiion and switching that permit selection between paths for
speaker alternative program signals.
B. Zone: Separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that may be ar-
ranged for selective switching between different sources.
C. VU: Volume unit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
'l'. Preamplfiers/mixers.2. Power amplifiers.
3. Equalizers.4. Microphone.5. Volume limiter/compressor6. Zonelroom combiners.7. Equipment cabinet and rack.
8. Speaker panels.
9. Microphone outlets.10. Control panels.
B. Shop drawings:
1 . Rack arrangements.a. Wiring diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the follow-
Ing:1) ldentify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and mainte-
nance.2) Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components.
3) Cabling diagram showing cabling routing.
AE #2006 9026 16821-1 10/09/06
1.5
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For public address and music equipment to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
OUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and ap-
proved for installation of units required for this Project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from In-
staller's place of business to Project site.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain public address and music equipment through a single source
authorized by manufacturer to distribute each product.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with UL 50.
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fix-
tures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
't.6
Middle Atlantic Products, Inc.
QSC Audio, Inc.
TOA Electronics, Inc.
Belden.
DBX.
EAW.
Electro-Voice.
Shure.
Biamp.
ADC.
Channel Plus.
lntegra.
JVC.
Panasonic.
Pioneer.
Crown.
Peavey.
AE #2006 9026 16821-2 10/09/06
2.2
18. Numark.19. Ace Backstage.20. E(ron
ZONES
Zone Number Area
1
2
3
4
5
t)
7II
10
11
12
Microphone Inputs
Line Level Inouts
DVD Player
DMX Music/Digital CATV Box
Spare
Spare
Salon A
Salon B
Salon C
Salon D
Salon E
Salon F
Salon G
Salon H
Salon I
Salon J
Pre-Function Lobby
Lower Lobby
Salon A
Salon B
Salon C
Salon D
Salon E
Salon F
Salon G
Salon H
Salon I
Salon J
Pre-Function Lobby
Lower Lobby
2.3 SOURCES
Source Number Area
2.4 OUTPUTS
Source Number Area
1-52
1-14
6
7II
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
2.5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Systems Functions: Include the following:
1. Selectively connecting separate zones to different signal channels.2. Selectively amplifying sound among various microphone outlets and other inputs.3. Reproducing high-quality sound that is free of noise and distortion at all loud-
speakers at all times during equipment operation including standby mode wilh
inputs off; and output free of nonuniform coverage of amplified sound.4. Local microohone control on wall Dlate for each individual room.
AE #2006 9026 16821-3 10/09/06
5. Room combining and head table control to be located at AV rack'
6. All audio inputs and outputs to appear on patch bay located in AV rack.
2.6 EOUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A, Coordinate features to form an integrated system. Match components and interconnec-
tions for optimum performance of specified functions.
B. Equipment: Modular type using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty,
unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on input power usu-
ally supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.
2.7 AMPLIFIERS
A. Power Amplifier - 4 Channel - A1, A3, A4IAVR002:
'1. Complywith TIA/EIA SE-101A.2. Mounting: Rack mounted.3. Output Power: 200 watts per channel.4. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus .2 dB from 20 to 20'000 Hz.
5. Shall support 70-volt distributed system.
6. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 0.01 percent at rated power output from 20
to 20.000 Hz.7. Controls: On/Off, input levels, Channel 1 and Channel 2 gain knobs.
8. Input Sensitivity: Matched to preamplifier and providing full-rated output with
sound-pressure level of less than 10 dynes/sq. cm impinging on speaker micro-
phone or handset transmifter.
9. Four-channel power amplifier shall be QSC CX204V or approved equal.
B. Power Amplifier - 2 Channel - A2 - AVR002:
1 . Comply with TIA/EIA SE-101A.2. Mounting: Rack mounted.
3. Output Power: 1000 watts per channel.4. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus .2 dB from 20 to 20'000 Hz.
5. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 0.01 percent at rated power output from 20
to 20,000 Hz.6. Controls: On/Off, input levels, gain knob for each channel.
7 . Two-channel power amplifier shall be Crown Audio Model No. QSC CX1202V or
approved equal.
2,8 AUDIO CONTROL
A. Digital Audio Processor and Router:
'1 . Uo to 16 different rooms of audio at the touch of a button.
2. Up to 4 different background music sources.3. Optional facility manager panel.
4. Membrane type wall plate control.5. Complete paging caPability.
6. Priority page function to be configured as an "all system mute" triggered by dry
relay contacts from the fire alarm system. Coordinate installation and configura-
tion with Fire Alarm Contractor.
7. Operates with anY mixer.
8. Lutron lighting interface.
9. Head table Relay cards.
AE #2006 9026 16821-4 10/09/06
10. Digital audio processor and router shall be FSR ML-1 1 6 or approved equal.11. Confirm panel layout with owner before ordering.
B. Microphone Selection and Volume Controls:
1. Provides local control of microphone volume.2. Provides background music source selections.3. Keyed lockout for panel operation.4. Membrane type panel with LED indicators.5. Microphone selection and volume controls to be FSR ML-l16 duplex membrane
wall plate
C. Audio Monitor Panel:
1. Monitor panel duplicates room panel layout with enable switch.2. Monitor loudsoeaker volume control.3. Analog VU meter.4. Individual pushbufton room monitor selection.5. Audio monitor panel to be FSR MonitorA/U panel or approved equal.
D. Audio Mixing Console:
1 . 8-channel frame size.2. Compatible with Shure SCM810 and FP4'10 automatic microphone mixers.3. Adjustable EQ per channel: low-frequency rolloff and high-frequency shelving.4. 48 V phantom power selectable for each input.5. Active balanced microphone- and line-level inputs and line level output.6. Highly RF-resistant chassis and circuitry.7. LED indication of channel clipping.8. Linking capability for s)rstems up to 32 microphones.9. Two Aux{evel inputjacks that feed one channel.10. Insert jack on each channel.11. Manual mixing of input channels.'12. Front-panel headphones output with level control.13. Peak-responding output limiter with selectable thresholds and LED indicator.14. lU rack mountable.15. Audio mixing console to be Shure 8-Channel SCM800 or approved equal.
2.9 CD PLAYER
A. Included in DVD player functionality. See referenced specification section 16851 for
component details
2.10 DVD PLAYER
A. See referenced soecification section 1685'1 for comoonent details
2.11 LOUD SPEAKERS
A. Loudspeaker Type 1 - Lobby:
1. 4" coaxial two-way.2. Waveguide coupled Ti tweeter.3. Full bandwidth overload protection.
4. Fronl baffle wattage tap adjustment.5. Integrated low loss matching transformer for either 70vl100v or 8-ohm.
AE #2006 9026 16821-5 10/09/06
6. lncludes tile bridge and mounting ring for installation.7. Integrated ported enclosure for extended bass response.L Fire rated ABS baffle/bezel assembly.9. Zinc plated steel rear enclosure.10. Powder coated grill with safety tether.11. Uniform frequency response from 65 Hz to 2Q kHz.12. Sensitivity of 86dB SPL at 1 meter with 1 watt.13. Loudspeaker to be Electro-Voice Model EVID C4.2 or approved equal.14. Coordinate loudspeaker finish with architect and interior designer.
B. Loudspeaker Type 2 - Ballroom:
1 . 8" coaxial two-way.2. Waveguide coupled Ti tweeter.3. Full bandwidth overload prolection.
4. Front baffle wattage tap adjustment.5. Integrated low loss matching transformer for either 70vl100v or 8-ohm.6. Includes tile bridge and mounting ring for installation.7. Integrated ported enclosure for extended bass response.8. Fire rated ABS baffle/bezel assembly.9. Zinc plated sleel rear enclosure.10. Powder coated grill with safety tether.11. Uniform frequency response from 50 Hzlo2O kHz.12. Sensitivity of 91dB SPL at 1 meter with 1 watt.13. Loudspeakerto be Electro-Voice Model C8.214. Coordinate loudspeaker finish with architect and interior designer.
C. Loudspeaker Type 3 - Lobby:
'1. 8" coaxial two-way with dual integrated waveguides.2. Defined coverage for high ceiling applications.3. Waveguide coupled Ti tweeter.4. Full bandwidth overload protection.5. Front baffle wattage tap adjustment.6. Integrated low loss matching transformer for either 70vl100v or 8-ohm.
7 . Includes tile bridge and mounling ring for installation.8. lntegrated ported enclosure for extended bass response.9. Fire rated ABS baffle/bezel assembly.10. Zinc plated steel rear enclosure.
1'l . Powder coated grill with safety tether.12. Uniform frequency response from 50 Hz to 20 kHz.13. Sensitivity of 93dB SPL at 1 meter with 1 waft.14. Loudspeaker to be Electro-Voice model C8.2HC or approved equal.15. Coordinate loudspeaker finish with architect and interior designer.
2.12 GRAPHIC EQUALIZER
A. Equalizer and Loudspeaker Management System:
1. 4 inputs and 8 oulputs with routing.2. 3'l band graphic or 9 band parametric equalizer on every input (pre-crossover).
3. Dual real-time audio analyzers.4. Butterworth, Bessel or Linkwitz-Riley crossover filters.5. 27 different crossover configurations.6. Compressor/Limiter on every output.7. Loudspeaker compensation EQ (post crossover).
AE #2006 9026 16821-6 10/09/06
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Multi-level security system.
Triple redundant backup of all parameters when running network.
Electronically balanced/RF filtered euroblock inputs and outputs'
RS-232 PC interface for computer display and configuration.
Equalizer and Loudspeaker management system to be DBX model 481 driverack
or approved equal.
2.13 INTERCOM SYSTEM
Intercom Power Supply:
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.
Supply two isolated channels of intercom system phantom power to down line
components.
Intercom power channels may be combined via the combine/lsolate switch to
form a single intercom power channel with double the capacity.
may be combined with a US2000A User Station lo create a two channel master
station configuration or as a stand alone power supply.
Rack mountable in a variety of modular configurations with one of several op-
tional rack mount kits.
IAR (lnstantaneous Auto Reset) technology for performance and safety.
Can operate in an unbalanced mode to be completely Clear-Com@ compatible.
Intercom power supply to be Telex PS-2001L.
lntercom splilters to be Telex TW-SW and Telex TW-7W or approved equal.
B.lntercom Wall Mount Station:
1-channel headset station.
Mounts in a standard electrical outlet box (doublewide type).
High-quality audio system with mic limiter circuit.
Backlit control buftons for low{ight operation'
Talk and listen buttons with momentary/latching operation.
Listen volume control.
Call send button with call receive indicator light.
Call receive beep tone with on/off selection.
Mic kill receive with on/off selection.
Side tone trimmer.
Quick-connect, wire clamp terminals for party line wire connections. 4-pin male
XLR headsets (balanced or unbalanced microphone)'
Powered from party line.
Local power optional.
Clear-Com@ compatible.
lntercom Wall Mount Station to be Telex WM-1000 or approved equal.
t-
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
214 COMPONENTS
A.Equipment Cabinet: TIA/ElA-310-D Complaint:
1.Cabinet Housing: Fully welded construction with 1/8-inch thick structural steel in-
ternal bracing, with front Plexiglas vented doors, vented solid doors for racks on
rear, end covers and standard TIA/EIA 1g-inch rack.
Provide top plate with 10-inch fan and fan guard.
Provide two power strips per cabinet with 14 outlets per strip'
Provide 3 foot ground bussbar in each rack.
Finish shall be black powder coat.
Racks shall be equipped with two pairs of 11-gauge steel rack rails with tapped
10 to 32 mounting holes in universal EIA spacing.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
AE #2006 9026 16821-7 10/09/06
7. Provide cable management for vertical and horizontal cabling.
8. Rack shall be Middle Atlantic Products Model No. MRK-4426 or equal.
Audio InpuUOutput Plate:
1. Three-pole, polarized , locking type microphone and line level audio receptacles'
2. BNC style line level video inputs.
3. CATS video connectors.4. F-connector CATV output.5. Audio InpuVOutput plate to be Extron AAP 106 and AAP 104 mounting frames
wilh necessary MP Plates.6. Confirm device plate finish with architect.
Conductors and Cables: Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned stranded
copper.
1. Insutation for Wire in Conduit: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch thick.
2. Microphone cables: PVc jacketed, not less than .045 inch thick, over shield with
filled interstices. 20 AWG, 4 conductor stranded, 42x40 barc copper. Shield
shall be tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or approved equivalent
foil. shielding coverage on conductors is not less than 95 percent. cable shall
be Extron STP Series or approved equal.
3. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.
4. Loudspeaker cable to 14 AWG non-pair shanded conductor. cable to be Belden
6100 UE or approved equal.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B.
New Wiring: Install wiring in raceways except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and
counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum-board partitions where
cable wiring method may be used. Use plenum cable in environmental air spaces includ-
ing plenum ceilings. Where possible for all audio cabling except microphone cables, mi-
crophone cables shall be installed in conduit. Conceal cables and raceways except in un-
finished spaces. Cable shall be installed continuous with no splices or cuts.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural mem-
bers, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or simi-
lar fittings so designed and installed to avoid damage to cables. Secure cable at intervals
not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, or fittings.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets.
Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speakerJevel, and power
wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where expOSed or in Same enclosure, Sepa-
rate conductors at least 12 inches for speaker microphones and adjacent parallel power
and telephone wiring.
Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide
matching networks where required.
c.
D.
AE #2006 9026 16821-8 10/09/06
3.2
F. ldentification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and ca-
ble marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination
with system wiring diagrams.
G. Wall-Mounting Outlets: Flush mounted.
H. Conductor Sizing: Unless otherwise indicated, size speaker circuit conductors from racks
to speaker panels not smaller than No. 6 AWG and conductors from microphone recep-
tacles to amplifiers not smaller than No. 22 AWG. All terminations of conductors shall be
soldered connectors malching equipmenl adapters are not acceptable.
l. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or
where exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.
J. Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap set-
tings in middle of range.
K. All terminations shall be installed per manufacturers specifications and recommenda-
tions.
GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipmenl cabinet. lsolate from power system
and equipment grounding.
FIELD OUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
'1. Schedule tests with at least seven days'advance notice of test performance.
2. After installing public address and music equipment and afler electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.3. Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program and page mes-
sages at microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs. Ver-
ify proper routing and volume levels and that system is free of noise and distor-
tion.4. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure signal-to-noise ratio of complete system at
final adjusted levels (FAL) gain settings as follows:a. Disconnect microphone at connector or jack closest to it and replace it in
the circuit with a signal generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Replace all
other microphones at corresponding connectors with dummy loads, each
equal in impedance to microphone it replaces. Measure signal-to-noise
ratio.b. Repeat test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers.c. Minimum acceptance ratio is 50 dB.
5. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at FAL gain settings and rated power. Feed
signals at frequencies of 50,200, 400, 1000, 3000,8000, and 12,000H2 into
each preamplifier channel. For each frequency, measure distortion in the paging
and all-call amplifier outputs. Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is
3 oercent total harmonics.
6. Acoustic Coverage Test Feed pink noise into system using octaves centered at
500 and 4000 Hz. Use sound-level meter wilh octave-band filters to measure
level at five locations in each zone. For spaces with seated audiences, maxi-
3.3
AE #2006 9026 16821-9 10/09/06
mum permissible variation in level is plus or minus 2 dB. In addition, the levels
between locations in the same zone and between locations in adjacent zones
shall not vary more than plus or minus 3 dB.
B. Retesling: Conect deficiencies, revising tap settings of speakerJine matching transform-
ers where necessary to optimize volume and uniformity of sound levels, and retest. Pre-
Dare a writlen record of tests.
C. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires
and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-line
matching transformers.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and instal-
lation requirements.
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's latest revision of
written or media instructions.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per-
sonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting equipment as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for trouble-
shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.2. Review datia in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data" or Division 16 Section "General Electrical Requirements."3. Schedule training with Owner, through ArchitecvEngineer, with at least seven
days' advance notice.
B. SystemTroubleshooting:
1 . Demonstrate troubleshooting procedure for common software, programming,
control console, dimmer bank and distribution system problems.
2. Show how to get help.
END OF SECTION 16821
AE #2006 9026 16821-10 10/09/06
sEcTtoN 16850
TELEVISION EOUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes CATV systems using a local or regional cable service as the signal
source.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CATV: Community antenna television.
B. NTSC: National lelevision system committee.
C. RF: Radio frequency.
.1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: lnclude detailed manufacturer's specifications for each component speci-
fied. lnclude data on features, ratings, and performance.
B. Shop Drawings: For television equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other Work.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements and perform struclural analysis for
installed products including selection of seismic restraints, signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.2. lnclude dimensioned plan and elevation views of components and enclosures,
and details of control panels. Show access and workspace requirements.3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale and coordinating locations of television
equipment. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.3. Location of items requiring installation coordination including lighting fixtures, dif-
fusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and other architectural fea-
tures.
D. Samples: Full size, for each outlet and finish plate, for colors and textures required.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply wilh re-
ouirements.
AE #2006 9026 16850-1 10/09/06
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requiremenls of installed systems.
G. Maintenance Data: For television equipment and components to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Sec-
tion "Contract Closeout" or in Division 16 Section "General Elechical Requirements," in-
clude the following:
1. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnor-
mal conditions.2. Routine maintenance requirements for system components.3. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at
the site for readv access.
H. Warranties: Special *"r|."nti"" specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of
the television equipment manufacturer, for both installation and maintenance of units re-
quired for this Project, to supervise installation of the system.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the InterNa-
tional Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
1. Testing Agency's Field Superuisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of tele-
vision equipment and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers'
products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions" or Division 16 Section "General Electrical Requirements."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Comply with 47 CFR 15, 17 , and 76.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: System components are equipped and rated for the environ-
ments where installed.
1. Service Conditions for Outdoor Equipment: Rate equipment for continuous op-
eration under the following environmental conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Temperature: Minus22deg Fto plus 122 deg F.
b. Relative Humidity: 5 to 100 percent.
c. Weather: Enclosure housings to prevent entry of moisture due to melting
ice build-up or driven rain or snow.
AE #2006 9026 16850-2 10/09/06
1.7
2. Service Conditions for Indoor Equipment: Rate equipment for continuous opera-
tion under the following environmental conditions, unless otherwise indicated:a. Temperature: 32 deg F to 122degF.b. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work of this Section wilh requirements of CATV service provider.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of television equipment and suspension system com-
ponents with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, includ-
ing light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
WARRANTY
A. Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner
may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,
and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1. Special Wananty for Television System and Components: Wriften warranty,
signed by manufacturer and Installer agreeing to correct system deficiencies and
replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified war-
ranty period when installed and used according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not limiting, other rights Owner
may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents.2. Special Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra malerials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with la-
bels describing contents. Provide not less than one of each item listed below. Deliver
extra materials to Owner.
1. Fuses: One for every 10; each type and rating.2. Splitters: One for every 10 installed.3. MATV Attenuators: One for every 10; each type used.4. Cable: 100feet; eachtypeused.
1.8
1.9
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
'l . CATV Sptem Components:a. Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.
AE #2006 9026 16850-3 10/09/06
2.2
b. Channell Company.c. General Instrument Corp.; Jerrold Div.d. RMS.e. Drake.f. Multiplex Technology, lnc.
S. Pico Macom, Inc.h. CommScope
TELEVISION SYSTEMS
A. Components: Modular plug-in, heavy-duty, industrial- or commercial-grade units.
B. Equipment Silicon-based, solid-state, integrated circuitdevices.
C. Power Supply Characteristics: Devices shall be within specified parameters for ac supply
voltages within the range of 105 to 130 V.
D. Protect signal cables and connected components against translenfvollage surges by
suppressors and absorbers designed specifically for the purpose.
E. RF and Video lmpedance Matching: Signal-handling components, including connecling
cable, shall have end-to.end impedance-matched signal paths. Match and balance de-
vices used at connections where it is impossible to avoid impedance mismatch or mis-
match of balanced circuits to unbalanced circuits.
SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS
A. Cable: Coaxial cable elements have 7S-ohms nominal impedance. Cables comply with
Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."
B. Cable: Coaxial cable elements have 7S-ohms nominal impedance and are 100 percent
factory-sweep tested to meet or exceed requirements of NFPA 70, Articles 725, 800, and
820. Cables run in environmental air spaces are listed for use in plenums.
1. Satellite Antenna Cable: RG-1 1/U; cellular-polyethylene dielectric, tinned-copper
braid shield with 100 percent shielding factor, No. 18 AWG solid copper conduc-
tor; and PVC jacket.
2. CATV Indoor Trunk Cable: RG-'t1/U; cetlular-polyethylene dielectric, foil shield
and aluminum braid shield with 60 percent minimum shielding factor,
No. 14 AWG solid copper-clad-steel conductor; and PVC jacket.
2.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A,
B.
Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cables trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
Examine roughing-in for antenna to verify actual locations of cable connections before
antenna installation.
AE #2006 9026 16850-4 10/09/06
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, equipment bases, and roof supports for suitrable conditions
where lelevision equipment is to be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Outdoor Installation: Comply with ANSI C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
B. Inslall surge suppressors where ac-power-operated devices are not prolected against
voltage transients by integral surge suppressors specified in UL 1449. Install surge sup-
pressors at the devices' powerJine terminals. Comply with Division 16 Section "Transient
Voltage Suppression."
C. Wiring Method: lnstall cables in raceways, except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces
and attics, in hollow gypsum board partitions, and as otherwise indicated. Conceal race-
ways and wiring except in unfinished spaces.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and
use lacing bars and distribution spools.
E. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not in-
stall bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during instal-
lation and replace it with new cable.
F. Exposed Cable: Install parallel to building lines, follow surface contours, and support the
cable according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not run adjacent and parallel
to power or data cables.
G. Equalizing Video Signals: Where system performance may be degraded in certain oper-
ating modes, revise component connections and install video distribution amplifiers and
attenuators as required to provide a balanced signal across the system.
H. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal
strips in.iunction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. lf manufacture/s torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 4864 and UL 4868.
l. Grounding: Provide independent signal circuit grounding recommended by manufac-
turer.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. ldentify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Sec-
tion "Electrical ldentification."
AE #2006 9026 16850-5 10/09/06
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform fteld quality-control test-
ing.
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
C. Manufacture/s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pretesting,
testing, and adjusting of television equipment.
D. lnspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled
and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
E. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to
verify that they comply with specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or damaged
items. Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare tele-
vision equipmeni for acceptance and operational testing as follows:
1. CATV Sources: Connect the receiver to an agile demodulator or CAW set-top
converter at the CATV service enlrance to the facility.
F. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after prelesting has successfully been completed and
system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum
of 10 days' notice of test schedule.
G. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with
Specifications. Include all modes of system operalion. Test equipment for proper opera-
tion in all functional modes.
H. Qualitative and Quantitative Performance Tests: Demonstrate reception quality of color-
television program transmissions at each syslem outlet from each designated channel
and source. Quality shall be equal to or superior than that obtained with performance
checks specified below, using a standard, commercial, cable-ready, color-television re-
ceiver. Level and quality of signal at each outlet and from each designated channel and
source shall comply with the following Specifications when tested according to NCTA-O2
or 47 CFR 76:
1. RF Video Canier Level: Between 2 and 12 dB mV.2. Relative Video Carrier Level: Within 3 dB to adjacent channel.3. Carier Level Stability, Short Term: Level does nol change more than 0.5 dB dur-
ing a 60-minute period.4. Carrier Level Stability, Long Term: Level does not change more than 2 dB during
a 24-hour period.5. Broadband Frequency Response: More than the 54- lo 220-MHz frequency
range, signal amplitude is plus or minus 3 dB, maximum.6. Channel Frequency Response: Across any 6-MHz channel in the 54- to 22O-
MHz frequency range, referenced to video carrier, signal amplitude is plus or mi-
nus 1 dB, maximum, unless othenvise indicated.7. Canier-to-Noise Ratio: 45 dB or more, unless otherwise indicated.8. RF Visual Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 43 dB or more.9. Cross Modulation: Less than minus 50 dB.10. Carrier-to-Echo Ratio: More than 40 dB.11. Composite Triple Beat: Less than minus 53 dB.
AE #2006 9026 16850-6 10/09/06
12. Second Order Beat: Less than minus 60 dB.13. Terminal lsolation TV to TV: 25 dB, minimum.14. Terminal lsolation between TV and FM: 35 dB. minimum.15. Hum Modulation: 2 percent, maximum.'16. RF FM Canier Level: 13 to 17 dB below video carrier level.17. FM Frequency Response: More than the 88- to 108-MHz frequency range, sig-
nal amplitude is plus or minus 0.75 dB, maximum.18. FM Carrier-to-Noise Ratio: More than 24 dB.
l. Record test results.
J. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per-
sonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain television equipment.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for trouble-
shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.2. Demonstrate methods of determining optimum alignment and adjustment of
components and seftings for system controls.3. Demonslrate programming and tuning of satellite receivers.4. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Ooeration
and Maintenance Data" or Division 16 Section "General Electrical Requirements."5. Schedule training with Owner, through ArchitecUEngineer, wilh at least seven
days' advance notice.6. Conducl a minimum of six hours' training as specified in instructions to Owner's
employees in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" or Division 16 Section
"General Electrical Requirements."
3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested by Owner within one year of date of Substan-
tial Completion, provide on-site assistance in tuning and adjusting the system to suit ac-
tual occupied conditions and to optimize performance. Provide up to two adjustments at
Project site for this purpose, without additional cost.
END OF SECTION 16850
AE #2006 9026 16850-7 10/09/06
sEcTroN 16850
TELEVISION EQUIPMENT
PART,I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
,1,2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes CATV syrstems using a local or regional cable service as the signal
source.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CATV: Gommunity antenna television.
B. NTSC: National television system committee.
C. RF: Radio frequency.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include detailed manufacture/s specifications for each component speci-
fied. Include data on features, ratings, and performance.
B. Shop Drawings: For television equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other Work.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements and perform structural analysis for
installed products including selection of seismic restraints, signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components and enclosures,
and details of control panels. Show access and workspace requirements.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale and coordinating locations of television
equipment. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Location of items requiring installation coordination including lighting fixtures, dif-
fusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and other architectural fea-
tures.
D. Samples: Full size, for each outlet and finish plate, for colors and lextures required.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufaclurer certifying that installers comply with re-
quirements.
AE #2006 9026 16850-1 10/09/06
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements of installed systems.
G. Maintenance Data: For television equipment and components to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Sec-
tion "Contract Closeout" or in Division 16 Section "General Electrical Requiremenls," in-
clude the following:
1. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under bolh normal and abnor-
mal conditions.2. Routine maintenance requirements for system components.
3. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at
the site for ready access.
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section'
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. lnstaller Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of
the television equipment manufacturer, for both installation and maintenance of units re-
quired for this Project, to supervise installation of the system.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the InterNa-
tional Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
1. Testing Agenct's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of tele-
vision equipment and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers'
products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
i'substitutions" or Division 16 Section "General Electrical Requirements"'
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Comply with 47 CFR 15, 17, and 76.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: System components are equipped and rated for the environ-
ments where installed.
1. Service Conditions for Outdoor Equipment: Rate equipment for continuous op-
eration under the following environmental conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Temperature: Minus 22 deg F to plus 122 deg F.
b. Relative Humidity: 5 to 100 percent.
c. Weather: Enclosure housings to prevent entry of moisture due to melting
ice build-uo or driven rain or snow.
AE #2006 9026 16850-2 10/09/06
2. Service Conditions for Indoor Equipment Rate equipment for continuous opera-
tion under the following environmental conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Temperature: 32 deg F to 122 deg F.b. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with requirements of CATV service provider.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of television equipment and suspension system com-
ponents with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, includ-
ing light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
C. Coordinate size and localion of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special wananty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner
may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,
and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1. Special Warranty for Television System and Components: Written wananty,
signed by manufacturer and Installer agreeing to correct system deficiencies and
replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified war-
ranty period when installed and used according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not limiting, other rights Owner
may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents.
2. Special Waranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with la-
bels describing contents. Provide not less than one of each item listed below. Deliver
extra materials to Owner.
'1. Fuses: Oneforevery 10; each type and rating.
2. Splitters: One for every 10 installed.
3. MATV Attenuators: One for every 10; each type used.
4. Cable: 100 feet; each type used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. CATV System Components:a. Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.
AE #2006 9026 16850-3 10/09/06
b. Channell Company.c. General Instrument Corp.; Jerrold Div.d. RMS.e. Drake.f. Multiplex Technology, Inc.
S. Pico Macom, lnc.h. CommScooe
2.2 TELEVISION SYSTEMS
A. Components: Modular plug-in, heavy-duty, industrial- or commercial-grade units.
B. Equipment: Silicon-based,solid-state,integratedcircuitdevices.
C. Power Supply Characteristics: Devices shall be within specified parameters for ac supply
voltages within the range of 105 to 130 V.
D. Protect signal cables and connected components against transient-voltage surges by
suppressors and absorbers designed specifically for the purpose.
E. RF and Video lmpedance Matching: Signal-handling components, including connecting
cable, shall have end-to-end impedance-matched signal paths. Match and balance de-
vices used at connections where it is impossible to avoid impedance mismatch or mis-
match of balanced circuits to unbalanced circuits.
2.3 SIGNAL TMNSMISSION COMPONENTS
A. Cable: Coaxial cable elements have 75-ohms nominal impedance. Cables comply with
Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."
B. Cable: Coaxial cable elements have 75-ohms nominal impedance and are 100 percent
faclory-sweep tested to meet or exceed requirements of NFPA 70, Articles 725, 800, and
820. Cables run in environmental air spaces are listed for use in plenums.
1. Satellite Antenna Cable: RG-1 l/U; cellular-polyethylene dielectric, tinned-copper
braid shield with 100 percent shielding factor, No. 18 AWG solid copper conduc-
tor; and PVC jacket.
2. CATV Indoor Trunk Cable: RG-11/U; cellular-polyethylene dielectric, foil shield
and aluminum braid shield with 60 percent minimum shielding factor,
No. 14 AWG solid copper-clad-steel conductor; and PVC jacket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cables trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
B. Examine roughing-in for antenna to verify actual locations of cable connections before
antenna installation.
AE #2006 9026 16850-4 10/09/06
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, equipment bases, and roof supports for suitable conditions
where television equipment is to be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Outdoor Installation: Comply with ANSI C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
B. Install surge suppressors where ac-power-operaled devices are not protected against
voltage transients by integral surge suppressors specified in UL 1449. Install surge sup-
pressors at the devices' power-line terminals. Comply with Division 16 Section "Transient
Voltage Suppression."
C. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways, except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces
and attics, in hollow gypsum board partitions, and as otherwise indicated. Conceal race-
ways and wiring except in unfinished spaces.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and
use lacing bars and distribution spools.
E. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not in-
stall bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during instal-
lation and replace it with new cable.
F. Exposed Cable: Install parallel to building lines, follow surface contours, and support the
cable according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not run adjacent and parallel
to oower or data cables.
G. Equalizing Video Signals: Where system performance may be degraded in certain oper-
ating modes, revise component conneclions and install video distribution amplifiers and
attenuators as required to provide a balanced signal across the system.
H. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal
strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. lf manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
soecified in UL 486A and UL 4868.
L Grounding: Provide independent signal circuit grounding recommended by manufac-
turer.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. ldentify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Sec-
tion "Electrical ldentification."
AE #2006 9026 16850-5 10/09/06
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform field quality-control test-
ing.
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pretesting,
testing, and adjusting of television equipment.
D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled
and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
E. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to
verify that they comply with specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or damaged
items. Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare tele-
vision equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows:
1. CAW Sources: Connect the receiver to an agile demodulator or CATV set-top
converter at the CATV service entrance to the facility.
F. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has successfully been completed and
system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum
of 10 days' notice of test schedule.
G. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with
Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper opera-
tion in all functional modes.
H, Qualitative and Quantitative Performance Tests: Demonstrate reception quality of color-
television program transmissions at each system oullet from each designated channel
and source. Quality shall be equal to or superior than that obtained with performance
checks specified below, using a standard, commercial, cable-ready, color-television re-
ceiver. Level and quality of signal at each outlet and from each designated channel and
source shall comply with the following Specifications when tested according to NCTA-02
or 47 CFR 76:
1. RFVideoCarrierLevel: Between2andl2dBmV.2. Relative Video Carrier Level: Within 3 dB to adjacent channel.3. Carrier Level Stability, Shorl Term: Level does not change more than 0.5 dB dur-
ing a 60-minute period.4. Carrier Level Stability, Long Term: Level does not change more than 2 dB during
a 24-hour period.
5. Broadband Frequency Response: More than the 54- to 22O-MHz frequency
range, signal amplitude is plus or minus 3 dB, maximum.6. Channel Frequency Response: Across any 6-MHz channel in the 54- to 220-
MHz frequency range, referenced to video carrier, signal amplitude is plus or mi-
nus 1 dB, maximum, unless otherwise indicated.7. Carrier{o-Noise Ratio: 45 dB or more, unless otherwise indicated.8. RF Visual Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 43 dB or more.9. Cross Modulation: Less than minus 50 dB.10. Carrier-to-Echo Ratio: More than 40 dB.11. Composite Triple Beat: Less than minus 53 dB.
AE #2006 9026 16850-6 10/09/06
12. Second Order Beat: Less than minus 60 dB.13. Terminal lsolation TV to TV: 25 dB, minimum.14. Terminal lsolation between TV and FM: 35 dB, minimum.15. Hum Modulation: 2 percent, maximum.16. RF FM Carrier Level: 13 to 17 dB below video carrier level.17. FM Frequency Response: More than the 88- to 108-MHz frequency range, sig-
nal amplitude is plus or minus 0.75 dB, maximum.18. FM Carrier-to-Noise Ratio: More than 24 dB.
l. Record lest results.
J. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
reouirements are met.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representalive to train Owner's maintenance per-
sonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain television equipment.
'l . Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for trouble-
shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.2. Demonstrate methods of determining optimum alignment and adjustment of
components and seftings for system controls.3. Demonstrate programming and tuning of satellite receivers.4. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data" or Division 16 Section "General Electrical Requirements."5. Schedule training with Owner, through ArchitecVEngineer, with at least seven
days' advance notice.6. Conduct a minimum of six hours' training as specified in instructions to Owner's
employees in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeouf' or Division 16 Section
"General Electrical Requirements."
3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested by Owner within one year of date of Substan-
tial Completion, provide on-site assistance in tuning and adjusting the system to suit ac-
tual occupied conditions and to optimize performance. Provide up to two adjustments at
Project site for this purpose, without additional cost.
END OF SECTION 16850
AE #2006 9026 16850-7 10/09/06
1.1
1.2
1.3
sEcTroN 16901
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 and relaled Division 16 Specification Seclions, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A. This Section describes the general telecommunications infrastructure requirements of
these specifications and applies to all phases of the work specified, indicated on the
drawings, or required to provide for the complete installation of telecommunications infta-
structure for thls project.
DEFINITIONS
Telecommunications Cables: Term includes horizontal and backbone copper, fiber optic,
and coaxial cabling; copper and optical outside plant cables; copper audio/visual cables;
CCTV cables; building environmental, automation, and security wiring systems.
Telecommunications Pathways: A cable distribution system consisting of raceways, ca-
ble trays, racks, and ladders; conduits; distribution rings and mechanical cable supporting
devices.
WARRANTIES
A. The Contractor shall warrant all materials, workmanship, and equipment againsl defects
for a period of one year after the date of substantial completion. The Contraclor shall re.
pair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any item which may become defective
within the warranty period. Any manufacturers' warranties concerning any item installed
will run to the benefit of the Owner.
ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following abbreviations apply throughout this section:
1. ASTM Specification: Standard specificalions of the American Society for Testing
Materials.
EM l: Electromagnetic interference.
FO: Fiber optic.
IDC: lnsulation displacement conneclor.
LAN: Local area network.
MM: Multimode.
NEC: National Electrical Code. latest edition.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.9. SM: Single mode.10. Underwriters or UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.11. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
A.
B.
1.4
1.5
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
AE #2006 9026 16901-1 10/09/06
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. provide a minimum '|S-year structured cabling application assurance warranty from one
of the following manufacturers:
1. Systimax.2. CommScope.3. UniPrise.4. Belden.5. ADC.6. Hubbel.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Compty with ANSI/TIA/E14-568-8.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard - Part 1 General Requirements.
D. Comply with ANSI/T|NE|A-568-8.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard - Part 2 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components.
E. Comply with ANSI/T|A/E|A-568-B.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.
F. Comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA 569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces.
G. ANSI/T|A/E|A-758 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Standard.
H. Comply with BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition.
l. Comply with BICSI Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual, current edition.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
B. Construction record drawings including station oullet numbers.
C. Product data.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate and schedule all construction work with the Owner and occupant prior to be-
ginning work. Do not intenupt building activities without strict coordination with the
Owner and occupant. Unscheduled appearance to work in the spaces without prior
scheduling with the Owner is not allowed.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of voice and data communication cabling with Owner's
telephone switch, telephone instrument, workstation, telecommunications and LAN
equipment suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange car-
rier.
C. Coordinate installation of telecommunications cabling with the raceway installer. Verify
raceways are installed according to current ElA,/TlA standards before installing cable.
AE #2006 9026 16901-2 10/09/06
D. Coordinate with pathway installer to ensure that EIA/TIA distance limits and installation
tolerances are maintained. Outlets that are beyond EIA/TIA distance shalt be brought to
the Owner/Engineer's attention as soon as possible. Owner/Engineer shall not be re-
sponsible for outlets beyond distance limits as a result of incorrectly routed pathways.
1.9 MATERIALS
unless otheryvise specified, all materials and equipment shall be new, unused, and un-
damaged. Materials and equipment shall be the cunent and standard designs of manu-
facturers regularly engaged in their production.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
Cable Management and Equipment Support:
1 Raceway and Boxes: Comply with Division 16 Section "Racewala and Boxes.,,2. Backboards: 3/4-inch, A,/C rated, interior-grade, fire-retardanltreated plywood.3. Equipment Racks:a. Wall-mounting, aluminum units with TIA/EIA 19-inch rack mounting de-
signed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with di-
mensions of units to be supported.b. Provide equipment racks as required to mount the quantity of patch pan-
els provided with space tor 5Oo/o expansion. Include expansion space
required for cable management.c. Provide horizontal cable management above and below each patch
panel.4. Cabinets:a. Wall-mount Cabinets:
1 ) Designed so access to all internal components can be from the
front or rear of the cabinet body by way of a dual hinge design.
Symmetrical in design to allow front and rear sections to open
left or right.5. Horizontal Cable Management:a. Include components lhat aid in routing, managing, and organizing cable
to and from equipment, protect network equipment by controlling cable
bend radius and providing cable strain relief, and a universal design
mounted to EIA 19-inch racks.b. lnstall the horizontal cable management panel in between each patch
oanel.6. Distribution Rings:a. Wall Mounted 4-lnch D-Rings:1) Plastic: Chatsworth No. 12127-001 orequivalent2) Metal: Senior Industries No. 4753 or equivalent3) Post Type: Chatsworth No. 15002-002 or equivalent7. Cable Bundling Hardware:a. Reusable Velcro cable ties.
Twisled-Pair Cables, Connectors, and Terminal Equipment
Horizontal Cables: Listed as compllng with Category 6 of TIA/EIA 568-8.
UTP Cable Connecting Hardware:a. Patch Panel:1) Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-
type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair
groups of installed cables.
A.
B.
c.
D.
1.
2.
AE #2006 9026 16901-3 10/09/06
2) Provide patch panels wired 5688 in communications closet to
terminate data station cables. Mount in equipment racks. See
detail drawings.b. Punch-Down Blocks:1) Type: 1102\ Provide punch-down blocks for termination of voice cables.
Mount blocks on backboards in a secure and orderly fashion.
See detail drawings. Allow adequate space for installation of
cross-connect wires. Provide jumper management to neatly ar-
range jumper cables.3) Provide 4-pair connecting blocks for termination of station ca-
bles. Provide S-pair connecting blocks for lermination of riser
cables. Install 4-pair and S-pair connecting blocks on separate
wiring blocks.
E. Fiber Optic Cables:
1. Cables: Factory fabricated, tight buffered, jacketed, low loss, glass type, fiber
optic cables, 125 micron cladding diameter.2. Cable Types:a. 62.5 Micron Core Diameter Multimode:1) Maximum Attenuation: Minus 3.75 dB/km at 850 nm. minus 1.5
dB/km at 1300 nm.2) Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz/km at 850 nm; 500
MH/km at 1300 nm. Make bandwidth measurements using
lengths of 1 km or greater.
3) Transmission Distances for Gigabit Ethemet: 300 meters for
1000 Base SX and 550 meters for 1000 Base LX.
4) Fiber shall be certified to have laser optimized cores.
F. Fiber-Optic Connectors and Termination Equipment
1. Cable Connectors: ST connectors with self-centering, axial alignment mecha-
nisms. lnsertion loss not more than 0.7 dB.
2. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered cable connectors.
G. General Optical Fiber Terminalion:
1. Directly terminate all fiber optic cable with ST composite/ceramic connectors.
2. Use manufacturer-furnished nylon cable wrap to bundle pigtails.
3. Terminate, install, protect cable and fiber according to the connector manufac-
turer's recommended practices.
4. Incorporate industry standard color coding and positioning within the enclosures.
H. Cable Bundling Products:
1. Reusable, adjustable, cable straps, capable of withstanding fastening to wall with
screws or equipped with snap-and-button fasteners. Black in color. With or
without cinch ring as applicable.
l. Jacks and Jack Assemblies for UTP Cable: Modular, color-coded, RJ-45 receptacle units
with integral IDC-type terminals,
1, Voice Jack:a. Mounting: In modular facePlate
AE #2006 9026 16901-4 10/09/06
b. TIA/EIA Category: 3c. Pins: 8d. Connection: T5688e. Color: To match existing
2. Voice Jack (Wall Phone):a. Mounting: Wall plate with studs to support phone
b. TIA/EIA Category 3c. Plate: To malch existingd. Pins: 8e. Connection: T56883. Data Jack:a. Mounting: In modular facePlate
b. TIA/EIA Category: 6c. Connection: T5688
d. Color: To match existing4. Provide one voice jack for each telephone outlet. Provide data jack(s) and voice
jack(s) for each combination outlets as indicated on drawings. Provide additional
jacks as indicated on drawings.5. Provide a filler for each unused faceplate opening.
6. Install jacks in outlet boxes indicated on drawings. Provide faceplates as re-
ouired.
J. UTP Patch Cords:
1. Four-pair cables terminated with RJ-45 plug at each end.
2. Category 6.3. Color:a. Blue for data.4. The same manufacturer as the connectivity.5. Lengths:a. Workstation: 10 feet.b. Closet: 10 feet.6. Lengths listed above are for bidding purposes only. Coordinate specified length
and color with Owner prior to purchasing cords.7. Provide one workstation patch cord for each outlet assembly.
8. Provide one closet patch cord for each outlet assembly.
1.10 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.11 INSTALLATION
A. Demolition:
'1. Do not remove cable from the building prior to successful cutover of all services
to the new cabling.2. After successful cutover of all services, remove horizontal station cable and ter-
mination equipment that has been replaced with new cable. Provide blank cov-
ers for abandoned outlet boxes. Coordinate closely with Owner when removing
cable as some cables may be under jurisdiction of building occupani. Do not re-
move cables with active services. Coordinate transition of active services to new
AE #2006 9026 16901-5 'r0/09/06
cable system with Owner. Firestop penetrations and sleeves affected by removal
of cable to maintain the required fire rating.3. Remove all cable from site.
B. Horizontal Cable:
'l . Provide horizontal cables from each outlet to the nearest communication closet
as indicated on the drawings.2. Roule cables from outlets to communication closets so that the maximum cable
length is 295 feet or 90M. lnstall cables parallel to the building structure.3. Neatly arrange cables in cable trays and in lelecommunications rooms.4. For areas and locations that are close to ElA,/TlA distance limits, run a length test
on proposed routing to said area or location. Inform Owner and Engineer of any
jacks beyond EIA/TIA distance limits. Owner and Engineer shall not be respon-
sible for out-of-distance outlets that are not tested prior to installation.
C. Provide cutover connections necessary to transfer voice and data communication signals
to the new cable system.
D. Protect the existing electronics, cables, and enclosures from possible damage as there
are active circuits and equipment in the building.
E. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and not more than 6
inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
F. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:
1. Install cable in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications for installation
and loading. Do not violate the short and long term cable loading.2. Provide service looo of 3 feet at outlet and 10 feet at telecom room.
G. Terminate cables in accordance with EIA/T|A-568-B Commercial Building Telecommuni-
cations Wiring Standard, observing the industry standards for terminaling the various
types of color coded cables within a building.
H. Adequately support cables from building structure in such a manner that the cable will not
be damaged by normal building use. Provide strain relief for lhe cables above sus-
pended ceilings, and where any continuous cable support system is interrupted, using
mechanical fasteners such as Category 5 rated J-hooks and other necessary devices to
support cables from the structure or ceiling support. Do not use suspended ceiling sup-
port wires or ceiling grid to support telecommunications cabling.
l. Route cables in a direct path between the terminalion points. Neatly arrange cables in J-
hooks and in communication closets. Provide "D" rings spaced a maximum of 12" on
center to support cables run on the face of any plywood wall.
1.12 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including
chips, scratches, and abrasions.
AE #2006 9026 16901-6 10/09/06
1.13 APPLICATION OF MEDIA
A. Horizontal Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 and fiber-optic cable for runs be-
tween telecommunications rooms and workstation outlets.
B. Horizontal Cable for Voice Service: Use UTP Category 3 cable for runs between tele-
communications rooms and workstation outlets.
1.14 TELECOMMUNICATIONSLABELING
A. Quality Assurance:
'1. Comply with ANSI/T|A/E|A-606 administration Standard for the Telecommunica-
tions Infrastructure at Commercial Buildings.
B. ldentificationProducts:
1. Cable Labels: Self-Adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, ma-
chine printed with alphanumeric cable designations.2. Label Maker: Brady l.D. Pro or approved equivalent.
C. ldentification and Labeling:
1. General Label Requirements:a. Mechanically print and install all labels per drawing details.b. Format: Select font size to be readable and to fil all information required
wilhout overlap of text. Recommended font: Helvetica, Bold.c. Use all capital letters. Use a one-line format.d. Clean all surfaces prior to attachment of any label. Follow manufac-
turer's recommendations for cleaning and affixing labels.2. Telecommunications Outlets and Termination Hardware:
a. Label each station outlet block, station outlet faceplate, and patch panel
per EIA'/TIA standards or Owner standards.3. lnside Plant Cables:a. Label Location: Within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is
accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indi-
cated.b. Label Information: Cable number. Follow ElA,/TlA standards or Owner
standards.c. Method: Brady cable labels appropriately sized or approved equal.
1.15 TELECOMMUNICATIONSTESTINGANDDOCUMENTATION
A. General Testing Requirements:
1 . Install and terminate cables prior to testing.2. Reterminate and retest cables which faiL.3. Replace cables which fail the second test.4. Utilize cable testing equipment capable of generating a report for each cable
tested. Provide a hard copy report per TIA/E|A-568-8.5. Provide certification reports printed on 8-112 inch x 11 inch sheels. Provide one
or more three-ring binders as required to contain reports. Provide a separate tab
for each group of cables served from a common communication room. Provide
AE #2006 9026 16901-7 10/09/06
an additional tab for backbone cables. Present cable testing results in a matrix
format.
Perform Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demon-
strate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal
path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove
temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.
lnspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity
and shorts. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations.
B.Copper Horizontal Cable Testing:
Test horizontal cables from the punch-down blocks, patch panels, or other termi-
nation equipment, to the jacks unless otherwise noted.
Test horizontal cables from punch-down block to punch-down block.
Field Test Requirements for a Category 5e Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Sys-
tem:a. General Requirements:1) Test every cabling link in the installation in accordance with the
Telecommunications Industry Association (TlA) Standard
ANSI/T|A/E|A-5688, 100-Ohm Twisted-Pair Transmission Per-
formance and Field Test Requirements.2) The installed twisted-pair horizontal links shall be tested from the
IDF in the telecommunications room to the telecommunications
wall outlet in the work area against the "Permanent Link" per-
formance limits specification as defined in ANSI/T|A/E|A-568-B'
3) Test 100 percent of the installed cabling links. All cable links
must pass the requirements of the standards mentioned above
and as further detailed below.b. Performance Test Parameters:
1 ) Test all horizontal copper station cables for Category 6 according
to the parameters set for in the TIA/E|A-568-B Standard. The
tesl of each Category 6 link must contain lhe following parame-
ters as detailed below. In order to pass the link test, all meas-
urements at each frequency in the range from 1 MHz through
250 MHz must meet or exceed the limit value determined in the
above-mentioned Category 6 standard.2) Perform the following tests as defined in TIA/E|A-568-B: Wire
. map, length, insertion loss (attenuation), NEXT loss, pair-to-pair
PSNEXT loss, ELFEXT loss, pair-to-pair PSELFEXT loss, return
loss, ACR, PSACR, propagation delay and delay skew.
c. Test Result Documentation:1) Record the test results information for each link in the memory of
the field tester upon completion of the test.
2) Transfer the test results records saved by the tesier into a Win-
dowsn-based database utility that allows for the maintenance,
inspection and archiving of these test records. Guarantee that
the measurement results are transferred to the PC unaltered,
i.e., "as saved in the testef, at the end of each test and that
these resulls cannol be modified at a later time.
3) Provide a paper copy of the test results that lists all the links that
have been tested with the following summary information:
a) The identification of the link in accordance with the nam-
ing convention defined in the overall system documenta-
tion.
6.
7.
1.
2.
3.
AE #2006 9026 16901-8 10/09i06
c.
D.
b) The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test in-
cluding the NEXT Headroom (overall worst case) num-
Der.c) The date and time the rest results were saved in the
memory of the tester.
Category 3 Voice Cable Testing:
1. Tesl for continuity and wire map.
Optical Fiber Testing:
1. GeneralRequirements:a. Test every fiber optic cabling link in the installation in accordance with
the field test specifications defined by the Telecommunications lndustry
Association (TlA standard ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (or by the appropriate
network application standard(s)) whichever is more demanding. See
paragraph "Performance Test Parameters" in this Section.b. Field test instruments for multimode fiber cabling must meet the require-
ments of ANSI/T|A/E|A-526-144. The light source must meet the launch
requirements of ANSI/E|A/T|A-455-508, Method A. Achieve this launch
condition either within the field test equipment or by use of an external
mandrel wrap (as described in Clause 1 1 of ANStfflA/ElA-568-8.1) with
a Category 1 light source.1) Field test instruments for singlemode fiber cabling must meet the
requirements of ANSI/ElA/Tl A-526-7.
END OF SECTION 16901
20167
AE #2006 9026 16901-9 10i09/06
sEcTtoN 16821
SOUND SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section equipment for amplifying, distributing, and reproducing sound signals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or loudspeaker
zones, with separate amplification and switching that permit selection between paths for
speaker alternative program signals.
B. Zone: Separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that may be ar-
ranged for selective switching between different sources.
C. VU: Volume unit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Preamplfiers/mixers.2. Power amplifiers.3. Equalizers.4. Microphone.5. Volume limiter/compressor6. Zonelroom combiners,7. Equipment cabinet and rack.8. Speaker panels.9. Microphone ouUets.10. Control panels.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Rack arrangements.a. Wiring diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the follow-
Ing:1) ldentify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and mainte-
nance.2) Singleline diagram showing interconnection of components.3) Cabling diagram showing cabling routing.
AE #2006 9026 16821-1 10/09/06
1.5
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For public address and music equipment to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALIWASSURANCE
A. lnstialler Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representiative who is trained and ap-
proved for instrallation of units required for this Project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from In-
staller's place of business to Project site.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain public address and music equipment through a single source
authorized by manufacturer to diskibute each product.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with UL 50.
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fix-
tures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Middle Atlantic Products, Inc.2. QSC Audio, Inc.3. TOA Electronics, Inc.4. Belden.5, DBX.6. EAW.7. Electro-Voice.8. Shure.9. Biamp.10. ADC.11. Channel Plus.12. Integra.13. JVC.14. Panasonic.15, Pioneer.16. Crown.17. peavev.
1.6
AE #2006 9026 16821-2 10/09/06
2.2
18. Numark.19. Ace Backstage.20. E*ron
ZONES
Zone Number Area
1
2
4
6
7
I
Y
10
11
12
Salon A
Salon B
Salon C
Salon D
Salon E
Salon F
Salon G
Salon H
Salon I
Salon J
Pre-Function Lobby
Lower Lobby
2.3 SOURCES
Source Number Area
Microphone Inputs
Line Level Inputs
DVD Player
DMX Music/Digital CATV Box
Spare
Soare
OUTPUTS
Source Number Area
1-52
1-14
'l
1
1
1
2.4
,|
2
3
4
q
A
7
Salon A
Salon B
Salon C
Salon D
Salon E
Salon F
Salon G
Salon H
Salon I
Salon J
Pre-Function Lobby
Lower Lobby
8I
10
11
12
2.5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Systems Functions: Include the following:
1 . Selectively connecting separate zones to different signal channels.2. Selectively amplifying sound among various microphone outlets and other inputs.3. Reproducing high-quality sound that is free of noise and distortion at all loud-
speakers at all times during equipment operation including standby mode with
inputs off; and output free of nonuniform @verage of amplified sound.4. Local microphone control on wall plate for each individual room.
AE #2006 9026 16821-3 10/09/06
5. Room combining and head table control to be located at AV rack.6. All audio inputs and outputs to appear on patch bay located in AV rack.
2.6 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Coordinate features to form an integrated system. Match components and interconnec-
tions for optimum performance of specified functions-
B. Equipment Modular $pe using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty,
unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on input power usu-
ally supplied at 1 1 0 to 130 V, 60 Hz.
2.7 AMPLIFIERS
A. Power Amplifier - 4 Channel - A1, A3, A4IAVR002:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA SE-101A.2. Mounting: Rack mounted.3. Output Power: 200 watts per channel.4. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus .2 dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz.5- Shall support 70-volt distributed system.6. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 0.01 percent at rated power output from 20
to 20,000 Hz.7. Controls: On/Off, input levels, Channel 1 and Channel 2 gain knobs.8. Input Sensitivity: Matched to preamplifier and provlding full-rated output with
sound-pressure level of less than 10 dynes/sq. cm impinging on speaker micro-
phone or handset transmitter.9. Four-channel power amplifier shall be QSC CM04V or approved equal.
B. Power Amplifier - 2 Channel - A2 - AVR002:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA SE-101A.2. Mounting; Rack mounted.3. Output Power: 1000 wafts perchannel.4. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus .2 dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz.5. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 0.01 percent at rated power output from 20
to 20,000 Hz.6. Controls: On/Off, input levels, gain knob for each channel.7. Two-channel power amplifier shall be Crown Audio Model No. QSC CX1202V or
pproved equal.
2.8 AUDIO CONTRO-
A. Digital Audio Processor and Router:
1. Up to 16 different rooms of audio at the touch of a button.2. Up to 4 different background music sources.3. Optional facility manager panel.4. Membrane type wall plate control.5. Complete paging capability.6. Priority page function to be configured as an "all system mute" triggered by dry
relay contacts from the fire alarm system. Coordinate installation and configura-
tion with Fire Alarm Contractor.7. Operates with any mixer.L Lutron lighting interface,9. Head trable Relav cards.
AE #2006 9026 168214 10/09/06
1 0. Digital audio processor and router shall be FSR ML-1 16 or approved equal.11. Confirm panel layout with owner before ordering.
B. Microphone Selection and Volume Controls:
1. Provides local control of microphone volume.2. Provides background music source selections.3. Keyed lockout for panel operation.4. Membrane type panel with LED indicators.5. Microphone selection and volume controls to be FSR ML-1 16 duplex membrane
wall plate
C. Audio Monitor Panel:
1. Monitor panel duplicates room panel layout with enable switch.2. Monitor loudspeaker volume control.3. Analog VU meter.4. Individual oushbufton room monitor selection.5. Audio monitor panel to be FSR Monitor/VU panel or approved equal.
D. Audio Mixing Console:
1. 8-channel frame size.2. Compatiblewith Shure SCM810 and FP410 automatic microohone mixers.3. Adjustable EQ per channel: low-frequency rolloff and high-frequency shelving.4. 48 V phantom power selectable for each input.5. Active balanced microphone- and line-level inputs and line level output.6. Highly RF-resistant chassis and circuitry.7. LED indication of channel clipping.8. Linking capability for systems up to 32 microphones.9. Two Aux-level inputjacks that feed one channel.10. Insertjack on each channel.1'1. Manual mixing of input channels.12. Front-panel headphones output with level control.13. Peak-responding output limiter with selectable thresholds and LED indicator.14. 1U rack mountable.15. Audio mixing console to be Shure S4hannel SCM800 or approved equal.
2.9 CD PLAYER
A. Included in DVD player functionality. See referenced specificalion section 16851 for
component details
210 DVD PLAYER
A. See referenced specification section 16851 for component details
2.11 LOUD SPEAKERS
A. LoudspeakerType l -Lobby:
1 . 4" coaxial two-way.2. Waveguide coupled Ti tweeter,3. Full bandwidth overload Drotection.4. Front baffle wattage tap adjustment.5. Integrated lovr/ loss matching transformer for either 70v/100v or 8-ohm.
AE #2006 9026 16821-5 10/09/06
6. Includes tile bridge and mounting ring for installation.
7 . Integrated ported enclosure for e)dended bass response.8. Fire rated ABS baffle/bezel assembly.9. Zinc plated steel rear enclosure.10. Powder coated grill with safeg tether.11. Uniform frequency response from 65 Hzto 20 kHz.12. Sensitivity of 86dB SPL at 1 meter with 1 watt.13. Loudspeaker to be Electro-Voice Model EVID C4.2 or approved equal.14. Coordinate loudspeaker finish with architect and interior designer.
B. Loudspeaker TyW 2 - Ballroom:
1. 8" coaxial two-way.2. Waveguide coupled Ti tweeter.3. Full bandwidth overload protection.4. Front baffle wattage tap adjustment.5. Integrated low loss matching transformer for either 70v/100v or 8-ohm.6. Includes tile bridge and mounting ring for installation.7. Integrated ported enclosure for extended bass response,8. Fire rated ABS baffle/bezel assembly.9. Zinc plated steel rear enclosure.10. Powder coated grill with safety tether.11. Uniform frequency response from 50 Hz to 20 kHz.12. Sensitivity of 91dB SPL at 1 meter with 1 watt.13. Loudspeaker to be Electro-Voice Model C8.214. Coordinate loudspeaker finish with architect and interior designer.
C. Loudspeaker Type 3 - Lobby:
1. 8'coaxial two.way with dual integrated waveguides.2. Defined coverage for high ceiling applications.3. Waveguide coupled Ti tweeter.4. Full bandwidth overload orotection.5. Front baffle wattage tiap adjustment.6. Integrated low loss matching transformer for either 70vl100v or 8ohm.7. Includes tile bridge and mounting ring for installation.8. Integrated ported enclosure for extended bass response.9. Fire rated ABS baffle/bezel assembly.'l0. Zinc plated steel rear enclosure.11. Powder coated grill with safety tether.12. Uniform frequency response from 50 Hz to 2O kHz.13. Sensitivity of 93dB SPL at 1 meter with 1 watt.14. Loudspeaker to be Electro-Voice model C8.2HC or approved equal.
I 5. Coordinate loudspeaker finish with architect and interior designer.
2.12 GRAPHIC EQUALIZER
A. Equalizer and Loudspeaker Management System:
1. 4 inputs and 8 outputs with routing.2. 31 band graphic or 9 band parametric equalizer on every input (pre-crossover).3. Dual real-time audio analyzers.4. Buttenrorth, Bessel or Linkwitz-Riley crossover filters.5. 27 different crossover configurations.6. Compressor/Limiter on every output.7. Loudspeakercompensation EQ(postcrossover).
AE #2006 9026 16821-6 10/09/06
8. Multi-level security system.9. Triple redundant backup of all parameters when running network.10. Electronically balanced/RF filtered eurobtock inputs and outputs.11. RS-232 PC interface for computer display and configuration.'12. Equalizer and Loudspeaker management system to be DBX model 481 driverack
or approved equal.
2.13 INTERCOM SYSTEM
A. Intercom Power Supply:
1. Supply two isolated channels of intercom system phantom power to down line
components.2. Intercom power channels may be combined via the Combine/lsolate switch to
form a single intercom power channel with double the capacity.3. may be combined with a US2000A User Station to create a two channel master
station configuration or as a stiand alone power supply.4. Rack mountable in a variety of modular configurations with one of several op-
tional rack mount kits.5. IAR (lnstantaneous Auto Reset) technology for performance and safety.6. Can operate in an unbalanced mode to be completely Clear-Com@ compatible.7. Intercom power supply to be Telex pS-2001L.
8. Intercom splitters to be Telex TW-SW and Telex TW-7W or approved equal.
B. Intercom Wall Mount Station:
1. 1-channel headset station.2. Mounts in a standard electrical ouUet box (doublewide gpe).3. High-quality audio system with mic limiter circuit.4. Backlit control buttons for low-light operation.5. Talk and listen buttons with momentary/latching operation.6. Listen volume control.7. Call send button with call receive indicator light.8. Call receive beep tone with on/off selection.9. Mic kill receive with on/off selection.10. Side tone trimmer.11. Quick-connect, wire clamp terminals for party line wire connections. 4-pin male
XLR headsets (balanced or unbalanced microphone).12. Powered from party line.13. Local power optional.14. Clear4om@ compatible.15. Intercom Wall Mount Station to be Telex WM-1000 or approved equal.
2.14 COMPONENTS
A. EquipmentCabinet: TIA/EIA-310-DComplaint:
1. Cabinet Housing: Fully welded construction with 1/8-inch thick structural steel in-
ternal bracing, with front Plexiglas vented doors, vented solid doors for racks on
rear, end covers and standard TIA/EIA 19-inch rack.2. Provide top plate with 1O-inch fan and fan guard.3. Provide two power strips per cabinet with 14 ouflets per strip.4. Provide 3 foot ground bussbar in each rack.5. Finish shall be black powder coat.6. Racks shall be equipped with two pairs of 11-gauge steel rack rails with tapped
10 to 32 mounting holes in universal EIA spacing.
AE #2006 9026 16821-7 10/09/06
Provide cable management for vertical and horizontal cabling.
Rack shall be Middle Atlantic Products Model No. MRK4426 or eoual.
B.Audio InpuyOutput Plate:
Three-pole, polarized , locking type microphone and line level audio receptacles.
BNC style line level video inputs.
CATS video connectors.
F-connector CAry ouput.
Audio InpuUOutput plate to be Extron AAP 106 and AAP 104 mounting frames
with necessary AAP plates.
Confirm device plate finish with architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
o.
7.
8.
t.
z-
?
4.
c.Conductors and Cables: Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned stranded
copper.
Insulation for Wire in Conduit: Thermoplastic, not less lhan 1132 inch thick.
Microphone Cables: PVC jacketed, not less than .045 inch thick, over shield with
filled interstices. 20 AWG, 4 conductor stranded, 42x40 barc copper. Shield
shall be tinned, sofi-copper strands formed into a braid or approved equivalent
foil. Shielding coverage on conductors is not less than 95 percent. Cable shall
be Extron STP Series or approved equal.
Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.
Loudspeaker cable to 14 AWG non-pair stranded conductor. Cable to be Belden
6100 UE or approved equar.
B,
New Wiring: lnstall wiring in raceways except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and
counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum-board partitions where
cable wiring method may be used. use plenum cable in environmental air spaces includ-
ing plenum ceilings. where possible for all audio cabling except microphone cables, mi-
crophone cables shall be installed in conduit. Conceal cables and raceways except in un-
finished spaces. Cable shall be installed continuous with no splices or cuts.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural mem-
bers, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or simi-
lar fittings so designed and installed to avoid damage to cables. Secure cable at intervals
not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, or fiftings.
wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets.
Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, lineJevel, speaker-level, and power
wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, sepa-
rate conductors at least 12 inches for speaker microphones and adjacent parallel power
and telephone wiring.
Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. provide
matching networks where required.
D.
E.
AE #2006 9026 16821-8 10/09/06
3.2
F. ldentification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and ca-
ble marking tape to designate wires and cables so ihey identify media in coordination
with system wiring diagrams.
G. Wall-Mounting Outlets: Flush mounted.
H. Conductor Sizing: Unless otheruise indicated, size speaker circuit conductors from racks
to speaker panels not smaller than No. 6 AWG and conductors from microphone recep-
tacles to amplifiers not smaller than No. 22 AWG. All terminations of conductors shall be
soldered connectors matching equipment adapters are not acceptable.
L Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or
where exposed to weather, instiall consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.
J. Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap set-
tings in middle of range.
K. All terminations shall be installed per manufacturers specifications and recommenda-
tions.
GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. lsolate from power system
and equipment grounding.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROu
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance.2. After instralling public address and music equipment and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.3. Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program and page mes-
sages at microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs. Ver-
ify proper routing and volume levels and that system is free of noise and distor-
tion.4. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure signal-to-noise ratio of complete system at
final adjusted levels (FAL) gain settings as follows:a. Disconnect microphone at connector or jack closest to it and replace it in
the circuit with a signal generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Replace all
other microphones at corresponding connectors with dummy loads, each
equal in impedance to microphone it replaces. Measure signal-to-noise
ratio.b. Repeat test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers.c. Minimum acceptance ratio is 50 dB.5. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at FAL gain settings and rated power. Feed
signals at frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1000, 3000, 8000, and 12,000 Hz into
each preamplifier channel. For each frequency, measure distortion in the paging
and all-call amplifier outputs. Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is
3 percent total harmonics.6. Acoustic Coverage Test Feed pink noise into system using octaves centered at
500 and 4000 Hz. Use sound-level meter with octave-band filters to measure
level at five locations in each zone. For spaces with seated audiences, maxi-
3.3
AE #2006 9026 16821-9 10/09/06
mum permissible variation in level is plus or minus 2 dB. In addition, the levels
between locations in the same zone and between locations in adiacent zones
shall not vary more than plus or minus 3 dB.
B. Retesting: Corect deficiencies, revising tap settings of speakerJine matching transform-
ers where necessary to optimize volume and uniformity of sound levels, and retest. Pre-
pare a written record of tests.
C. Inspection: Verifi7 that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires
and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-line
matching transformers.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and instal-
lation requirements.
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's latest revision of
written or media instructions.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per-
sonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting equipment as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for trouble-
shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data" or Division '16 Section "General Electrical Requirements."3. Schedule training with Owner, through ArchitecvEngineer, with at least seven
days'advance notice.
B. SystemTroubleshooting:
1 . Demonstrate troubleshooting procedure for common software, programming,
control console, dimmer bank and distribution system problems.2. Show how to get help.
END OF SECTION 16821
AE #2006 9026 1682'l-10 't0/09/06
sEcTtoN 16850
TELEVISION EOUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes CATV systems using a local or regional cable service as the signal
source.
.1,3 DEFINITIONS
A. CAW: Community antenna television.
B. NTSC: National television system committee.
C. RF: Radio frequency.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include detailed manufacturer's specifications for each component speci-
fied. Include data on features, ratings, and performance.
B. Shop Drawings: For television equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other Work.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements and perform structural analysis for
installed products including selection of seismic restraints, signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.2. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components and enclosures,
and details of control panels. Show access and workspace requirements.3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-instialled wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale and coordinating locations of television
equipment. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.3. Location of items requiring installalion coordination including lighting fixtures, dif-
fusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and other architectural fea-
tures.
D. Samples: Full size, for each outlet and finish plate, for colors and textures required.
E. Installer Certiticates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with re-
quirements.
AE #2006 9026 16850-1 10/09/06
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements of installed systems.
G. Maintenance Data: For television equipment and components to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Sec-
tion "Contract Closeouf' or in Division 16 Section "General Electrical Requirements," in-
clude the following:
1 . Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnor-
mal conditions.2. Routine maintenance requirements for system components.3. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at
the site for ready access.
H. Wananties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An exoerienced installer who is an authorized reoresentative of
the television equipment manufacturer, for both installation and maintenance of units re-
quired for this Project, to supervise installation of the system.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the InterNa-
tional Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person curently certified by the InteNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National lnstitute for Certification in Engi-
neering Technologies, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of tele-
vision equipment and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers'
products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions" or Division 16 Section "General Electrical Reouirements."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Comply with 47 CFR 15, 17, and76.
1,6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: System components are equipped and rated for the environ-
ments where installed.
1. Service Conditions for Outdoor Equipment: Rate equipment for continuous op-
eration under the following environmental conditions, unless othenivise indicated:a. Temperature: Minus 22 deg F to plus 122 deg F.b. Relative Humidity: 5 to 100 percent.c. Weather: Enclosure housings to prevent entry of moisture due to melting
ice build-up or driven rain or snow.
AE #2006 9026 16850-2 10/09/06
1.7
2. Service Conditions for Indoor Equipment Rate equipment for continuous opera-
tion under the following environmental conditions, unless otherwise indicated:a. Temperature: 32 deg F to 122degF.b. Relative Humidity: 0 to g5 percent.
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with requirements of CATV service provider.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of television equipment and suspension system com-
ponents with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, includ-
ing light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
WARRANTY
A. Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner
may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,
and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1. Special Warranty for Television System and Components: Written warranty,
signed by manufacturer and lnstialler agreeing to correct system deficiencies and
replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified war-
ranty period when installed and used according to manufacture/s written instruc-
tions. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not limiting, other rights Owner
may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents,2. Special Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTM MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with la-
bels describing contents. Provide not less than one of each item listed below. Deliver
extra materials to Owner.
1. Fuses: One forevery 10; each type and rating,2. Splitters: One for every 10 installed.3. MATvAttenuators: One forevery 10; each type used.4. Cable: 100 feet, each type used.
18
1.9
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. CATV System Components:e. Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.
AE #2006 9026 '16850-3 10/09/06
b. Channell Company,c. General Instrument Coro.: Jerrold Div.d. RMS.e. Drake.f. Multiplex Technology, Inc.g. Pico Macom, lnc.h. CommScope
2.2 TELEVISION SYSTEMS
Components: Modular plug-in, heavy-duty, industrial- or commercial-grade units.
Equipment Silicon-based, solid-state, integrated circuit devic,es.
Power Supply Characteristics: Devices shall be within specified parameters for ac supply
voltages within the range of '105 to 1 30 V.
Protect signal cables and connected components against transient-voltage surges by
suppressors and absorbers designed specifically for the purpose.
RF and Mdeo lmpedance Matching: Signal-handling components, including connecting
cable, shall have end{o-end impedance-matched signal paths. Match and balance de-
vices used at connections where it is impossible to avoid impedance mismatch or mis-
match of balanced circuits to unbalanced circuits.
2.3 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS
Cable: Coaxial cable elements have 7S-ohms nominal impedance. Cables comply with
Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."
Cable: Coaxial cable elements have 7s-ohms nominal impedance and are 1OO percent
factory-sweep tested to meet or exceed requirements of NFPA 70, Articles 725, 800, and
820. Cables run in environmental air spaces are listed for use in plenums.
1. Satellite Antenna Cable: RG-11/U; cellular-polyethylene dielectric, tinned-copper
braid shield with 100 percent shielding factor, No. 18 AWG solid copper conduc-
tor; and PVC jacket2. CATV Indoor Trunk Cable: RG-11/U; cellular-polyethylene dielectric, foil shield
and aluminum braid shield with 60 percent minimum shielding factor,
No. 14 AWG solid copper-clad-steel conductor; and PVC jacket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
c.
E.
D,
A.
B.
A.
B.
Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cables trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
Examine roughing-in for antenna to verify actual locations of cable connections before
antenna installation.
AE #2006 9026 16850.4 10/09/06
3.2
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, equipment bases, and roof supports for suitable conditions
where television equipment is to be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A. Outdoor Installation: Comply with ANSI C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
B. Install surge suppressors where ac-power-operated devices are not protected against
voltage transients by integral surge suppressors specified in UL 1449. Install surge sup-
pressors at the devices' power-line terminals. Comply with Division 16 Section "Transient
Voltage Suppression."
C. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways, except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces
and attics, in hollow gypsum board partitions, and as otheruise indicated. Conceal race-
ways and wiring except in unfinished spaces.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess and without exceeding manufacture/s limitations on bending radii. Provide and
use lacing bars and distribution spools.
E. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not in-
stall bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not sDlice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during instal-
lation and replace it with new cable.
F. Exposed Cable: lnstall parallel to building lines, follow surface contours, and support the
cable according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not run adjacent and parallel
to power or data cables.
G. Equalizing Video Signals: Where system performance may be degraded in certain oper-
ating modes, revise component connections and install video distribution ampliflers and
attenuators as required to provide a balanced signal across the system.
H. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and conhol wiring, use numbered terminal
strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. lf manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 4868.
l. Grounding: Provide independent signal circuit grounding recommended by manufac-
tu rer.
IDENTIFICATION
A. ldentify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Sec-
tion "Electrical ldentifi cation."
J.J
AE #2006 9026 16850-5 10/09/06
3,4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform field quality-control tes!
rng.
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
C. Manufacture/s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-
spect field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pretesting,
testing, and adjusting of television equipment.
D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled
and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
E. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to
verify that they comply with specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or damaged
items. Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare tele-
vision equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows:
1. CATV Sources: Connecl the receiver to an agile demodulator or CATV set-top
converter at the CATV service entrance to the facility.
F. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has successfully been completed and
system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum
of 10 days' notice of test schedule.
G. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verif, that system complies with
Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper opera-
tion in all functional modes.
H. Qualitative and Quantitative Performance Tests: Demonstrate reception quali$ of color-
television program transmissions at each system outlet from each designated channel
and source. Quality shall be equal to or superior than that obtained with performance
checks specified below, using a standard, commercial, cable-ready, color-television re-
ceiver. Level and quality of signal at each outlet and from each designated channel and
source shall comply with the following Specifications when tested according to NCTA-O2
or 47 CFR 76:
1. RF Video Carrier Level: Between 2 and 12 dB mV.2. Relative Video Carrier Level: Within 3 dB to adjacent channel.3. Carrier Level Stability, Short Term: Level does not change more than 0.5 dB dur-
ing a 60-minute period.4. Carrier Level Stability, Long Term: Level does not change more than 2 dB during
a 24-hour oeriod.5. Broadband Frequency Response: More than the 54- to 220-MHz frequency
range, signal amplitude is plus or minus 3 dB, maximum.6. Channel Frequency Response: Across any 6-MHz channel in the 54- lo 220-
MHz frequency range, referenced to video carrier, signal amplitude is plus or mi-
nus 1 dB, maximum, unless otherwise indicated.7. Carier{o-Noise Ratio: 45 dB or more, unless otherwise indicated.8. RF Visual Signal{o-Noise Ratio: 43 dB or more.9. Cross Modulation: Less than minus 50 dB.10. Carrier-to-Echo Ratio: More than 40 dB.11. Composite Triple Beat: Less than minus 53 dB.
AE #2006 9026 16850-6 10/09/06
12. Second Order Beat: Less than minus 60 dB.13. Terminal lsolation TV to TV: 25 dB, minimum.14. Terminal lsolation between TV and FM: 35 dB, minimum.15. Hum Modulation: 2 percent, maximum.16- RF FM Carrier Level: 13 to '17 dB below video carrier level.17. FM Frequency Response: More than the 88- to 108-MHz frequency range, sig-
nal amplitude is plus or minus 0.75 dB, maximum.18. FM Carrier-to-Noise Ratio: More than 24 dB.
l. Record test results.
J. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per-
sonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain television equipment.
1. Train Owne/s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for trouble-
shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.2. Demonstrate methods of determining optimum alignment and adjustment of
components and settings for system controls.3. Demonstrate programming and tuning of satellite receivers.4. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data" or Division 16 Section "General Electrical Requirements."5. Schedule training with Owner, through ArchitecyEngineer, with at least seven
days' advance notice.6. Conduct a minimum of six hours' training as specified in instructions to Owner's
employees in Division 'l Section "Contract Closeout' or Division 16 Section
"General Electrical Reouirements. "
3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested by Owner within one year of date of Substan-
tial Completion, provide on-site assistance in tuning and adjusting the system to suit ac-
tual occupied conditions and to optimize performance. Provide up to tr\ro adjustments at
Project site for this purpose, without additional cost.
END OF SECTION 16850
AE #2006 9026 16850-7 10/09/06
sEcTloN 16851
VIDEO DISPLAY SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1,1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes equipment for displaying signals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Channels: Separate parallel signal paths from sour@s to display or defined zones with
separate amplification and switching that permit selection between paths for alternative
program signals.
B. Zone: Separate group or single unit and associated supply wiring that may be arranged
for selective switching between different sources.
1,4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Video switcher.2. Controller.3. DVD player.4. Equipment cabinets and rack.5. AVwall plates.6. UTP media transport.
B. Shop Drawings:
1 . Rack arrangements.2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following:
a. ldentify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.
b. Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components.c. Cabling diagram showing cable routing.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For video display systems, operation, and mainte-
nance manuats.
AA #2006 9026 16851-1 07t20t06
1.5 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and ap-
proved for installation of units required for this Project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than 2 hours normal travel time from Installer's
place of business to Project site.
B. Source Limitiations: Obtrain display equipment through a single source authorized by
manufacturer to distribute each product.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with UL 50.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and support system with other
construction that is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Middle Atlantic Products, Inc.2. Panasonic.3. Extron.4. BlonderTongue.
2,2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. System Functions Include the following:
1. Video system to consist of universal twisted pair (UTP) transport system with
patch panels located in AV rack terminated at AV faceplates.2. Video system to include line level transport system with patch panels located in
AV rack terminated at AV faceplates.
2,3 VIDEO CONTROL
A. DVD/CD Player:
1. Direct progressive six-disc DVD changer.2. llluminated disc tray for easier disc recognition.
AA #2006 9026 16851-2 07t20t06
3. Handles disc formats: CD-R/RW, DVDTR/RW, MP3, I /MA and JPG photo image
CDs.4. Vector linear shaping circuitry.5. Direct digital path signal transport.6. Direct progressive scan, which includes 2-3 pull-down processing icr smoother
video from film-based sour@s.7. High-speed video DAC.8. Video outputs are all active simultaneously.9. lcon-based, on-screen display10. DVD/CD player to be Integra Model DPC-7.5 or approved equal.
B. UTP Video Patch Panel:
1. See section 16901 for patch panel specifications.2. Provide a minimum of 10 1+neter patch cables utilized Extron UTP23SF-4X En-
hanced Skew-Free AA/ UTP cable or approved equal.
C. Composite Video Palch Panel:
1. Steel chassis with strong epoxy coated sleel weldments.2. Adjustable steel strain relief cable bar with holes for cable ties.3. Highest quality, widest bandwidth, longst lasting jacks available.4. True 75 ohm impedance.5. Molded jack inserts come in a variety of colors and are much stronger than phe-
nolic inserts.6. Designation strip holders for labeling jacks.7. Standardjacks.8. Analog or SD video Jacks rated to 2.4GHz.9. Single or dual, self normalling or straight lhrough, non-terminating or 75 Ohm
terminating and stiandard spacing.10. 2 RU high.1'l. Standard jack panels in 2x24 arrays.12. Colored inserts available.13. Video patch panel to be ADC Pro Patch WSI Series.14. Confirm final panel operation with owner prior to ordering equipment.15. Provide a minimum of 10 l-meterADC video patch cords.
D. TV and Cable Tuner:
1. Provided by owner2. AV integrator to provide shelf and connection cable for tuner.
E. Video OverTwisted Pair Cable:
1. Cable to be Extron UTP23SF-4 enhanced skew-free AV UTP cable or approved
equal.2. See Section 16920 for mounting and wiring specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. New Wiring: Install wiring in raceways except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and
counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum-board partitions where
AA #2006 9026 16851-3 07t20t06
5.2
cable wiring method may be used. Use plenum cable in environmental air spaces includ-
ing plenum ceilings. Where possible for all audio cabling except microphone cables, mi-
crophone cables shall be installed in conduit. Conceal cables and raceways except in un-
finished spaces. Cable shall be installed continuous with no splices or cuts.
B. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural mem-
bers, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or simi-
lar fittings so designed and installed to avoid damage to cables. Secure cable at intervals
not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, or fittings.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets.
D. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power
wiring runs. lnstall in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, sepa-
rate conductors at least 12 inches for speaker microphones and adjacent parallel power
and telephone wiring.
E. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide
matching networks where required.
F. ldentification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and ca-
ble marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination
with system wiring diagrams.
G. Wall-Mounting Outlets: Flush mounted.
H. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or
where exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.
L All terminations shall be installed per manufacture/s specifications and recommenda-
taons.
GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at all equipment display locations. lsolate from power
system and equipment grounding.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Schedule tests with at least seven days'advance notice of test performance.2. After installing display equipment and after input signals are available and cali-
brated after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with re-
quirements.
3. Operational Test: Perform test and calibration video display and sound per
manufacturer installation training. Verify proper signal levels and that system is
free of noise and distortion with all signals provided at outlet.
3.3
AA #2006 9026 16851-4 07t20t06
B. Retesting: Conect deficiencies in video and audio display and retest. Prepare a written
record of tests.
C. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and all interconnecting
wires and terminals are identified.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Veriff that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacture/s submittal and instal-
lation requirements.
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacture/s latest revision of
wriften or media instructions.
END OF SECTION 16851
AA #2006 9026 16851-5 07t20t06
sEcTtoN 16901
TELECOMMU NICATIONS CABLI NG
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I and related Division 16 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section describes the general telecommunications infrastructure requirements of
these specifications and applies to all phases of the work specified, indicated on the
drawings, or required to provide for the complete installation of telecommunications infra-
structure for this project.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Telecommunications Cables: Term includes horizontal and backbone copper, fiber optic,
and coaxial cabling; copper and optical outside plant cables; copper audio/visual cables;
CCTV cables; building environmental, automation, and security wiring systems.
B. Telecommunications Pathways: A cable distribution system consisting of raceways, ca-
ble trays, racks, and ladders; conduits; distribution rings and mechanical cable supporting
devices.
1.4 WARRANTIES
A. The Contractor shall warant all materials, workmanship, and equipment against defects
for a period of one year after the date of substantial completion. The Contractor shall re-
pair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any item which may become defective
within the warranty period. Any manufacturers' warranties concerning any item installed
will run to the benefit of the Owner.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following abbreviations apply throughout this section:
1. ASTM Specification: Standard specifications of the American Socie$ for Testing
Materials.2. EMI: Electromagneticinterference.3. FO: Fiber optic.4. IDC: Insulation disolacement connector.5. LAN: Local area network.6. MM: Multimode.7. NEC: National Electrical Code, latest edition.8. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.9. SM: Single mode.',|0. Underuriters or UL: Underwriters Laboratories. lnc.11. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
AE #2006 9026 16901-1 10/09/06
,I.6 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Provide a minimum 15-year structured cabling application assurance wananty from one
of the following manufacturers:
1. Systimax.2. CommScope.3. Uniprise.4. Belden.5. ADC.6. Hubbel.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with ANSI/T|A/E|A-568-8.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard - Part 1 General Requirements.
D. Comply with ANSI/T|A/E|A-568-8.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard - Pari 2 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components.
E. Comply with ANSI/T|A/E|A-568-8.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.
F. Comply with ANSI/TIA/ElA 569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces.
G. ANSIiTIA/EIA-7S8 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Standard.
H. Comply with BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition.
l. Comply with BICSI Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual, current edition.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
B. Construction record drawings including station outlet numbers.
C. Product data.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate and schedule all construction work with the Owner and occupant prior to be-
ginning work. Do not intenupt building activities without strict coordination with the
Owner and occupant. Unscheduled appearance to work in the spaces without prior
scheduling with the Owner is not allowed.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of voice and data communication cabling with Owner's
telephone switch, telephone instrument, workstation, telecommunications and LAN
equipment suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange car-
rier.
C. Coordinate installation of telecommunications cabling with the raceway installer. Verify
raceways are installed according to cunent EIA/TIA standards before installing cable.
AE #2006 9026 16901-2 't0/09/06
D. Coordinate with pathway installer to ensure that EIA/TIA distance limits and installation
tolerances are maintained. Outlets that are beyond EIA/TIA distance shall be brought to
the Owner/Engineer's aftention as soon as possible. Owner/Engineer shall not be re-
sponsible for outlets beyond distance limits as a result of incorrectly routed pathways.
1.9 MATERIALS
Unless otheryvise specified, all materials and equipment shall be new, unused, and un-
damaged. Materials and equipment shall be the current and standard designs of manu-
facturers regularly engaged in their production.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
Cable Management and Equipment Support:
1. Raceway and Boxes: Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."2. Backboards: 3/4-inch, fuC rated, interior-grade, fire-retardant-treated plywood.3. Equipment Racks:a. Wall-mounting, aluminum units with TIA/EIA 19-inch rack mounting de-
signed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with di-
mensions of units to be supported.b. Provide equipment racks as required to mount the quantity of patch pan-
els provided with space for 50% expansion. Include expansion space
required for cable management.c. Provide horizontal cable management above and below each patch
Panel.4. Cabinets:a. Wall-mount Cabinets:1) Designed so access to all internal components can be from the
front or rear of the cabinet body by way of a dual hinge design.
Symmetrical in design to allow front and rear sections to open
left or right.5. Horizontal Cable Management:a. Include components that aid in routing, managing, and organizing cable
to and from equipment, protect network equipment by controlling cable
bend radius and providing cable strain relief, and a universal design
mounted to EIA 19-inch racks.b. Install the horizontal cable management panel in between each patch
panel.
6. Distribution Rings:a. Wall Mounted 4-lnch D-Rings:1) Plastic: Chatsworth No. 12127-00'l orequivalent2) Metal: Senior Industries No. 4753 or equivalent3) Post Type: Chatsworth No. '15002-002 or equivalent7. Cable Bundling Hardware:a. Reusable Velcro cable ties.
Twisted-Pair Cables, Connectors, and Terminal Equipment
Horizontal Cables: Listed as complying with Category 6 of TIA/EIA 568-8.
UTP Cable Connecting Hardware:a. Patch Panel:1) Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-
type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair
groups of installed cables.
A.
B.
D.
1.
z-
AE #2006 9026 16901-3 10/09/06
2) Provide patch panels wired 5688 in communications closet to
terminate data station cables. Mount in equipment racks. See
detail drawings.b. Punch-Down Blocks:1) Type: 1102) Provide punch-down blocks for termination of voice cables.
Mount blocks on backboards in a secure and orderly fashion.
See detail drawings. Allow adequate space for installation of
cross-connect wires. Provide jumper management to neatly ar-
range jumper cables.3) Provide 4-pair connecting blocks for termination of station ca-
bles. Provide S-pair connecting blocks for termination of riser
cables. Install 4-pair and s-pair connecting blocks on separate
wiring blocks.
E. Fiber Optic Cables:
1. Cables: Factory fabricated, tight buffered, jacketed, low loss, glass type, fiber
optic cables, 125 micron cladding diameter.2. Cable Types:a. 62.5 Micron Core Diameter Multimode:1) Maximum Attenuation: Minus 3.75 dB/km at 850 nm. minus 1 .5
dB/km at 1300 nm.2, Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz/km at 850 nm; 500
MHz/km at 1300 nm. Make bandwidth measurements using
lengths of 1 km or greater.3) Transmission Distances for Gigabit Ethemet: 300 meters for
1000 Base SX and 550 meters for 1 000 Base LX.4) Fiber shall be certified to have laser optimized cores.
F. Fiber-Optic Connectors and Termination Equipment
1. Cable Connectors: ST connectors with self-centering, axial alignment mecha-
nisms. lnsertion loss not more than 0.7 dB.2. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered cable connectors.
G. General Optical Fiber Termination:
'l. Directly terminate all fiber optic cable with ST composite/ceramic connectors.2. Use manufacturer-furnished nylon cable wrap to bundle pigtails.3. Terminate, install, protect cable and fiber according to the connector manufac-
turer's recommended oractices.4. Incorporate industry standard color coding and positioning within the enclosures.
H. Cable Bundling Products:
1. Reusable, adjustable, cable straps, capable of withstanding fastening to wall with
screws or equipped with snap-and-button fasteners. Black in color. With or
without cinch ring as applicable.
l. Jacks and Jack Assemblies for UTP Cable: Modular. color-coded. RJ45 receotacle units
with integral IDc-type terminals.
1. Voice Jack:a. Mounting: In modular faceplate
AE #2006 9026 16901-4 10/09/06
b. TIA/EIA Category: 3c. Pins: 8d. Connection: T5688e. Color: To match existing2. Voice Jack (Wall Phone):a. Mounting: Wall plate with studs to support phone
b. TIA/EIA Category 3c. Plate: To match existingd. Pins: 8e. Connection: T56883. Data Jack:a. Mounting: In modular faceplateb. TIA/EIA Category: 6c. Gonnection: T5688d. Color: To match existing4. Provide one voice jack for each telephone outlet. Provide data jack(s) and voice
jack(s) for each combination outlets as indicated on drawings. Provide additional
jacks as indicated on drawings.5. Provide a filler for each unused faceplate opening.6. Install jacks in outlet boxes indicated on drawings. Provide faceplates as re-
quired.
J. UTP Patch Cords:
1. Four-pair cables terminated with RJ-45 plug at each end.2. Category 6.3. Color:a. Blue for data.4. The same manufacturer as the connectivity.5. Lengths:a. Workstation: 10 feet.b. Closet: 10 feet.6, Lengths listed above are for bidding purposes only. Coordinate specified length
and color with Owner prior to purchasing cords.7. Provide one workstation patch cord for each outlet assembly.8. Provide one closet patch cord for each outlet assembly.
1,10 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.11 INSTALLATION
A. Demolition:
1. Do not remove cable from the building prior to successful cutover of all services
to the new cabling.2. After successful cutover of all services, remove horizontal station cable and ter-
mination equipment that has been replaced with new cable. Provide blank cov-
ers for abandoned outlet boxes. Coordinate closely with Owner when removing
cable as some cables may be under jurisdiction of building occupant. Do not re-
move cables with active services. Coordinate transition of active services to new
AE #2006 9026 16901-5 10/09/06
cable system with Owner. Firestop penetrations and sleeves affected by removal
of cable to mainlain the required fire rating.3. Remove all cable from site.
B. Horizontal Cable:
1. Provide horizontal cables from each outlet to the nearest communication closet
as indicated on the drawings.2. Route cables from outlets to communication closets so that the maximum cable
length is 295 feet or 90M. Install cables parallel to the building structure.3. Neatly arrange cables in cable trays and in telecommunications rooms.4. For areas and locations that are close to EIA/TIA distance limits, run a length test
on proposed routing to said area or location. Inform Owner and Engineer of any
jacks beyond EIA/TIA distiance limits. Owner and Engineer shall not be respon-
sible for out-ofdistance outlets that are not tested prior to installation.
C. Provide cutover connections necessary to transfer voice and data communication signals
to the new cable system.
D. Protect the existing electronics, cables, and enclosures from possible damage as there
are active circuits and equipment in the building.
E. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and not more than 6
inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
F. Optical Fiber Cable Installalion:
1. Install cable in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications for installation
and loading. Do not violate the short and long term cable loading.2. Provide service loop of 3 feet at outlet and 10 feet at telecom room.
G. Terminate cables in accordance with EIA/T|A-568-B Commercial Building Telecommuni-
cations Wiring Standard, observing the industry standards for terminating the various
types of color coded cables within a building.
H. Adequately support cables from building structure in such a manner that the cable will not
be damaged by normal building use. Provide strain relief for the cables above sus-
pended ceilings, and where any continuous cable support system is interrupted, using
mechanical fasteners such as Category 5 rated J-hooks and other necessry devices to
support cables from the structure or ceiling support. Do not use suspended ceiling sup-
port wires or ceiling grid to support telecommunications cabling.
l. Route cables in a direct path between the termination points. Neatly anange cables in J-
hooks and in communication closets. Provide "D' rings spaced a maximum of 12" on
center to support cables run on the face of any plywood wall.
1.12 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fiftings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including
chips, scratches, and abrasions.
AE #2006 9026 16901€10/09/06
1..I3 APPLICATION OF MEDIA
A. Horizontal Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 and fiberoptic cable for runs be-
tween telecommunications rooms and workstation outlets.
B. Horizontal Cable for Voice Service: Use UTP Category 3 cable for runs between tele-
communications rooms and workstiation outlets.
1.14 TELECOMMUNICATIONSLABELING
A. Quality Assurance:
1. Comply with ANSI/T|A/E|A-606 administration Standard for the Telecommunica-
tions I nfrastructure at Commercial Buildings.
B. ldentificationProducts:
1. Cable Labels: Self-Adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, ma-
chine printed with alphanumeric cable designations.2. Label Maker: Brady l.D. Pro or approved equivalent.
C. ldentification and Labeling:
1. General Label Requirements:a. Mechanically print and install all labels per drawing details.b. Format: Select font size to be readable and to fit all information required
without overlap of text. Recommended font: Helvetica, Bold.c. Use all caoital letters. Use a one-line format.d. Clean all surfaces prior to attachment of any label. Follow manufac-
turer's recommendations for cleaning and affixing labels.2. Telecommunications Outlets and Termination Hardware:a. Label each station outlet block, station outlet faceplate, and patch panel
per EIA/TIA standards or Owner standards.3. Inside Plant Cables:a. Label Location: Within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is
accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indi-
cated.b. Label Information: Cable number. Follow ElA,/TlA standards or Owner
standards.c. Method: Brady cable labels appropriately sized or approved equal.
1.15 TELECOMMUNICATIONSTESTINGANDDOCUMENTATION
A. General Testing Requirements:
1. Install and terminate cables prior to testing.2. Reterminate and retest cables which fail.3. ReDlace cables which fail the second test.4. Utilize cable testing equipment capable of generating a report for each cable
tested. Provide a hard copy report per TIA/E|A-568-B.5. Provide certification reports printed on 8-112 inch x 11 inch sheets. Provide one
or more three-ring binders as required to contain reports. Provide a separate tab
for each group of cables served from a common communication room. Provide
AE #2006 9026 16901-7 10/09/06
B.
an additional tab for backbone cables. Present cable testing results in a matrix
format.6. Perform Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demon-
strate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal
path for end{o-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove
temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.7. Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity
and shorts. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations.
Copper Horizontal Cable Testing:
1. Test horizontal cables from the punch-down blocks, patch panels, or other termi-
nation equipment, to the jacks unless othenvise noted.2. Test horizontal cables from punch-down block to punch-down block.3. Field Test Requirements for a Category 5e Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Sys-
tem:a. General Requirements:1) Test every cabling link in the installation in accordance with the
Telecommunications Industry Association (TlA) Standard
ANSI/T|A/E|A-5688, 100-Ohm Twisted-Pair Transmission Per-
formance and Field Test Requirements.2) The installed twisted-pair horizontal links shall be tested from the
IDF in the telecommunications room to the telecommunications
wall outlet in the work area against the "Permanent Link" per-
formance limits specification as defined in ANSI/T|A/E|A-568-8.3) Test 100 percent of the installed cabling links. All cable links
must pass the requirements of the standards mentioned above
and as further detailed below.b. Performance Test Parameters:1) Test all horizontal copper station cables for Category 6 according
to the parameters set for in the TIA/E|A-568-B Standard. The
test of each Category 6 link must contain the following parame-
ters as detailed below. In order to pass the link test, all meas-
urements at each frequency in the range ftom 1 MHz through
250 MHz must meet or exceed the limit value determined in the
above-mentioned Category 6 standard.2) Perform the following tests as defined in TIA/E|A-568-B: Wire
map, length, insertion loss (aftenuation), NEXT loss, pair-to-pair
PSNEXT loss, ELFEXT loss, pair{o-pair PSELFEXT loss, return
loss, ACR, PSACR, propagation delay and delay skew.c. Test Result Documentiation:1) Record the test results information for each link in the memory of
the field tester upon completion of the test.2) Transfer the test results records saved by the tester into a Win-
dowstM-based database utility that allows for the maintenance,
inspection and archiving of these test records. Guarantee that
the measurement results are transferred to the PC unaltered,
i.e.. "as saved in the tester". at the end of each test and that
these results cannot be modified at a later time.3) Provide a paper copy of the tesl results that lists all the links that
have been tested with the following summary information:a) The identification of the link in accordance with the nam-
ing convention defined in the overall system documenta-
tion.
AE #2006 9026 16901-8 10/09/06
D.
b) The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test in-
cluding the NEXT Headroom (overall worst case) num-
ber.c) The date and time the rest results were saved in the
memory of the tester.
Category 3 Voice Cable Testing:
1. Test for continuity and wire map.
Optical Fiber Testing:
1. GeneralRequirements:a. Test every fiber optic cabling link in the installation in accordance with
the field test specifications defined by the Telecommunications Industry
Association (TlA standard ANSI/T|A/E|A-568-B (or by the appropriate
network application standard(s)) whichever is more demanding. See
paragraph "Performance Test Parameters' in this Section.b. Field test instruments for multimode fiber cabling must meet the require-
ments of ANSI/T|A/E|A-526-144. The light source must meet the launch
requirements of ANSUEIA/T|A-455-508, Method A. Achieve this launch
condition either within the field test equipment or by use of an external
mandrel wrap (as described in Clause 11 of ANSI/TltuElA-568-8.1) with
a Category 1 light source.1) Field test instruments for singlemode fiber cabling must meet the
requirements of ANSI/ElA/Tl A-526-7.
END OF SECTION 16901
AE #2006 9026 16901-9 10/09/06
(i,,
VAIL MOUNTAIN
RESORT & sPA
,\arnott^
Cold Krv
lltc i1t i't t t
"Cottrlt Nttsf c TLtlt Tt'tt
Skl llcsorls" Azr,nltl \Nittttr't
t fi*,'fia^*/
@s1 t*"r
c l;v9lt
Decembet 7,2006
Town of Vail
Va4 CO 81658
To Whom It May Concern:
On the odginal plans for the renovation of the Grand Balkoom, thete wete two
spaces in the back hallway that wete indicated for Audio Visual equipment. As builg
we only need to uae ooe of these rooms fot the Audio Visual equipment and the
other room will be a store toom. This is to cettifv that the hotel will onlv use the
other room as a non-opetational store room.
Genetal Manager
715 West Lionshead Circle . Vail, Colorado 81,657 . (970\ 176-4444 . Fax (970) 476-1647 . lv$'rv.vailmarriott.com
TOWN OF VAIL FIRE DEPARTMEN' VAIL FIRE DEPARTMENT
75 S. FRONTAGEROAD
VAIL. CO 81657
no-479-2135
NOTE: THIS PERMIT MUST BE POSTED ON JOBSITE AT ALL TIMES
ALARM PERMIT Permit #: A06-0098 -bcta-o7tlZ-
Job Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL Status . . . : ISSUED
Location.....: VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM Applied . . : lll}ll2ffi
Parcel No...: 2l0lO72O5Ol5 Issued . . : l2/05120f,6
ProjectNo I r-F.nO6 6 S(-tl Expires. .: 06/03/2007
ounrBR vAMHc rNc Lt/oL/2oo6
PO BOX 7
VAIIJ
co 81558
APPTTTCANT ATTARMSPECTALTSTS, rNC LL/OL/2006 .Phone: (303) 985-5900
9457 S. UNIVERSITY BI.,VD, #5]-4
HIGHI,ANDS RJANCH
co 80]-26
License:693-S
CONTRACTOR AIJARMSPECIALISTS, rNC tL/01/2006 Phone: (303) 986-5900
9457 S. UNTVERSITY BI-,VD, #514
HIGHI,A}TDS RANCH
co 80r.25
I-,icense : 693 -S
Desciption: MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM-FIRE ALARM LJPGRADE TO THE TENAT
AREAS.
Valuation: $27.968.00
Electrical----- >
DRB Fee----- >
Investigation-- >
Will Call------>
TOTAL FEES-> $1,280.80
Approvals:
Item: 05500 FIRE DEPARTMENI
tL/02/2006 mcgee
Total Calculated Fees-> $1,280.80
Additional Fees----------> $232.00
Total Permit Fee-.---- > 91 , 512 . 80
Payments-------:- > $1, 5L2 .80
BALANCE DUE------.. >so.oo
Action: DN Plans do not meet spefications reqiring re'
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
€0.00
-F l-re
Protection Engineer of Record.
Specific devices are not specified on plans or submittals.
No detection in HVAC is shown.
Detector in pre-funtion lobby is shown on sloped surface at coffered ceiling.
I-,ocation od BPS is not apporved,
Sequencing does not indicate flow swit,ch will activate exterior flow indicator.
Standby battery calc's do not meet TOV published requirements.
Shunt to amplified sound amps is not shown.
Resubmittal is recruired.
Additional plan revietl"" assessed.
t2/0s/2006 mcgee Action: AP review of resubmittal received lL/2!/o5
CONDITIONS OF APPROVAL
DECLARATIONS
I hereby asknowledge that I have read this application, filled out in full the information required, completed an accurate plot
plan, and state that all the information as required is correct. I agree to comply with the information and plot plan, to comply
with all Town ordinance$ and state laws, and to build this structure according to the towns zoning and suMivision codes, design
review approved, Intemational Building and Residential Codes and other ordinances ofthe Town applicable thereto.
REQUESTS FOR INSPECTION SHALL BE MADE TWENry.FOUR HOURS IN ANCE BY E AT 479-2135 FROM 8:lD AM - 5 PM.
OWNER OR CONTRACTOR FOR HIMSELF AND OWNEF
*****,i*+*******:|*t***********************'i**********'|r|+**+******+***********,F*+*t*t*'f*'f***+'l'
TOWNOFVAIL, COLORADO Statement
** **** ******** * 'F***,$,i,*'i,it,i****,1**+*** t**X.:t ttrt:t'l''$ * * * * * ****
'N.
** ** * * 'l,i 't *,|l,1. *
'1.
* l. * *** 'l*********'|****
$L, s12.80 t2/ 05/2OO5L0 : 19 Alt
Init: LC
Notation: #1926/Ar.ARM
StaEement Number: R050002049 Amount:
Pa)rment Metshod: Check
SPECIAI,IST
Permi t No:
ParceL No:
Site Address :
Location:
This Palment:
BP 00100003111100
PF 0 01000 031123 00
$1, 512.80
Total Fees:
Total ALL Pmts :
BaLance:
$1,s12.80
$1, sr_2 .80
$0.00
A05 - 0098 TIE)e: AI,ARM PERMIT
2101-072-0501-5
714 W IJIONSHEAD CR VAII'
VAIIJ MARRTOTT GRAND BA]'I'ROOM
**** + * t +*'t*++{.+ ++ {r+{.{.++{.**{.{.*+* ** * * * * ** ***** ** * * ** *+ + * * + + + t ****+++++*'}********,i***++********
ACCOIJNTITEM LIST:
Account Code Description Current Pmta
FIRE AI,ARM PERMIT FEES
PI,,AN CHECK FEES
1, 280.80
232 . OO
TOWN OF VAIL
75 S. FRONTAGEROAD
VAIL, CO 81657
970-479-2138
ELECTRICAL PERMIT
Job Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL
Location.....: VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM
ParcelNo...: 210107205015
projectNo : ?Itl;OG _o3GLl
owNER VAMHC rNC 1_O/L9/2OO6
PO BOX 7
VAILco 815s8
APPLICANT E C ELECTRIC, INC .C,/O VAI,I. LO/L9/2OO6
747 W. WH]TE AVENT'E
GRJ${D iII]NCTION
co 81501
I-,icensel. 262-E
CoNTRACTOR E C Er_,ECTRIC, INC .C/O VALI_, 1_O/L9/2006
747 W. WHITE AVENUE
GRJAND .]I'NCTION
co 8r_50r.
License : 262-E
Q*o*rrrNr oF coMMUNrrY oev?oprraeNr
NOTE: THIS PERMIT MUST BE POSTED ON JOBSITE AT ALL TIMES
Permit #: E06-0225
3d--oX.qZ
ISSUED
ro/19t2006
10t3012006
Mt28t2N7
Phone | 97O-24L-33O2
Phone. 97O-24L-33O2
Desciption: MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM-NEW DIMMING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR
EXISTING LIGHTS, NEW RECEPTACLES IN BALLROOM, 3 NEW PANETS
Valuation: $400,000.00 Square feet: 0
FEE SUMMARY ,1.*t tt't*!i"t(*:r**:!****xi(**1.*t({.*'i.'il.:r:r't't*:t:r:li*i+x:t,t:i.i:****t(**)*:t*****
Electrical--------- >
DRB Fee----- >
Investigation--- >
Will Call--------- >
TOTAL FEES-- >
$0.00
s0.00
s3.00
9€,340. s0
s8,340.50
$0.00
s8,340. s0
98,340. s0
$0.00
Total Calculated Fees->
Additional Fees---------- >
Total Permit Fee---- >
Payments--------- >
BALANCE DUE-___>
Approvals:
Item: 05000 EIJECTRICAI-, DFPARTMENT
70/24/2006 shabn Action: Ap
ITeM: 05600 FIRE DEPARTMENT
CONDITIONS OF APPROVAL
Cond: L2
(BI-,DG.): FIEI-,D INSPECTIONS ARE REQUIRED TO CHECK FOR CODE COMPLIANCE.
DECLARATIONS
I hereby acknowledge that I have read this application, filled out in full the information required, completed an accurate plot
plan, and stat€ that all the information as required is correct. I agree to comply with the information and plot plan, to comply
with all Town ordinances and state laws, and to build this structure according to the towns zoning and subdivision codes, design
review approved, International Building and Residential Codes and other ordinances of the Town applicable thereto.
REQUESTS FOR INSPECTION SHAL OUR HOURS IN ADVANCE BY TELEPHONE AT 479-2149 OR AT OUR OFFICE FROM 8:00 AM - 4
TOWN OF VAIL, COLORADO Statement
**{r****** ** **** * ************ ************ **** ** *** ******* ******{..1.***********{.*:1.,1.*:1.'1.*,1.*:}{.** * **
Statement Number: R050001828 Amou.nt: $8,340.50 IO/30/200610:L1 AIvl
Palrment Method: Check Init: DDG
Notation: Ec ELectric
Inc. 5443
Permit No: E.O5-O225 T)t)e: EL,ECTRICAL PERMIT
Parcel No: 2101- 072 - 0501-5
Site Addregs: 714 W L,IONSHEAD CR VAIL
IIocaIion: VAII., MARRIOTT GRAI{D BA],IJROOM
Total Fees: S8,340.50This Payment: $8,340.50 Total Ar..,L Pnts: $8,340.50Balance: $0.00
ACCOUNT ITEM LIST:
Account Code Description
EP OO1OOOO31111OO ELECTRICAI., PERMIT FEES
WC OO1.OOOO31128OO WILI, CAI,I., INSPECTION FEE
Current Pmts
8,337.50
3 .00
APPUCATION WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED IF INCOMP
o
LETE OR
Project;
Building
-03 6,v
f56-oLzf Electrical Permit #:
970-479-2t49
75 S. Frontage Rd.
Vail, Colorado 81657
CONTRACTOR IN FORTTIATION
FC
Contact Person and Phone #'s:
,&n /2a f%- 9/87
Fax#= //a..z//L 2ytz
COMPLETE SQ. FOOTAGE FOR AREA OF WORK AND VALUATION OF WORK (Labor & Materials)
ELECTRICAL VALUATION:'42. z,e,, r-'AMOUNT OF SQ FT IN STRUCTURE:
ConEct Awts Office at 97O-328-8640 or visit for Parcel #
h/1,/?r-zwq/:^
Phone'. zpn_ D7- 6/(
rc<a-1, 7),r( /e-.'-- 4a
/*.-',ir C e2 lrd.Jyt /'-
4)ft4 P-+te,/ '"+u f'#i";Zt
Work0ass: New() AddiUon( ) Remodelf4- Repair( ) TempPower( ) Other( )
Does an EHU exist at this location: Yes ( ) No ( )WorkType: Interior(4 Exterior( ) Both( )
Typeof Bldg.: Single.family( ) Duplo<( ) Multi-family( ) Commercialrfld Restaurant( ) Other( )
No. of Accommodation Units in this building:No. of Existing Dwelling Unib in this building:
it for a hot tub: Yes
Does a Fire Sprinkler System Exist:Does a Fire Alarm Exish Yes b{ No ( )
CF - -\gEvo, { v
******r"*****************:***************FOR OFFICE USE ONLY*************************************
L f ottc'f(-'Ll l.PlannenS[Elt.itlf: ;;.: .1.:l'.], ': ', ,'', 1
I
F:\dev\FORMS\PERMITS\Buildi ng\electicalJerm iL1 1-23-2005. DOC Page 1 of 2 tll23l2005
o
o
I
Amendment to the 2002 N.E.C. Town of Vail Ordinance 4. Series of 20O5
Overhead services are not allowed in the Town of Vail,
Underground services shall be in conduit (PVC) from the utility transformer to the electric meter, main
disconnect switch, and to the first electrical distribution circuii breaker panel.
The main disconnect switch shall be readily accessible, aadlocated next to the meter on the exterior wall of
the structure. All underground conduits are required to be inspected before back-filling the trench.
In multi-family dwelling units, no electrical wiring or feeder cables shall pass from one unit to another. Common
walfs and spaces are exempt
NM Cabfe (Romex) can b u*d only in single and multi-hmily dwellings net exding 3 sbries.
Type IIM cannot be usd in any building mixed with fype LB.E EHTITM &S occupanciu.
Aluminum ondudorcsmaller than size #8 are not permitted with the Town of Vail.
TOWN OF VAIL ELECTRICAL PERMIT GUIDELINES
All installations of exterior hot tubs or spa's require a DRB approval from planning. This application will
not be accepted without a copy of the DRB approval form attached (if applicable).
If this permit is for installation of an exterior hot tub or spa on a new elevated platform or deck over
30" above grade, you must also obtain a building permit.
If this permit is for installation of an exterior hot tub or spa on any existing deck or elevated platform,
a structural engineer must review the existing condition and veriff that it will suppott the added
concentrated load. Please provide a copy of the structural engineers wet stamped letter or drawing
with this application.
If this is a remodel in a multi-family building with a homeowners association, a letter of permission
from the association is required.
If this permit is for a commercial space, two (2) sets of stamped drawings are required. Electrical
one4ine and panel schedules are reguired if load is added or distribution is altered,
If you have any questions regarding the above information or have additional questions,
please contact the Town of Vail Electrical Inspector at970-479-2147. The inspector can be
reached on Monday thru Friday mornings betureen the hours of 8am and gam. You may also
leave a voice mail and the inspector will call you back. : '. . '. ., -''r'.
'li,r' ,.' "r tt-- .,
F:\cdaAFORMS\PERMm\Building\electjcal-.oerm it_1 1-23-2005. DOC Page 2 of 2 7Ll23l2m5
o
ARTMENTTOWN OF VAIL FIRE DEPARTME
75 S.FRONTAGEROAD
VAIL, CO 81657
970-479-2135
VAIL FIRE DEP
NOTE: THIS PERMIT MUST BE POSTED ON JOBSITE AT ALL TIMES
SPRINKLER PERMIT PErMit #: FO6-OO7O
-TfiG-Oi.(Z
Job Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL Status . . . : ISSUED
Location.....: VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM Applied . . : 1110112006
Parcel No...: 210107205015 Issued. . : 1112112006
ProjectNo : -',e.TOG -Os6.f Expires. .:
owNER VAMHC rNC L1,/0L/2006
PO BOX 7
VAII,co 816s8
APPIJICANT CENTRAL FIRE PROTECTIoN L1-/0l/2006 Phone: 303-576-8157
LO775 E. 51ST AVM{IIE
DENYER
co ao2L6
License:447-S
CONrRACTOR CEI\I:TRAIJ FIRE PROTECTION LI/0:-/2006 Phone: 303-576-8157
1-0775 E. 51ST AVENI'E
DENVER
co 802L5
IJicense : 447 -S
Desciption: MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM-2 HEAD RELOCATES, I HEAD PER
BUILDING PER MIKE MCGEE
Valuation: $800.00
FEE SUMMARY +ll* * *** *** *** *,*:l'* rt!** * !t**,*** **,* )* {.*t )**.* **!i( *'1.,i *:li ** 't*r! ** '*:t** 't:*r'*
Mechanlcal--> 90. oo Restuarant Plan Review-> $0. oo Total Calculated Fees--> S384.00
Plan Check--> 9350.00 DRB Fee----------- > $0.00 Additional Fe€s------ > $0.00
Investigation- > $0.00 TOTAL FEES-------> $384-oo Totat Permit Fee----- > $384.00
Will Call---- >$0.00
Iten: 05100 BUII-,DING DEPARTMENT
Item: 05600 FIRE DEPARTMENT
LL/02/20O6 mcg'ee Action: AP Plans are approved on basis of plan review
with
architect, cC and fire sprinkler contractor,
Existj.ng condj-tions are not exempt from code compliance. Any exposed deficiencies
shall be
remedied.
Rough-in inspection is reguired.
Hydrostatic test is required.
CONDITION OF APPROVAL
Cond: 12
(BL,,DG.): FIEI-,D INSPECTIONS ARE REQUIRED TO CIIECK FOR CODE COMPI-,IANCE.
Payments---------- >
BALANCE DUE.-...--.- >
$384.00
DECLARATIONS
*,it.quir"o, completed an accurate plot
plan, and state that all the information as required is correct. I agree to comply with the information and plot plan, to comply
with all Town ordinances and state laws, and to build this structure according to the towns zoning and suMivision codes, design
review approved, International Building and Residential Codes and other ordinances of the Town applicable thereto.
Rf,QUESTS FOR INSPECTION SHALL BE MADE TWENTY-FOUR HOURS IN ADVANCE BY TELEPHONE AT 479-2135
FROM 8:00 AM - 5 PM.
SICNATURE OF CTOR FOR HIMSELF AND OWNET
*********t+**+***+'t*************++*!t*********!t **'t ***'[+*1.'*+*+***{tlt*****{.{.{.{.*******{.**********
TOWNOFVAIL. COLORADO Statement
+:t:i{.* 'i t* 'N.'N.***{. * * **'t'l*'l*'f ***:}+'t 'N.'}*****,t :t :t **+{.tt :} 't ,t' t't t * * '} *{. ** {.'N.'itt*****{.*** * * * * 'N(*{r *++{.*+++**'1.{.*
Statement Nudber: R060002019
Pa)ment Method: Check
Prot.ect,ion 144 04
Amonnt: $384.OO 7l/21-/200501:54 PM
fnit: DDG
Notation: central Fire
Permit No:
Parcel- No :
Site Address :
Location:
This Payment:
BP 00100003111100
PF 00100003112300
F05-0070 TVOE: SPRINKLER PERMIT
2r.01_-072-0501-5
?14 VT LIONSHEJAD CR VAIL
VAII, }/IARRIOTT GRAND BAJ.,I.,ROOM
$384.00
9384.00
$384.00
$0.00
Total Fees:
Total ALl, Pmts :
Balance :
**,t*** * * *'******* *********++*+** **,| * ******t!****** **** * *** * * * *,1.
'1.
tl. {.1. * *:t * *,t:t,} {. ** * ** ****'* * * **,r,l,t*
ACCOTJNT ITEM LIST:
Account Code Description Current Pmtss
SPRINKI,ER PERMTT FEES
PI,AN CHECK FEES
34.00
350.00
o
TMENTTOWN OF VAIL FIRE DEPARTME
75 S. FRONTAGEROAD
VAIL, CO 81657
970-479-2t35
VAIL FIRE DEPAR
NOTE: THIS PERMIT MUST BE POSTED ON JOBSITE AT ALL TIMES
SPRINKLER PERMIT Permit #: F06-0070
kx- o1'(2-
Job Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL Status . . . : ISSUED
Location.....: VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM Applied . . : lll0llZffi6
Parcel No...: 210107205015 Issued . . : 1112112006
Project No : 1.,RT6G - olcll Expires. .:
owNER VAI{HC rNC LL/0L/2O06
PO BOX 7
VAII-,
co 81558
APPIJICAICT CEMTRjAL FIRE PROTECTTON LL/OL/2OO5 Phone: 303-576-8157
to775 E. 51ST AVENI'E
DENVER
co 802L6
L,icense: 447-S
CONIRACTOR CENIRAIJ FIRE PROTECTION !L/OL/2006 Phone: 303-575-81-57
10775 E. 51ST AVENTTE
DENVER
co 80216
License t 44'7 -S
Desciption: MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM-2 HEAD RELOCATES, I HEAD PER
BUILDING PER MIKE MCGEE
Valuation: $800.00
Mechanical-- > 90.00 Restuarant Plan Review- > S0.00 Total Calculated Fees:-> 9384.00
Plan Check-- > $350.00 DRB Fee---------*- > 90.00 Additional Fees------ > 9115 - 00
Investigation-> $0.00 TOTAL FEES---------> $384-00 Total Permit Fe€------ > $500.00
Will Call----> $0-00 Pafnents---------- > $s00.00
BALANCE DUE--------> $o.oo
|****l.********************t||*|*lt*t+***+*****l.*****ti*****+i***t+*
Item: 051"00 BUILDING DEPARTMEN|
Item: 05500 FIRE DEPARTMENT
L!/O2/2O05 mcgee Action: AP Plans are approved on basis of plan review
with
architect, GC and fire sprinkler contractor.
Existing conditions are not exempL from code compliance. Any exposed deficiencies
shall be
remedied.
Rough-in inspection is required.
Hydrostatic tests is required.
CONDITION OF APPROVAL
Cond: 12
(BLDG. ) : FIEI-,D INSPECTIONS ARE REQUIRED TO CHECK FOR CODE COMPLIANCE.
DECLARATIONS
*rr?r*r*, completed an accurate plot
plan, and state that all the information as required is correct. I agree to comply with the information and plot plan, to comply
with all Town ordinances and state laws, and to build this struchrre according to the towns zoning and subdivision codes, desigt
review approved, International Building and Residential Codes and other ordinances ofthe Town applicable thereto.
REQUESTS FOR INSPECTION SHALL BE MADE TWENTY-FOIJ'R IIOURS IN ADVAIICE BY TELEPHONE AT 479-2135
I'ROM E:00 AM - 5 PM.
SIGNATURE OF OWNER OR CONTRACTOR FOR HIMSELF AND OWNEF
***+***********+*+***+*+t+*++++****+**************+++*+**+********+*****{.******************+
TOWNOFVAIL, COI,ORADO Statement
***+***t* *******l* * * * * * * * * ****** *****++**+**+**+*****,i,!,**'i**:+ ** * * ** *******{.+*{.+{.{.****,ft,it,}'}t}:t+
Statement Number: RO6OOO2047 Amount: $l-15.00 L2/05/200609:35 AM
Palment Method: Check Init: DDG
Notation: viele 6083 9
Permit No:
Parcel No:
Si.te Address :
Location:
This Payment:
ACCOI.INT ITEM LIST:
Account Code
BP 00100003111100
Balance: $0. O0
********+***+*+*+++*+++***++++****+*++**********+***+*++++++**f***f*++**********,i****,+***+**
F05-00?0 T)pe: SPRINKLER PERMTT
210 r- - 072 - 05 01- 5
714 W IJIONSHEJAD CR VAII.'
VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BAI,I,ROOM
Tot,al Fees :
$115.00 ToEaI AL,L Pmts :
Descripeion
SPRINKLER PERMIT FEES
$s00. oo
$s00. oo
Current Pmts
115,00
APPLI
o
CATION WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED IF INCOMPLETE OR UNSIGN
Project #: _.a.x f -s. .:. - vroJeG F: rtt.--,\, -r-r,r 7O Buildingpermit#:_l- \) lD - \J \J , sprinkter permit #:
MWNOFYAIL
75 S. Frontage Rd.
Vail, Colorado 81657
Ct tact E,'le Cou
97O-479-2t35 (
without this information:. A- Colorado Registered Engineer's stamp or N.I.C.E.T, Level III (min)
stamp.
. Equipment cut sheets of materials.. Hydrauliccalculations.
. A State of Colorado Plan Registration form.. Plans must be submitted by a Registered Fire protection contractor.
LE
Fire Sprinkler shop drawings a namust include the following. permit application will not be accepted
on lesessors Office at 97O-328-9640 or visit for Parcel #
Parcel # (Required if no btdg. pi
too *u 'ilLo,d/ +/1, o^ r.*tafot-l'a JobAddress:7 l5' /,b11AonJ crrt,
Lesat Description fl r-ot' ll srocr, ll ,,rins,Subdivision:
Owners Name:Address:Phone:
Engineer:/vkrv H"n/l Address:Phone:
Detailed Location of work: (i.e., floor, unit +, UtOg. #)
Detailed descriotion of work:<,tt/o*'/*, Aril | h-rJ ny A-,'/J, ^/0 1^^Der M,,1-, /Vl.,6n-
Work Class: New ( )Addition( ) RemodetrrOffi< IY other ( )
TypeofBtdg.:Sin9|e-family()Two.fami|y()Mu|ti.fami|y(;co''e'@
No. of Existing Dwelling Units in this building:No. of Accommodation Units in this building:
Does a Fire Alarm Exist: Yes fr{.) N- ( )Does a Fire Sprinkler System Exist: vesJdl ) No ( )
COMPLETE V ATIONS FOR ALARM PERMIT (Labor & Materials)
Fire Sprinkler:
I******'l*******+****************-r*******FOR OFFICE USE ONLY****:t**)r**i********+*********rr****r.*:r
ALU ,
fl
)
I
a
ft
(o
ft
o\/
33',+'
Other Fees:Date Received:
Public Way Perm t Fee:Acceoted Bv:
Occupancy Group:
Fire Sprinkler Contractor:Contact and Phone #'s:
&<t, t/tq-[,, ,5st
Contractor Signature:
F :/everyone/forms/sprkperm
L.Lern>L r9 a*Fd
From:
To:
Mike McGee
mheath7s10@aol.com
I
Sublect F06-0070 Mariott Ballroom
Plans are approved on basis ol plan review with architect, GC and lire sprinkler contractor.
Existing conditions aro not exempt from code compliance. Any exposed deficiencies shall be remedied.
Hough-in inspection is required.
Hydrostiatic test is required.
Chris Gunion; Fire_lnspectors
TOWN OF VAIL
75 S. FRONTAGEROAD
VAIL. CO 81657
970-4.79-2138
Qrro*r*rNT oF .'MMUNITY oru?on"r*,
NOTE: THIS PERMIT MUST BE POSTED ON JOBSITE AT ALL TIMES
MECHANICALPERMIT Permit #: M06-0370 $CG Ql{e
Job Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL Status . . . : ISSUED
Location.....: VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM Applied . . : 1112912006
Parcel No...: 210107205015 Issued . . : 1210612006
Legal Description: pa 16 6-oSG t{ Expires . .: 0610412007
Project No : ' '- -
owNER VAMHC fNC LL/29/2OO6
PO BOX 7
VAII,co 816s8
APPLTCAUT R & H MECI{ANrCA], r,LC LI/29/2OO6 Phone: (970) 328-2599
PO BOX 810
EAGLE
co 81631
License:184-M
coIvrRAcToR R & H MECHANTCAL IJIJC 1,L/29/2006 Phone: (970) 328-2699
PO BOX 810
EAGIJEco 81631
I-,icense : 184 -M
Desciption: MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM-CHANGE OUT 2l DEFISSURES WITH
RADIATION DAMPER AND FIRE BLANKETS
Valuation: $12.000.00
Fireplac.e Inforlnatioo: R€stricted:# of cas Appliances: 0 # ofGas Logs: 0 # of Wood Pellet 0
Mechanical--> $240.00 Restuarana Plan Review- >S0.00 Total Calculated Fees--> $303.00
5303 . oo Additional Fees*----- > S0.00
Total Permit Fee-----> $3 03.00
Payments---*:------ > S303.00
BALANCE DUE-.-.-. >s0.00
Item: 05100 BUILDING DEPARTMEIirr
L2/o5/20O6 cgnrnion Actj.on: AP
Item: 05500 FIRE DEPARTMENT
CONDITION OF APPROVAL
Cond:12
(BLDG.): FIELD INSPECTIONS ARE REQUIRED TO CHECK FOR CODE COMPLIANCE.
Cond: 22
(BI-'DG. ) : COMBUSTION AIR IS REQUIRED PER CHAPTER 7 OF THE 2003 IMC AND SECTION
304 OF THE 2OO3 IFGC AS MODIFIED BY TOI'IN OF VAII.,.
Cond: 23
(BI-,DG.): BOIIL,ER INSTALI-,ATION MUST CONFORM TO MANUFACTURERTS INSTRUCTIONS AND
CHAPTER ].0 OF TIIE 2OO3 IMC.
Cond: 25
(BL,DG.) r GAS APPIJIAIICES SHALL,, BE VENTED ACCORDING TO CHAPTER 5 OF TIIE 2003 IFGC.
Cond: 29
(BIJDG. ) : ACCESS TO MECHANICAL EQUfPMENI MUST COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 3 OF THE 2003
Plan Check-- >
Investigation- >
wiu cdl----- >
$50 . oo TOTAL FEES---------->
90.00
s3.00
rMc Ar\D .HAPTER 3 oF rHE ,oOrro"..
Cond: 31
(BLDG.): BOfL,ERS SIIALL BE MOITNTED ON FLOORS OF NONCOMBUSTIBLE CONST. ITNLESS
I.,,ISTED FOR MOI]NIING ON EOMBUSTIBI-,E FIJOORING.
Cond: 32
(BLDG.): PERMIT,PIJAIIS AllD CODE ANAIYSIS MUST BE POSTED IN MECI{ANICAL, ROOM PRIOR
TO AN INSPECTION REQUEST,
Cond: 30
(BLDG.): BOILER ROOMS SIIATJIJ BE EQUIPPPED WITH A FIJOOR DR;AfN OR OTHER APPROVED
MEANS FOR DISPOSING OF TIQUID TCASTE PER SECTION 1004.6.
DECLARATIONS
I hereby acknowledge that I have read this application, filled out in full the information required, completed an accurate plot
plan, and state that all the information as required is correct. I agree to comply with the information and plot plan, to comply
with all Town ordinances and state laws, and to build this structure according to the towns zoning and subdivision codes, design
review approved, Intemational Building and Residential Codes and other ordinances ofthe Town applicable thereto.
REQIJESTS FOR INSPECTION SHALL BE MADE TWENTY.FOI]R HOI]RS IN ADV
PM.
49 OR AT OLJR OFFICE FROM 8:00 AM - 4
SIGNATURE OF O OR CONTRACTOR FOR HIMSELF AND OWNEF
+********++*+*1.****{.**+************************+t+*:1.***{.{.{.**++**********t*+*********t**++***
TOWNOFVAIL. COLORADO Statement
*i*****+lltt*+++'i+tiri****+t*'l'i*+******ff******flf****+++t*++***********************+**t*i***
Statement Nudber: R060002057
Payment Method: Check
ck 18450
Amount: $303.00 a2/05 /200609 : 11 AIlr
Init: LTNotation: R&H Mechanical /
Fermi! No:
Parcel No:
Site Address :
Location:
This Palrment:
ACCOIJNT ITEM LIST:
Account Code
Ir{P 0010000311110 0
PF 00100003112300
wc 00100003112800
M05-0370 Type: MECIIANTCAL PERMIT
2101-072-0501-5
714 W I,IONSHEJAD CR VAI].,
VAIIJ I,IARRIOTT GRAIID BALLROOM
Total Fees:
$303.00 Total ALL Pmts :
Balance:
Descript ion
MECHANI CAI., PERMIT FEES
PI,AII CHECK FEES
WIIJL CAIL INSPECTION FEE
$303.00
$303.00
90.00
Current Pmta
240.00
60.00
3 .00
! rl nn AAA/I N0v, t!i, lut,0I
!
3 : 48 PM R&ll-!|E C HAN I cA L
mr t{aFyn
ii,i'*l"T3on"'ff;.
Project #:
[n]o b-t> 370 Meclranical permii
Building
Permit wilt not Ue
! ^nl^ n ,lN0.Jy0l t, I
o Equipment Crrt/Spec Sheets
CONTRACTORINTO
ftt.7tl-'-,
37a-8ss
Patel tf
JobAddress: 1E U,
Work Class: New ( )Repairt ) otrerl 1*t,.r@tr^tt@
Doesan EHuodstat$r tffi
Type of Btdg: SingtefarnfyT )Orptot I nrru-ArnUytrNo.ofExistinE@
No,.of AccdmmoOation units in ttisTIffi
*******fi**{*******
LYf t|C* * **f ******* ** * !F* x * * * * *,1 * * *
12/alt2886 L6228 3836796 gszo SCOTT PAGE A2
GREENHECK QB'24
QB^24 is a refractory themal blanket consists of a non-asbestos
hidh temDenfurc ceramio fiber blqnket quilted between two layels of
fteerasi cloth. This qullted thermal blanket mderial is listed with UL to
Oe uJad as an acoerisory to GE€nheck's ceiling radiation dampets or to
be used as batt and blanket malerial.
Stock size wailable i3 24 In. x 24 in. (61Omm x 610mm).
Phyeiaal pnopertles:
Color
Nomlnal Density
Use linit, tmd)
Melting Poifi
Gro,
1 G' 1 2 lb/lF 0 60 -1 92 kg/m')
2fi10"F 1125o"C)
3m0"F fl?Secl
ffi.eREENHEcK
O ed Thermal Blanket
3 hour fire resistance rating
US
Ceiling Fdlarbn Datnpei
Clllusst
Thenaal bhdet
(a?ound F lmertot oi diflitstr)
copy.ight O 2005 Otranhack Fln Gorporqdm
O&tr4 R!l.l ADnr 2005
P.O But4ro.Sdrtt!ftr. wt 76.0410, lls,t5f.Al71' rr,fr(w(r.on
t2!87/2W6 L*2A 3636796 aa2a SCOTT PAGE E3
GREENHECK
3 Hour Fire Resistance Rating
c@us
C€fing Radlstim Damper
Themd bhnket
(sruund petheler of thmPerl
Specificationsl
24 in. x 24 in. x I tA in. (61 omm x 6'l Onm r 38rnm)
cut out,.-..-,...... ..-'..,'.-,...5 h. (127mm) dlameter. May b€ cut for lager dffirser necke
non-asbegto€ mirlsral wod
s1t lb/tr (56 ks/tnlDsnBtty
ffi.eREENHEcK
Mineral Wool Thermal Blanket
T&24 is a norr.asbestos mineral wool thermal blankeL This mineral wool
themal blanket material ls listed with UL to be usad ae an aocessory to
cruentrecxt caling radiation dampers or to be used as batt and blanket
matadal, TE 24 is UL tisteo for openings up to 576 square inches'
EO. Ax ,'0. $t ffi, W g7E-At1n. 7fiA&,01tl.9lrnfi.c'tcom
csyylrhl g loll €r|.lrh.clr Fnn cdF..(onlEtl r!r.1 Artt lqF
12-12-2006 Inspection Request Reporting Page 29
4:11 pm Vail- CO'- City Of -
Requested Inspect Date: Wgdnesday, December 13,2006' Inspeition Area: CG
Site Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL
VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM
A/P/D lnformation
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Reouested Inspection(s)
,lD WARREN CAMPBELL - CGUNION
and architect. Flcdev\CHRIS\PERMIT.COMMENTS\806-0242\806-
Sub Tvoe: ACOM
U'se: l-B
Status: ISSUED
lnso Area: CG
Phone: 970-476-3082
Phone: 970-476-3082
FINISH AND ELECTRICAL UPGRADES TO THE
AND ROUTED TO CHRIS GUNION (2), FIRE
ROUTED TO CHRIS GUINION, WARREN
AND STAIRWAYS. SEE LEfiER ON FILE
CLEAR PRIOR TO TCO. - CGUNION
ON AND FOR THE MAIN BALLROOM AND
WHERE NEW T-GRID IS INSTALLED. - CGUNION
NT. PROPOSED VENTILATION HAS BEE ELIMINATED SEE
Item:
Requestor:
Assiofied To:- Action:
Comment:
- l2-,-() (
01:00 PM
331-4779
DGOLDEN
Inspection Historv
Item: 50Item: 60
Comment: 1.
BLDG-lnsulation
BLDG-Sheetrock Nail11/03/06 lnsoec
Comment:
BLDG-Final
12tO7t06
Comment:
) Action:
LING GRID FIRE RESIST
FIRE RESISTIVE CLASSI
R OVER LIGHT FIXTURE
I Approved **
Item: 501 PW-Temo.access/drainaoeItem: 30 BLDG-Frainino
1'1128106 -lnsoector: GC
AlIMft1'
CK CO
11/03/06 lnsoector: NSC
Cqmment: approved patch.work on drywall in
11/09/06 lridoector:' JEC
Comment: Main Ball Room. All walls still had
complete.
I ' ' Action: PA PARTIAL APPROVAL
work on drvwall in Prefunction room
. All walls still had patching to be complete. Will call when all patching is
11110/06 lnsobctor: shahn Action: Pl PARTIAL INSPECTION
omment: mainballroom drywall patch ok. did not penetrate block wall. metel studs used for curtain wall
DESIGN A-202.
Comment: mainballroom
: PA PARTIAL APPROVAL
Action: AP APPROVED
Action: PA PARTIAL APPROVAL
sloraoe.
12107106 lnsoe-ctor: GCD
REPT131 Run Id: 6097
12-05-2006
4.0s o,n ln"p""tl:,l F",TyF?lffPottins t"s" to
Requesti'd Insp.€ct Date: Lvednesday, December 06, 2006
Inspeclion Area: GG
Site Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL
VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM
A/P/D Information
Activitv: B0G0242
Const Tvo6:
Otr,;rier: VAMHC ll
Applicant: J.L. VIELI
Cohtractor: J.L. VIELI
Description: UABBLOI
A-COMM
1892
Status:
Insp Area:
ISSUED
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Comment:
Requested Inspectionls)
Inspection Historv
Item:
Item:
Item:
Item:
Item:
Item:
50 BLDG-lnsulation60 BLDG€heetrock Nail
1 1/03/06 lnsoector: NSC Action: PA PARTIAL APPROVAL
Comment: aooroved Datch work on drvwall in Prefunction room
11/09/06 lrisoector: JEC ' Action: NR NOT READY FOR INSPECTION
Comment: Main Ball Room. All walls still had patching to be complete. Will call when all patching is
comolete.
11110106 Insobctor: shahn Action: Pl PARTIAL INSPECTION
Comment: mainballroom drywall patch ok. did not penetrate block wall. metel studs used for curtain wall
. storage. , _90 BLDG-Final " /J
Sub Tvpe: ACOMUse: l-B
Phone: 970-476-3082
Phone: 970-476-3082
FINISH AND ELECTRICAL UPGRADES TO THE
AND ROUTED TO CHRIS GUNION (2), FIRE
ROUTED TO CHRIS GUINION, WARREN
AND STAIRWAYS. SEE LETTER ON FILE
CLEAR PRIOR TO TCO. - CGUNION
ON AND FOR THE MAIN BALLROOM AND
TO DESIGN A-202.
1 HOUR GRID AND CEILING TILES REOUIRED WHERE NEW T-GRID IS INSTALLED. - CGUNION
fire okav to issue oer verbal. - DGOLDEN
ROUTEDTO PLAN RACKG.1. FIREAND WARREN CAMPBELL.CGUNIONplan review comments sent to apolicant and architect. F:\cdev\CHRIS\PERMIT.COMMENTS\80&0242\806-0242.DOC - CGUNTON '
' L-- /l v
/4oa-e37o /p- C0 /1 U +-/-rf* c*z*6-
l?ta#oo lnspectiol
FeduFst *Forting eage gs
Requested Insp.ect Date: lg.esday, December 05, 2006
Inspection Area: SH
Site Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL
VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM
A/P/D lnformaiion
Requested lnsoection(s)
ltem: 190 ELEC-Final
Requestor: E C ELECTRIC, INC .C/O VALL INSUR
Comments: GrandBallroom
Assioned To: SHAHN- Action: Time Exp: _
-Jit4
L1 4-; ^'? |
Inspection History
Item: 1 10 ELEC-ServiceItem: 120
=.5?,fi?o,En,
Comment:
11/08/06
Comment:
11128t06
Commont:
11t29t06
Comment:
Sub Tvoe: ACOM Status: ISSUEDU'se: Insp Area: SH
Phone: 970-241-3302
Phone: 970-241-3302
ING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR EXISTING LIGHTS, NEW
ELS
Reouested Time: 10:00 AM' Phone: 986-5188
Entered By: DGOLDEN K
lu44 y/
5'loJ t,lj-
CORRECTION REQUIRED
: INCLUDING WALL WASHERS,
T EGRESS LTG THAT IS DIMMED OR TURNED
I UPON ACTIVATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
B.ELEC
) FIRE RATED
STAIRS.
Item:
Item:
Item:
130 ELEC-Conduit
140 ELEC-Misc.190 ELEC-Final
lnr, J ,, n,fer15 L7 6
i / ()r // /td"m )/rJ rt7s o-
fl
fl
n0 r'* ''' r)5 A,,r{"ltZ,n,- /
REPTl31
b |vr\ Sl*'rft'{,
Run Id: 6053
12-11-2006 Inspection Request Reporting Page 39
4:28 om Vail- CO'- City Ol -
Requested Inspect Date: Iqesaay, December '12,20OG
Inspedtion Area: CG
Site Address: 714 W LIONSHEAD CR VAIL
VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM
A/P/O lnformation
Activitv: M06-0370
Const Tvp6:Odrier: VAMHC lt
Aoolicant: R&HME
Cohtractor: R&HME
Descriotion: MARRIOT
Inspeciion Historv
Item: 200 MECH-RouohItem: 390 MECH-FinaT
Twe: B-MECH
Occupahby:
sub rgoe: ACoM hffl5:i 88uED
, LLC
. LLC
BALLROOM.CHANGE
'%
Phone: (970) 32&2699
Phone: (970) 32&2699
OUT 21 DEFISSURES'WITH RADIATION DAMPER AND FIRE
t.-'t I f/^/'lz-
Requested rlnfei
?l1t€fr]g
Maniott Grand Ballroom
-r Entered By: DGOLDEN K
/'1r/,'*
121O7IOO Insoector: GCD Action: GR CORRECTION REQUIRED
Comment: SUPORT CEILING RADAION DAMPERS PER INSTRUCTIONS.
BLANKETS INSTALLED OVER DIFFUSERS.
165 DEGREE FUSIBLE LINK INSTALLED ON DAMPERS.
p
Comment: see mechanical sheets issued with the oermit, - CGUNION
Req uested Inspec'tion(s)
UCTIONS.
REPTl31 Run lds 5094
12-06-2006-q,rao,n Intpt"$311,["dyF?,tfffo*ing p"g" z0
Requested lnspect Date: I[ursday, December 07, 2006
lnsoection Area: CG
Site Address: 714 w LIONSHEAD CR vAlL
VAIL MARRIOTT GRAND BALLROOM
A/P/D Information
Activitv: M06-0370
Const Tvp6:
Owfrer: VAMHC lt
Aoolicant: R&HMECohlractor R&HME
Description: M RBISI
SubTvoe: ACOM Status: ISSUEDU'se: InsD Area: CG
Comment see mechanical sheets issued with the Dermit. - CGUNION
Reouested In6oection(sl
Item: 390 MEGH-Final
Requestor: R& H MECHANICAL LLC/Anthony
Commeqts: Will callAn!!qly4pqn, pls / Maniott Ballropnlo'*sT$lffi JMoNDRAGof K rime Exp: //5
Phone: (970)328-2699
Phone: {9701 328-2699
OUT 21 DEFISSURES.WITH RADIATION DAMPER AND FIRE
l7- 07 - Ob
Reouested Time: 08:30 AM' Phone: Anthonyn3T6-8555 -or- Don
Entered By: LTILLMAN K
O/,,f/,"*(il,*rM.\tt u.ffir.*-*,* Y'h'*/u/ /kffi
iaeni: 300 MEeH-FlnaY / /
d*Jb /.,,,/, le t" n,tfu/'/
0{ Pr*
REPT131 Run Id: 6074